Graupner and KG MX-16-20A Computer System Graupner HoTT User Manual ZKZ MX 16 20

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Computer System Graupner HoTT ZKZ MX 16 20

UserManual.wiki >

Graupner and KG >

MX 16 20A User Manual HTML Version

Users Manual

Programming Manual

33116.mx-16 HoTT.1.gb

HOPPING TELEMETRY TRANSMISSION

mx-16

2Contents

Switch and transmitter control assignment .................. 39

Digital trims .................................................................. 40

Fixed-wing model aircraft............................................. 42

Receiver socket sequence ............................... 43/44

Model helicopters ........................................................ 46

Receiver socket sequence .................................... 47

Program descriptions

Setting up a new model memory ................................. 48

“Model memories” ...................................................... 52

“Base settings” (model)

Fixed-wing model aircraft ......................................56

Binding receivers ............................................. 61

Range-checking ..............................................62

Model helicopter .................................................... 64

Binding receivers ............................................. 70

Range-checking ..............................................70

“Servo settings” ..........................................................72

“Transmitter control settings”

Fixed-wing model aircraft ......................................74

Model helicopter .................................................... 76

Throttle limit function .......................................79

Basic idle setting .............................................79

“D/R Expo”

Fixed-wing model aircraft ......................................82

Model helicopter .................................................... 84

“Phase trim” (ﬁ xed-wing) ............................................ 86

What is a mixer? .......................................................... 88

“Wing mixer” ..............................................................88

“Heli mixer” ................................................................94

Setting up throttle and collective pitch curves .....100

Auto-rotation setting ............................................104

General notes re. freely programmable mixers ..........106

General Information

Safety Notes .................................................................. 3

Safety notes and handling instructions relating

to Nickel-Metal-Hydride rechargeable batteries ............ 8

Foreword ......................................................................10

Description of radio control set .................................... 11

Recommended battery chargers ................................. 13

Transmitter power supply .............................................14

Receiver power supply ................................................16

Environmental protection notes ................................... 16

Adjusting the stick length ............................................. 17

Opening the transmitter case ...................................... 17

Changing the stick mode ............................................. 18

Description of transmitter............................................. 20

Transmitter controls ...............................................20

Rear of transmitter ................................................. 21

Headphone socket ................................................21

Mini-USB socket ....................................................21

Data socket ...........................................................21

DSC (Direct Servo Control) ................................... 22

Data storage / card slot .........................................22

Screen and keypad ...............................................24

Operating the “Data Terminal” ............................... 25

Shor t-cuts ..............................................................25

Language selection, screen contrast ..................... 26

On-screen warnings ..............................................28

On-screen function ﬁ elds.......................................28

Position indicator, rotary controls CTRL 7 + 8 ....... 29

Input lock ...............................................................29

Using the transmitter for the ﬁ rst time .......................... 30

Using the receiver for the ﬁ rst time .............................. 32

Installation notes .......................................................... 34

Receiving system power supply ............................ 35

Deﬁ nition of terms .......................................................38

Contents

“Free mixers” ...........................................................107

Examples............................................................. 111

“Swashplate mixers” ...............................................112

“Servo display” ......................................................... 113

“Basic settings” ........................................................ 114

“Fail-Safe” .................................................................116

“Telemetry” ...............................................................117

Setting & Data view ............................................. 118

Satellite operation with two receivers ............126

Simple data view .................................................127

RF status view ..................................................... 129

Voice trigger ........................................................ 130

“Trainer mode” .........................................................132

Wiring diagrams ..................................................135

Wireless HoTT system ........................................136

“Info” ........................................................................140

Programming examples

Introduction ................................................................ 142

Fixed-wing model aircraft

First steps ............................................................ 144

Including an electric power system .....................148

E-motor and Butterﬂ y (crow) using Ch1 stick ...... 150

Operating timers .................................................. 153

Use of ﬂ ight phases ............................................. 154

Servos running in parallel .................................... 155

Deltas and ﬂ ying wings .............................................. 156

F3A models ...............................................................160

Model helicopters ...................................................... 164

Appendix

Appendix .................................................................... 170

Conformity declaration ............................................... 174

Guarantee certiﬁ cate .................................................175

Safety Notes

We all want you to have many hours of pleasure in our

mutual hobby of modelling, and safety is an important

aspect of this. It is absolutely essential that you read

right through these instructions and take careful note

of all our safety recommendations. We also strongly

recommend that you register without delay at http://

www.graupner.de/en/service/product_registration, as

this ensures that you automatically receive the latest

information relating to your product by e-mail.

If you are a beginner to the world of radio-controlled

model aircraft, boats and cars, we strongly advise that

you seek out an experienced modeller in your ﬁ eld, and

ask him or her for help and advice.

If you ever dispose of this transmitter, these instructions

must be passed on to the new owner.

Application

This radio control system may only be used for the

purpose for which the manufacturer intended it, i. e. for

operating radio-controlled models which do not carry hu-

mans. No other type of use is approved or permissible.

Safety notes

SAFETY IS NO ACCIDENT

and

RADIO-CONTROLLED MODELS

ARE NOT PLAYTHINGS

Even small models can cause serious personal injury

and damage to property if they are handled incompe-

tently, or if an accident occurs due to the fault of others.

Technical problems in electrical and mechanical sys-

tems can cause motors to rev up or burst into life unex-

pectedly, with the result that parts may ﬂ y off at great

speed, causing considerable injury.

Short-circuits of all kinds must be avoided at all times.

Short-circuits can easily destroy parts of the radio con-

trol system, but even more dangerous is the acute risk

of ﬁ re and explosion, depending on the circumstances

and the energy content of the batteries.

Aircraft and boat propellers, helicopter rotors, open

gearboxes and all other rotating parts which are driven

by a motor or engine represent a constant injury hazard.

Do not touch these items with any object or part of your

body. Remember that a propeller spinning at high speed

can easily slice off a ﬁ nger! Ensure that no other object

can make contact with the driven components.

Never stand in the primary danger zone, i. e. in the rota-

tional plane of the propeller or other rotating parts, when

the motor is running or the drive battery is connected.

Please note that a glowplug engine or electric motor

could burst into life accidentally if the receiving system

is switched on when you are transmitting the transmitter.

To be on the safe side, disconnect the fueltank or the

ﬂ ight battery.

Protect all electronic equipment from dust, dirt, damp,

and foreign bodies. Avoid subjecting the equipment

to vibration and excessive heat or cold. Radio control

equipment should only be used in “normal” ambient

temperatures, i. e. within the range -15°C to +55°C.

Avoid subjecting the equipment to shock and pressure.

Check the units at regular intervals for damage to cases

and leads. Do not re-use any item which is damaged or

has become wet, even after you have dried it out thor-

oughly.

Use only those components and accessories which

we expressly recommend. Be sure to use only genuine

matching Graupner connectors of the same design with

contacts of the same material.

When deploying cables ensure that they are not under

strain, are not tightly bent (kinked) or broken. Avoid

sharp edges, as they can chafe through insulating

materials.

Before you use the system, check that all connectors

are pushed home ﬁ rmly. When disconnecting compo-

nents, pull on the connectors themselves – not on the

wires.

It is not permissible to carry out any modiﬁ cations to the

RC system components, as any such changes invalidate

both your operating licence and your insurance cover.

Installing the receiving system

In a model aircraft the receiver must be packed in soft

foam and stowed behind a stout bulkhead, and in a

model boat or car it should be protected effectively from

dust and spray.

The receiver must not make direct contact with the

fuselage, hull or chassis at any point, otherwise motor

vibration and landing shocks will be transmitted directly

to it. When installing the receiving system in a model

with a glowplug or petrol engine, be sure to install all

the components in well-protected positions, so that no

exhaust gas or oil residues can reach the units and

get inside them. This applies above all to the ON / OFF

switch, which is usually installed in the outer skin of the

model.

Secure the receiver in such a way that the aerial, servo

leads and switch harness are not under any strain. The

receiver aerial should be at least 5 cm away from all

large metal parts and any wiring which is not connected

directly to the receiver. This includes steel and carbon

ﬁ bre components, servos, electric motors, fuel pumps,

cabling of all kinds, etc..

Ideally the receiver should be installed well away from

Safety Notes

Please read carefully!

4Safety Notes

Safety Notes

Ensure that no metal parts are able to rub against each

other, e. g. when controls are operated, when parts

rotate, or when motor vibration affects the model. Metal-

to-metal contact causes electrical “noise” which can

interfere with the correct working of the receiver.

Directing the transmitter aerial

Transmitter ﬁ eld strength is at a minimum in an imagi-

nary line extending straight out from the transmitter

aerial. It is therefore fundamentally misguided to “point”

the transmitter aerial at the model with the intention of

obtaining good reception.

When several radio control systems are in use on adja-

cent channels, the pilots should always stand together in

a loose group. Pilots who insist on standing away from

the group endanger their own models as well as those

of the other pilots.

However, if two or more pilots operating 2.4 GHz radio

control systems stand closer together than 5 m, the

down-link channel may be swamped, triggering a very

premature range warning. If this should occur, walk

away from the other pilots until the range warning

ceases again.

Pre-ﬂ ight checking

Before you switch on the receiver, ensure that the throt-

tle stick is at the stop / idle end-point.

Always switch on the transmitter ﬁ rst,

and only then the receiver.

Always switch off the receiver ﬁ rst,

and only then the transmitter.

If you do not keep to this sequence, i. e. if the receiver

is at any time switched on when “its” transmitter is

switched OFF, then the receiver is wide open to signals

from other transmitters and any interference, and may

respond. The model could then carry out uncontrolled

movements, which could easily result in personal injury

or damage to property.

Please take particular care if your model is ﬁ tted with

amechanical gyro: before you switch your receiver off,

disconnect the power supply to ensure that the motor

cannot run up to high speed accidentally.

As it runs down, the gyro can generate such a high

voltage that the receiver picks up apparently valid

throttle commands, and the motor could respond by

unexpectedly bursting into life.

Range checking

Before every session check that the system works properly

in all respects, and has adequate range. Secure the model

adequately, and ensure that no persons are standing in

front of the model.

Carry out at least one complete function check on the

ground, followed by a complete simulated ﬂ ight, in order

to show up any errors in the system and the model’s

programming. Be sure to read the notes on pages 62

and 70 in this regard.

When operating a model, i. e. when ﬂ ying or driving,

do not operate the transmitter without the aerial ﬁ tted.

Check that the transmitter aerial is ﬁ rmly seated.

Operating your model aircraft, helicopter, boat or car

Never ﬂ y directly over spectators or other pilots, and

take care at all times not to endanger people or animals.

Keep well clear of high-tension overhead cables. Never

operate your model boat close to locks and full-size ves-

sels. Model cars should never be run on public streets or

motorways, footpaths, public squares etc..

any other installed equipment in the model, but in an

easily accessible position. Under no circumstances al-

low servo leads to run close to the aerial, far less coiled

round it!

Ensure that cables are fastened securely, so that they

cannot move close to the receiver aerial when the model

is ﬂ ying.

Deploying the receiver aerial(s)

The receiver and its aerials should be installed as far

away as possible from all kinds of power system. If your

model has a carbon ﬁ bre fuselage, the aerial tips must

always be deployed outside the fuselage. The orientation

of the aerial(s) is not critical, but we recommend install-

ing them vertically (upright) in the model. If the receiver

features aerial diversity (two aerials), the second aerial

should be arranged at 90° to the ﬁ rst.

Installing the servos

Always install servos using the vibration-damping

grommets supplied. The rubber grommets provide some

degree of protection from mechanical shock and severe

vibration.

Installing control linkages

The basic rule is that all linkages should be installed in

such a way that the pushrods move accurately, smoothly

and freely. It is particularly important that all servo output

arms can move to their full extent without fouling or rub-

bing on anything, or being obstructed mechanically at

any point in their travel.

It is essential that you should be able to stop your motor

at any time. With a glow motor this is achieved by adjust-

ing the throttle so that the barrel closes completely when

you move the throttle stick and trim to their end-points.

Safety Notes

Checking the transmitter and receiver batteries

It is essential to stop using the radio control system and

recharge the batteries well before they are completely

discharged. In the case of the transmitter this means –

at the very latest – when the message “battery needs

charging” appears on the screen, and you hear an

audible warning signal.

It is vital to check the state of the batteries at regular

intervals – especially the receiver pack. When the bat-

tery is almost ﬂ at you may notice the servos running

more slowly, but it is by no means safe to keep ﬂ ying or

running your model until this happens. Always replace or

recharge the batteries in good time.

Keep to the battery manufacturer’s instructions, and

don’t leave the batteries on charge for longer than

stated. Do not leave batteries on charge unsupervised.

Never attempt to recharge dry cells, as they may ex-

plode.

Rechargeable batteries should always be recharged be-

fore every session. When charging batteries it is impor-

tant to avoid short-circuits. Do this by ﬁ rst connecting the

banana plugs on the charge lead to the charger, taking

care to maintain correct polarity. Only then connect the

charge lead to the transmitter or receiver battery.

Disconnect all batteries and remove them from your

model if you know you will not be using it in the near

future.

Capacity and operating times

This rule applies to all battery types: capacity diminishes

with each charge. At low temperatures the battery’s

internal resistance rises, and capacity falls. This means

that its ability to deliver current and maintain voltage is

reduced.

Frequent charging, and / or the use of maintenance

programs, tends to cause a gradual reduction in battery

capacity. We recommend that you check the capacity of

all your rechargeable batteries at least every six months,

and replace them if their performance has fallen off

signiﬁ cantly.

Use only genuine Graupner rechargeable batteries!

Suppressing electric motors

All conventional (brushed) electric motors generate

sparks between the commutator and the brushes, which

cause more or less serious interference to the radio

control system, depending on the type of motor. If an

RC system is to work correctly, it is therefore important

to suppress the electric motors, and in electric-powered

models it is essential that every motor should be effec-

tively suppressed. Suppressor ﬁ lters reliably eliminate

such interference, and should always be ﬁ tted where

possible.

Please read the notes and recommendations supplied

by the motor manufacturer.

Refer to the main Graupner FS catalogue or the Internet

website at www.graupner.de for more information on

suppressor ﬁ lters.

Servo suppressor ﬁ lter for extension leads

Order No. 1040

Servo suppressor ﬁ lters are required if you are obliged

to use long servo extension leads, as they eliminate the

danger of de-tuning the receiver. The ﬁ lter is connected

directly to the receiver input. In very difﬁ cult cases a

second ﬁ lter can be used, positioned close to the servo.

Using electronic speed controllers

The basic rule is that the electronic speed controller

must be chosen to suit the size of the electric motor it is

required to control.

There is always a danger of overloading and possibly

damaging the speed controller, but you can avoid this by

ensuring that the controller’s current-handling capacity is

at least half the motor’s maximum stall current.

Particular care is called for if you are using a “hot” (i. e.

upgrade) motor, as any low-turn motor (small number of

turns on the winding) can draw many times its nominal

current when stalled, and the high current will then burn

out the speed controller.

Electrical ignition systems

Ignition systems for internal combustion engines can

also produce interference, which has an adverse effect

on the working of the radio control system.

Electrical ignition systems should always be powered by

a separate battery – not the receiver battery.

Be sure to use effectively suppressed spark plugs and

plug caps, and shielded ignition leads.

Keep the receiving system an adequate distance away

from the ignition system.

Static charges

Lightning causes magnetic shock waves which can

interfere with the operation of a radio control transmitter

even if the thunderstorm actually occurs several kilome-

tres away. For this reason …

… cease ﬂ ying operations immediately if you notice

an electrical storm approaching. Static charges

through the transmitter aerial can be life-threaten-

ing!

Caution

In order to fulﬁ l the FCC RF radiation regulations •

6Safety Notes

applicable to mobile transmitting apparatus, the

equipment’s aerial must be at least 20 cm from any

person when the system is in use. We therefore do

not recommend using the equipment at a closer

range than 20 cm.

Ensure that no other transmitter is closer than 20 cm •

from your equipment, in order to avoid adverse

effects on the system’s electrical characteristics and

radiation pattern.

The radio control system should not be operated •

until the Country setting has been set correctly at

the transmitter. This is essential in order to fulﬁ l the

requirements of various directives - FCC, ETSI, CE

etc. Please refer to the instructions for your particular

transmitter and receiver for details of this procedure.

Check all working systems and carry out at least one •

full range check on the ground before every ﬂ ight, in

order to show up any errors in the system and the

model’s programming.

Never make any changes to the programming of the •

transmitter or receiver whilst operating a model.

Care and maintenance

Don’t use cleaning agents, petrol, water or other sol-

vents to clean your equipment. If the case, the aerial etc.

gets dirty, simply wipe the surfaces clean with a soft dry

cloth.

Components and accessories

As manufacturers, the company of Graupner GmbH &

Co. KG recommends the exclusive use of components

and accessories which have been tested by Graupner

and approved for their capability, function and safety. If

you observe this rule, Graupner accepts responsibility

for the product.

Graupner cannot accept liability for non-approved

components or accessories made by other manu-

facturers. It is not possible for Graupner to assess

every individual item manufactured by other compa-

nies, so we are unable to state whether such parts

can be used without incurring a safety risk.

Liability exclusion / Compensation

It is not possible for Graupner to ensure that the user

observes the installation and operation instructions, and

the recommended conditions and methods when install-

ing, operating, using and maintaining the radio control

components. For this reason Graupner denies all liability

for loss, damages or costs which arise through misuse

or mishandling of this equipment, or are connected with

such use in any way.

Unless obliged by law, Graupner’s obligation to pay com-

pensation, regardless of the legal argument employed,

is limited to the invoice value of that quantity of Graup-

ner products which were immediately involved in the

event in which the damage occurred, unless the com-

pany is deemed to have unlimited liability on account of

deliberate or gross negligence.

Safety Notes

Environmental protection

This symbol on the product, in the operating instructions

or the packaging indicates that the product must not be

discarded via the normal household refuse at the end

of its useful life. Instead it must be taken to a collection

point for the recycling of electrical and electronic ap-

paratus.

The materials can be re-used according to their identiﬁ -

cation code. You can make an important contribution to

the protection of our shared environment by recycling

old equipment and making use of its

basic materials.

Dry and rechargeable batteries must

be removed from the device and taken

to the appropriate collection point.

Please ask your local authority for

the location of your nearest waste

disposal site.

The sole purpose of this manual is to provide informa-

tion; it is subject to amendment without prior notiﬁ cation.

Graupner accepts no responsibility or liability for errors

or inaccuracies which may occur in the information

section of this manual.

For your notes

8Safety Notes

Safety notes and handling instructions relating to Nickel-Metal-Hydride rechargeable

batteries

As with all sophisticated technical products, it is vitally

important that you observe the following safety notes

and handling instructions if you wish the equipment to

operate safely and reliably for an extended period.

Safety notes

Individual cells and rechargeable batteries are not •

playthings, and must be kept well away from children.

Store rechargeable cells and batteries out of the

reach of children.

Check that the batteries are in perfect, serviceable •

condition before every use. Do not re-use defective or

damaged cells or batteries.

Rechargeable cells and batteries must be used •

within the speciﬁ ed limits stated for the correspond-

ing cell type.

Do not heat, incinerate or short-circuit rechargea-•

ble cells or batteries, and never charge them with

excessive currents or reversed polarity.

Never use rechargeable batteries consisting of •

parallel-wired cells, combinations of old and new

cells, cells of different construction, size, capaci-

ty, make, brand or cell type.

Batteries installed inside equipment should always be •

removed from the device when it is not in use and not

about to be used. Always keep equipment switched

off in order to avoid deep-discharged cells. Batteries

must be recharged in good time.

The battery to be charged should be placed on a •

non-inﬂ ammable, heat-resistant, non-conductive

surface for the whole of the charge period. Keep

inﬂ ammable and volatile objects and materials well

clear of the charging area.

Batteries must always be supervised when on •

charge. Never exceed the maximum fast-charge cur-

rent speciﬁ ed for the cell type in use.

If the battery heats up to more than 60°C whilst on •

charge, halt the charge process immediately and

allow the pack to cool down to about 30°C.

Never recharge a battery which is already charged, •

hot, or not completely discharged.

Do not make any modiﬁ cations to batteries. Never •

solder or weld directly to cells.

If incorrectly handled, rechargeable batteries are at •

risk of combustion, explosion, corrosive action and

burns. Suitable extinguishing materials include ﬁ re

blankets, CO2 ﬁ re extinguishers and sand.

Escaped electrolyte is corrosive - do not allow it to •

contact skin or eyes. In an emergency rinse the area

immediately with plenty of clean water before seeking

medical help.

In hermetically sealed spaces such as airtight boats, •

Ni-MH batteries are only of limited suitability, as

hydrogen can escape from the cells (explosion risk).

Good ventilation and cooling are necessary, espe-

cially where continuous currents lie above 30 A.

The cells’ air vents must never be blocked or sealed, •

e. g. by solder. When soldering, the iron temperature

should not exceed 220°C, and each joint should be

completed in less than twenty seconds.

To avoid cell deformation, do not exert excessive •

mechanical pressure on battery cells.

If a battery should be accidentally overcharged, use •

the following procedure:

Simply disconnect the battery and leave it on a non-

inﬂ ammable surface (e. g. stone ﬂ oor) until it has

cooled down. Never hold the battery in your hand, as

there is a risk that cells might explode.

Always observe the recommended rates for charging •

and discharging.

General information

The capacity of your rechargeable battery diminishes

with every charge / discharge process. Stored batteries

may eventually exhibit reduced capacity.

Storage

Batteries should not be stored in a completely dis-

charged state. Store them in a dry enclosed space at an

ambient temperature of +5°C to +25°C. If you are storing

a battery for a period longer than four weeks, ensure

that the cell voltage does not fall below 1.2 V

Balancing individual battery cells

To balance new battery cells, i. e. to bring them all •

to the same state of charge, charge them at what

is known as the ‘normal’ rate until they are full. As a

general guideline a fully discharged battery needs to

be charged for a period of twelve hours at a current

corresponding to one tenth of the capacity printed on

the cell label (the “1/10C” method). After this treat-

ment all the cells will be fully charged, and exhibit

the same voltage. This method of balancing battery

cells should be repeated after every ten fast-charge

processes, so that the cells are repeatedly balanced;

this helps to ensure an extended useful life for your

batteries.

If you have the facilities to discharge individual cells, •

we recommend that you make use of this before

every charge process. Otherwise the battery pack

should be run down to a discharge voltage of 0.9

V per cell. For example, this equates to a ﬁ nal dis-

charge voltage of 5.4 V for a six-cell pack.

Safety Notes

Charging

Ni-MH batteries should only be charged using the speci-

ﬁ ed currents, charge times and temperature range, and

should be supervised constantly when on charge. If you

do not have access to a suitable fast charger, i. e. one

which allows you to set the charge current accurately,

then the battery should always be recharged using the

“normal” charge rate of 1/10C; see the example stated

above.

Wherever possible, transmitter batteries should

always be recharged at the 1/10C rate, in order to

avoid differences in cell states. The charge current

must never exceed the maximum permissible value

stated in the transmitter instructions.

Temperature charging

You can use this method if you have access to a suitable

battery charger with temperature cut-off system, ﬁ tted

with a temperature sensor. However, the battery should

always be taken out of the device beforehand.

Cut-off temperature when charging at 1C: maximum 40

… 50°C.

Never charge to a higher temperature than 60°C, •

and ensure that the temperature sensor has good,

reliable contact with the battery. Check that the cor-

rect temperature is displayed, and that the charge

process is terminated at the correct point. For this

reason the temperature sensor should be as small as

possible; if in any doubt, set a cut-off temperature 10

… 15°C lower than stated above.

Note:

Charging to a temperature higher than 45°C causes

a slight reduction in the effective life of the cells.

Never start a new charge process if the battery is •

already or still warm.

Never leave batteries on charge unsupervised.•

Fast charging

The delta peak charge cut-off voltage should be set •

to 10 … 20 mV per cell. Most battery chargers are

set to a ﬁ xed cut-off value of 15 … 20 mV per cell

by default, which makes them suitable for use with

NiCd and Ni-MH batteries. If you are not sure about

this, please refer to the operating instructions sup-

plied with your charger, or ask at your local model

shop whether your charger is also suitable for Ni-MH

packs. If in any doubt, charge your batteries at half

the stated maximum charge current.

It is always best to charge your batteries immediately •

before you plan to use them, as Ni-MH packs only

deliver their optimum performance directly after

charging, i. e. when still warm (40 to 50°C). These

batteries exhibit a high rate of self-discharge, and

quickly lose 10 … 30% of their capacity over just a

few hours. The internal resistance of Ni-MH cells also

rises enormously when they are cold.

Discharging

All rechargeable batteries sold by Graupner and GM-

Racing are suitable for a maximum continuous current

load of 6C … 13C, according to battery type (refer to the

manufacturer’s speciﬁ cation!). The higher the continuous

current load, the shorter the batteries’ useful life.

Use your battery until its performance falls off, or until •

the low voltage warning is triggered.

Caution:

When stored for a long period, the cell voltage should

not be allowed to fall below 1.2 V. This means that

you may have to recharge the battery before stor-

ing it.

Reﬂ ex charging and charge / discharge (cycle) •

programs shorten the effective life of batteries unnec-

essarily, and are only suitable for checking battery

quality or “reviving” relatively old cells. It also makes

no sense to charge / discharge a battery before using

it - unless you simply wish to check its quality.

Disposal of exhausted dry and rechargeable batter-

ies

The German Battery Order places a legal requirement

on every consumer to return all used and exhausted

dry cells and rechargeable batteries. It is prohibited to

dispose of these items in the ordinary domestic waste.

At no charge to the user, old dry and rechargeable

batteries can be surrendered at local authority collec-

tion points, Graupner retail outlets, and any other shop

where dry and rechargeable batteries of the same type

are sold. You can also send batteries supplied by us to

the following address - with adequate pre-paid postage

- for disposal:

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG

Service: Gebrauchte Batterien (Used batteries)

Henriettenstr. 94 - 96

D-73230 Kirchheim unter Teck

You can make an important contribution to environmen-

tal protection in this way.

Caution:

Damaged batteries may require special packaging be-

fore despatch, as some contain highly toxic materials!!!!!

10 Introduction

mx-16 the latest generation of radio control technology

HoTT (Hopping Telemetry Transmission) is the synthe-

sis of expertise, engineering and world-wide testing by

professional pilots. The equipment operates on the 2.4

GHz band, and offers bi-directional communication be-

tween transmitter and receiver via a down-link channel

integrated into the receiver.

The mx-16 HoTT RC system is based on the Graup-

ner/JR mc-24 computer radio control system which

was introduced back in 1997. It has been developed

speciﬁ cally for the beginner, but the mx-16 HoTT is

still capable of controlling all current model types with-

out problem - whether ﬁ xed-wing model or helicopter,

model boat or car.

In the area of ﬁ xed-wing models and helicopters it is

often necessary to employ complex mixer functions

for the control surfaces or the swashplate actuation

system. Computer technology enables you to activate

a vast range of functions to cope with special model

requirements – just by pressing a button. With the mx-

16 HoTT all you do is select the appropriate model

type, and the software then presents you automatically

with the appropriate mixer and coupling functions. This

means that the transmitter requires no additional mod-

ules in order to implement complex coupled functions,

and you can forget all about old-fashioned mechanical

mixers in the model. The mx-16 HoTT provides an

extremely high level of safety and reliability in use.

The mx-16 HoTT offers twenty model memories, each

of which can store model settings for different ﬂ ight

phases. Individual phases can be called up in ﬂ ight

simply by operating a switch, so that you can try out

various settings quickly and without risk. This can be

for test purposes or for varying parameters for different

phases of ﬂ ight.

The large graphic screen makes operating the trans-

mitter a simple, intuitive process. Mixers and other

functions can be displayed in graphic form, and this is

extraordinarily helpful.

The beginner quickly becomes familiar with the different

functions thanks to the clear, logically arranged pro-

gram structure. Four-way touch-sensitive buttons to left

and right of the high-contrast screen are used to enter

settings, allowing the user to exploit all the options he

needs, in accordance with his experience in handling

radio-controlled models.

In theory the Graupner HoTT process allows more than

200 models to be operated simultaneously. Although in

practice the mixed operation of different technical sys-

tems in the 2.4 GHz ISM band – as required by the ap-

proval regulations – reduces this number considerably.

Generally, however, it will always be possible to operate

even more models simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz band

than on the 35 / 40 MHz frequency bands which we

have used to date. However, the actual limiting factor –

as it has always been – is likely to remain the size of the

(air-) space available. The simple fact that no frequency

control procedure is necessary equates to an enormous

gain in safety, especially at ﬂ ying sites such as gliding

slopes where groups of pilots may be distributed over a

large area, with nobody in overall control.

The integral Telemetry menu provides a simple means

of accessing data and programming HoTT receivers.

For example, this method can be used to map receiver

outputs, distribute control functions to multiple servos,

and match servo travels and directions to each other.

This manual describes each menu in detail, and also

provides dozens of useful tips, notes and programming

examples to complement the basic information. More

general modelling terms, such as Transmitter controls,

Dual-Rates, Butterﬂ y (Crow) and many others, are all

explained in the manual.

Please refer to the Appendix for additional information

on the HoTT system. This manual concludes with the

transmitter’s conformity declaration and guarantee

certiﬁ cate.

Please read the safety notes and the technical informa-

tion. We recommend that you read right through the

instructions with great care, and check all the functions

as described in the text. This can be carried out simply

by connecting servos to the supplied receiver, and

watching their response as you program the transmit-

ter. However, please read the notes on page 20 in this

regard. This is the quickest method of becoming familiar

with the essential procedures and functions of the mx-

16 HoTT.

Always handle your radio-controlled model with a

responsible attitude to avoid endangering yourself and

others.

The Graupner team wishes you great pleasure and suc-

cess with your mx-16 HoTT - a radio control system of

the latest generation.

Kirchheim-Teck, March 2011

Description of radio control set

mx-16 Computer System

Eight-channel radio control set with Graupner HoTT 2.4 GHz technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)

Graupner HoTT technology offers extreme reliability

in use, with bi-directional communication between

transmitter and receiver, integrated telemetry,

speech output via earphone socket and ultra-fast

response times.

Simpliﬁ ed programming technology with capacitive

programming touch-buttons.

High-contrast, eight-line graphic screen with blue

backlighting for ultra-clear display of all set-up para-

meters and telemetry data. Telemetry data is stored

on a micro-SD memory card.

12-bit / 4096-step channel signal resolution for extre-

mely ﬁ ne control characteristics.

USB socket for reading out and saving model me-

mory data, and loading ﬁ rmware updates.

Micro-computer radio control system exploiting the •

latest Graupner HoTT 2.4 GHz technology

Bi-directional communication between transmitter •

and receiver

Five different languages•

German and English; subsequent software updates

will offer French, Italian and Spanish.

Ultra-fast response times through direct, ultra-reliable •

data transmission from the main processor to the

2.4 GHz RF module. No additional delay caused by

detours through a module processor.

Telemetry menu for displaying telemetry data, and •

programming receiver outputs and optional sensors.

Telemetry display shows numerous programming and •

analysis functions directly on the transmitter screen.

Speech output can be called up using freely pro-•

grammable switches

User-selectable servo cycle times for digital servos, •

min. 10 ms

Short, folding aerial•

Methods of operation and programming based on the •

proven concepts of the mc-19 to mc-24

High-contrast graphic screen with blue backlighting •

ensures perfect monitoring of set-up parameters,

such as model type, model memory, timers and

operating voltage.

Function encoder with two four-way touch-sensitive •

buttons for simpliﬁ ed programming and accurate

settings

Key-Lock function to guard against accidental opera-•

tion.

Four programmable ﬂ ight phases•

Twenty model memories, with storage of all model-•

12 Description of radio control set

speciﬁ c programming and set-up parameters

Seven switches (two three-way switches, three two-•

way switches and two momentary switches), plus

three digital controls - already installed and extremely

versatile

Unrestricted assignment of all switches to switched •

functions simply by operating the appropriate switch

Internal real-time clock for dating log ﬁ les•

User-replaceable CR2032 buffer battery for internal •

real-time clock

Storage of model memories using the latest battery-•

free back-up system

Eight control functions with simpliﬁ ed, very conven-•

ient assignment of transmitter controls for auxiliary

functions, such as switches and proportional controls

Convenient mode selector provides simple method •

of changing the stick mode (modes 1 - 4, e. g. throttle

right / throttle left).

When you change modes, all the affected settings

are switched at the same time.

Graphical servo display provides a straightforward •

overview of the servo set-up, and a swift method of

checking servo travels

Receiver output swap•

Comprehensive programs for ﬁ xed-wing model •

aircraft and helicopters:

Fixed-wing menu for: 1 AIL, 2 AIL, 2 AIL + 2 FLAP, V-

tail, delta / ﬂ ying wing, two elevator servos

Fixed-wing mixer: diff aile, diff.ﬂ aps, ail ¼ rudd, ail

¼ ﬂ aps, brake ¼ elev, brake ¼ ﬂ ap, brake ¼ aile,

elev ¼ ﬂ ap, elev ¼ aile, ﬂ ap ¼ elev, ﬂ ap ¼ aile

and diff. reduction

Heli menu: 1-point, 2-point, 3-point and 4-point •

linkages (1 servo, 2 servo, 3sv(2roll), 3sv(140°),

3sv(2nick (pitch-axis)), 4 SV (90°))

Swashplate limiter•

Servo travel adjustment +/- 150% for all servo out-•

puts, variable separately for each side (Single Side

Servo Throw)

Variable sub-trim, range +/- 125%, for adjusting the •

neutral position of all servos

Servo reverse, programmable for all servos•

EXPO / DUAL-RATE system, separately variable, can •

be switched in-ﬂ ight, ﬂ ight phase programmable

Stopwatch / count-down timer with alarm function•

Model memory copy function•

Integral DSC socket for use with ﬂ ight simulators and •

Trainer systems

General features of the HoTT system

Simple, ultra-fast binding of transmitter and receiver•

Multiple receivers can be bound per model for paral-•

lel operation

Extremely fast re-binding, even at maximum range•

Two-receiver satellite operation using special cable •

connection

Range-check and warning function•

Receiver low-voltage warning on transmitter screen•

Ultra-wide receiver operating voltage range: 3.6 V to •

8.4 V (fully operational down to 2.5 V)

Fail-Safe•

Unrestricted channel assignment (channel-mapping), •

mixer functions and all servo settings programmable

in the Telemetry menu

Up to four servos can be actuated simultaneously •

as a block, with a servo cycle time of 10 ms (digital

servos only)

Optimised frequency hopping and broad channel •

spread for maximum interference rejection

Intelligent data transmission with corrective function•

Real-time telemetry analysis•

More than 200 systems can be operated simultane-•

ously

Future-proof update capability using USB port•

mx-16 Computer System

Eight-channel radio control set with Graupner HoTT 2.4 GHz technology (Hopping Telemetry Transmission)

Description of radio control set

Speciﬁ cation, mx-16 HoTT transmitter

Frequency band 2,4 … 2,4835 GHz

Modulation FHSS

Transmitter power see Country setting, page 115

Control functions Eight functions; four with trims

Temperature range -10 … +55 °C

Aerial folding

Operating voltage 3,4 … 6 V

Current drain approx. 180 mA

Dimensions approx. 190 x 195 x 90 mm

Weight approx. 770 g with transmitter

battery

Accessories

Order No. Description

1121 Neckstrap, 20 mm wide

70 Neckstrap, 30 mm wide

3097 Wind-shield for hand-held transmitter

Trainer leads for mx-16 HoTT:

see page 135

Replacement parts

Order No. Description

2498.4FBEC 4NH-2000 RX RTU, ﬂ at-pack

33800 HoTT transmitter aerial

Speciﬁ cation, GR-16 HoTT receiver

Operating voltage 3,6 … 8,4 V

Current drain ca. 70 mA

Frequency band 2,4 … 2,4835 GHz

Modulation FHSS

Aerial Diversity aerials,

2 x approx. 145 mm long,

approx. 115 mm encapsu-

lated and approx. 30 mm

active

Servo sockets 8

Sensor socket 1

Temperature range approx. -15° … +70 °C

Dimensions approx. 46 x 21 x 14 mm

Weight approx. 12 g

Set contents

Order No. 33116:

mx-16 HoTT micro-computer transmitter with integral

4NH-2000 RX RTU ﬂ at-pack Ni-MH transmitter bat-

tery (speciﬁ cation reserved), Graupner GR-16 HoTT

bi-directional receiver, switch harness and plug-type

battery charger

Recommended battery chargers (optional)

Order

No. Description

220 V mains conn.

12 V DC connect.

Suitable for

the following

battery types

Integral charge. lead

NiCd

Ni-MH

LiPo

Lead-ac.

6407 Multilader 3 x x x x

6411 Ultramat 8 xxxxx

6425 Twin Charger x x

6427 Multilader 3 x x x x

6455 Multilader 7E x x x x

6463 Ultramat 12 plus

Pocket xxxxx

6464 Ultramat 14 plus xxxxxx

6466 Ultra Trio plus 14 xxxxxx

6468 Ultramat 16S xxxxxx

6470 Ultramat 18 xxxxxx

To recharge the mx-16iFS system you will also need the transmitter

charge lead, Order No. 3022, and the receiver battery charge lead,

Order No. 3021, unless stated otherwise in the table.

For details of additional battery chargers, and details of the chargers

listed here, please refer to the main Graupner FS catalogue, or our

Internet site at www.graupner.de.

14 Operating Notes

Operating Notes

Transmitter power supply

The mx-16 HoTT transmitter is ﬁ tted as standard with

a high-capacity rechargeable 4NH-2000 RX RTU Ni-MH

battery (Order No. 2498.4FBEC) (speciﬁ cation re-

served). When delivered, the standard rechargeable

battery is not charged.

When you are using the transmitter you can monitor

the battery voltage on the LCD screen. If the voltage of

the transmitter battery falls below a certain point, you

will hear an audible warning signal. The screen then

displays a message reminding you that the transmitter

battery needs to be recharged.

#01

0:22h

stop 0:00

0:00

0.0V

4.7V HoTT

battery

needs

charging!!

Always recharge the transmitter battery in good time.

When you see this message, cease operations immedi-

ately and recharge the transmitter battery.

Charging the transmitter battery

The rechargeable Ni-MH transmitter battery can be

recharged with the battery charger (Order No. 33116.2)

supplied in the set, using the charge socket located on

the right-hand side of the transmitter. Leave the battery

inside the transmitter for charging, to avoid premature

damage to the internal battery socket.

As an approximate guideline a discharged battery

should be charged for twelve hours at a current cor-

responding to one tenth of the capacity printed on the

pack. If you are using the standard transmitter battery

and the charger supplied in the set, this current is

200 mA.

The transmitter must be switched “OFF” for the whole

period of the charge process. Never switch on the

transmitter when it is still connected to the charger; even

a very brief interruption in the process can cause the

charge voltage to rise to the point where the transmitter

is immediately damaged. For this reason check carefully

that all connectors are secure, and are making really

good contact.

Polarity of the mx-16 HoTT charge socket

Commercially available battery charge leads produced

by other manufacturers are often made up with the op-

posite polarity. For this reason it is essential to use only

the genuine Graupner charge lead, Order No. 3022.

Using automatic battery chargers

Although the standard transmitter charge socket is pro-

tected against reversed polarity, it is still possible to use

suitable chargers to fast-charge the transmitter battery.

If possible, set the delta peak voltage difference of your

fast charger to a value in the range 10 mV … 20 mV or

equivalent, as described in the charger’s instructions;

this ensures that it is suitable for fast-charging Ni-MH

cells.

First connect the banana plugs on the charge lead

to the charger, and only then connect the other end

of the charge lead to the charge socket on the trans-

mitter. When the charge lead is connected to the

transmitter, never allow the bare ends of the plugs to

touch! To avoid damage to the transmitter, the charge

current must never exceed 1 A. If necessary, limit the

current on the charger itself.

Removing the transmitter battery

To remove the transmitter battery, ﬁ rst disengage the

cover over the battery compartment on the back of the

transmitter, then lift it off:

Remove the battery, then carefully pull on the power

lead to disconnect the transmitter battery connector.

Installing the transmitter battery

Hold the connector attached to the transmitter battery

in such a way that the black or brown wire faces the

aerial, and the unused socket of the battery connector

is on the side facing the bottom, then push the battery

connector onto the three pins projecting out of the inside

of the transmitter, in the direction of the

circuit board. (The battery connector is

protected against reversed polarity by

two chamfered edges; see illustration).

Finally place the battery in the com-

partment, and close the cover.

Polarity of

transmitter battery

connector

Operating Notes

Battery timer, bottom left corner of the screen

This timer displays the cumulative operating time of the

transmitter since the last time the transmitter battery

was charged.

This timer is automatically reset to “0:00” when the

transmitter detects that the voltage of the transmitter

battery is signiﬁ cantly higher than the last time it was

switched on, e. g. as a result of a charge process.

#01

0:00h

stop

flt

0:00

0.0V

6.1V 99% HoTT

CR 2032 lithium battery

On the left-hand side of the transmitter circuit board you

will ﬁ nd a holder ﬁ tted with a user-replaceable CR 2032

lithium battery:

The purpose of this battery is to protect the system from

loss of date and time if the transmitter’s power supply is

disconnected; for example, when the transmitter battery

is replaced.

16 Operating Notes

Receiver power supply

A wide range of rechargeable four-cell and ﬁ ve-cell NiMH

batteries varying in capacity is available for use as the

receiver power supply. If you are using digital servos we

recommend that you use a ﬁ ve-cell (6 V) pack of gener-

ous capacity. If your model is ﬁ tted with a mixture of

digital and analogue servos, it is important to check the

maximum permissible operating voltage of all the types.

The PRX unit, Order No. 4136, provides a stabilised

receiver power supply with a user-variable voltage from

one or two receiver batteries; see Appendix.

For reasons of safety battery boxes or dry cells should

never be used.

The voltage of the airborne power supply is displayed on

the transmitter screen while the model is ﬂ ying:

#01

2:22h

stop

flt

0:00

5.5V

51%

5.2V

HoTT

If the voltage falls below the pre-set warning threshold -

3.8 Volt as standard, but variable in the Telemetry menu;

see page 126 - a visual and audible low-voltage warning

is triggered.

Nevertheless it is important to check the state of the

batteries at regular intervals. Don’t put off charging

the batteries until the warning signal is triggered.

Note:

Please refer to the main Graupner FS catalogue or visit

the Internet site at www.graupner.de for full details of

batteries, chargers, measuring equipment and battery

monitor units.

Charging the receiver battery

The charge lead, Order No. 3021, can be connected

directly to the NC receiver battery for charging. If the

battery is installed in a model and you have installed one

of the following switch harnesses: Order No. 3046,3934

or 3934.1 or 3934.3, the battery can be charged via the

separate charge socket, or the charge socket which is

built into the switch. The switch on the switch harness

must be left at the “OFF” position for charging.

Polarity of the receiver battery connector

General notes on battery charging

Observe the recommendations provided by the •

charger manufacturer and the battery manufacturer

at all times.

Keep to the maximum permissible charge current •

stated by the battery manufacturer.

The maximum charge current for the transmitter •

battery is 1.5 A. Limit the charge current to this value

on the charger.

If you wish to charge the transmitter battery at a •

current higher than 1.5 A, you must ﬁ rst remove the

pack from the transmitter, otherwise you risk damag-

ing the circuit board through overloading the conduc-

tor tracks, and / or overheating the battery.

Carry out a series of test charges to ensure that the •

automatic charge termination circuit works correctly

with your battery. This applies in particular if you

wish to charge the standard Ni-MH battery using an

automatic charger designed for Ni-Cd batteries.

You may need to adjust the Delta Peak trigger volt-•

age, if your charger provides this option.

Do not discharge the battery or carry out a battery •

maintenance program via the integral charge socket.

The charge socket is not suitable for this application.

Always connect the charge lead to the charger ﬁ rst, •

and only then to the transmitter or receiver battery.

Observing this rule eliminates the danger of acciden-

tal short-circuits between the bare contacts of the

charge lead plugs.

If the battery becomes hot when on charge, it is time •

to check the pack’s condition. Replace it if necessary,

or reduce the charge current.

Never leave batteries unsupervised when on •

charge.

Environmental protection notes

Important information on the disposal of dry and

rechargeable batteries:

The German Battery Order places a legal requirement

on every consumer to return all used and exhausted

dry cells and rechargeable batteries. It is prohibited to

dispose of these items in the ordinary domestic waste.

At no charge to the user, old dry and rechargeable

batteries can be surrendered at local authority collec-

tion points, Graupner retail outlets, and any other shop

where dry and rechargeable batteries of the same type

are sold. You can also send batteries supplied by us to

the following address - with adequate pre-paid postage

- for disposal:

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG

Service: Gebrauchte Batterien (Used batteries)

Henriettenstr. 94 - 96

D-73230 Kirchheim unter Teck

You can make an important contribution to environmen-

tal protection in this way.

Operating Notes

Adjusting stick length

Both sticks are inﬁ nitely variable in length over a broad

range, enabling you to set them to suit your personal

preference.

Hold the bottom half of the knurled grip ﬁ rmly, and

unscrew the top section:

Now screw the stick top in or out (shorter or longer) to

the length you prefer before tightening the top and bot-

tom sections against each other to ﬁ x the stick top.

Opening the transmitter case

Please read the following notes carefully before you

open the transmitter. If you have no experience in such

matters, we recommend that you ask your nearest

Graupner Service Centre to carry out the work for you.

The transmitter should only be opened in the following

cases:

When a self-neutralising stick needs to be converted •

to non-neutralising action, or a non-neutralising stick

to a self-neutralising action.

If you wish to adjust the stick centring spring tension.•

Before opening the transmitter check that it is switched

off (move Power switch to “OFF”).

Open the battery compartment and remove the transmit-

ter battery as described on the previous double-page.

After this, use a PH1-size cross-point screwdriver to

undo the six screws recessed into the back panel of the

transmitter, as shown in the illustration:

Arrangement of the case back screws

Hold the two case sections together with your hand, and

turn the unit over to allow these six screws to fall out

onto the table. Now carefully raise the case back and

fold it open to the right, as if you were opening a book.

C A U T I O N

Two multi-core cables connect the lower shell to the

transmitter electronics located in the top section.

Please take great care not to damage this cable!

Important:

Do not modify the transmitter circuit in any way, •

as this invalidates your guarantee and ofﬁ cial ap-

proval for the system.

Do not touch any part of the circuit boards with •

any metal object. Avoid touching the contacts

with your ﬁ ngers.

Never switch the transmitter on while the case is •

open.

Please note the following points when closing the

transmitter:

Make sure that no cables are jammed between the •

transmitter case sections when you close the back.

Check that the two case sections fit together flush all •

round before fitting the retaining screws. Never force

the two case components together.

Fit the case screws in the existing threads, and tight-•

en them gently. Over-tightening them will strip the

threads in the plastic.

18 Operating Notes

Operating Notes

Converting the dual-axis stick units

Self-centring action

Either or both sticks can be converted from self-neutral-

ising to non self-neutralising action: start by opening the

transmitter as described on the previous page.

If you wish to change the standard stick unit arrange-

ment, start by locating the screw on the left-hand stick

unit shown circled in white in the photo below.

Note:

The right-hand stick unit is of mirror-image construction,

i. e. the screw you require is located on the right, below

centre.

Turn this screw clockwise until the stick on that side

moves freely from one end-stop to the other; alterna-

tively unscrew it until the stick is fully self-centring again.

Do not touch trans-

mitter circuit board

Do not touch trans-

mitter circuit board

User-replaceable CR2032 lithium

cell, acting as buffer battery for the

integral real time clock Memory card slot

Charge socket

Left-hand stick unit

Brake springs

Adjuster screws

Brake springs

Adjuster screws

Folding aerial

Self-centring screw

Right-hand stick unit

Self-centring screw

Adjuster screws for stick centring force

Operating Notes

Stick centring force

The centring force of the sticks is also variable to suit

your preference. The adjustment system is located

adjacent to the centring springs; see the white circles in

the following photo.

You can set the preferred centring spring force by rotat-

ing the corresponding adjuster screw using a cross-point

screwdriver:

Turn to the right = harder spring tension;•

Turn to the left = softer spring tension.•

horizontal

vertical

Note:

The right-hand stick unit is of mirror-image construction,

i. e. the screw you require is located on the right, below

centre.

Brake spring and ratchet

You can alter the braking force of the stick by adjusting

the outer of the two screws circled in white in the next

picture; adjusting the inner screw alters the strength of

the ratchet:

Note:

The right-hand stick unit is of mirror-image construction,

i. e. the screw you require is located on the right, below

centre.

20 Description of transmitter

Description of transmitter

Transmitter controls

Aerial with folding / rotating base

Rotary proportional control CTRL 7

3-position switch SW 4/5

2-position momentary

switch SW 1

Rotary proportional

control CTRL 6

Left-hand stick

Trim

ON / OFF switch

Left-hand touch-button

LCD screen

Right-hand touch-button

Trim

Right-hand stick

2-position switch SW 3

Carry handle

Neckstrap lug

Attaching the transmitter neckstrap

You will ﬁ nd a strap lug mounted in the centre of the

front face of the mx-16 HoTT transmitter, as shown in

the drawing on the right. This lug is positioned in such a

way that the transmitter is perfectly balanced even when

suspended from a neckstrap.

Order No. 1121 Neckstrap, 20 mm wide

Order No. 70 Neckstrap, 30 mm wide

3-possition switch SW 6/7

Rotary proportional control CTRL 8

Important note:

In the transmitter’s standard form any servos connected

to the receiver can initially only be operated using the

dual-axis sticks. For maximum ﬂ exibility, all the other

transmitter controls (CTRL 6 ... 8, SW 1 ... 9) are “free”

in software terms, and can be assigned to any channels

you like, enabling you to set up the system to suit your

personal preference or the requirements of a particular

model. This is carried out in the “contr set.” menu, as

described on pages 74 (ﬁ xed-wing models) and 76

(model helicopters).

2-position switch SW 1

2-position switch SW 8 2-position switch SW 9

Central Status LED

Description of transmitter

DSC socket for connecting

ﬂ ight simulators and for Teacher

mode

Case screw Case screw

Battery compartment cover

Case screw Case screw

Transmitter battery

charge socket

Data socket for connecting

Smart-Box, Order No. 33700

Five-pin mini-USB socket for

connecting transmitter to a PC

Earphone / headphone socket

Headphone socket

The central socket at the bottom edge of the back panel

name plate is intended for connecting a standard com-

mercial earphone or headphones ﬁ tted with a 3.5 mm

barrel plug (not included in the set).

Signals and voice messages associated with the Te-

lemetry menu are generated via this socket, as are

the transmitter’s audible signals. The default language

for speech output is German. For more information on

this please refer to “Voice messages” in the “HIDDEN

MODE” section starting on page 26, and the “Teleme-

try” section starting on page 130.

The volume of the headphone output can be adjusted in

the “Voice volume” line of the “General Settings” menu;

see page 115.

mini-USB socket

This socket can be used to connect the transmitter to

a PC running Windows XP, Vista or 7. The software

required at the PC, including a suitable USB driver, can

be found in the Download section for that product at

www.graupner.de.

Once you have installed the software required, you can

update the transmitter via this connection as and when

required, or simply set the correct date and time of day.

Data socket

For connecting the optional Smart-Box, Order No. 33700.

For more details about the Smart-Box please refer to the

main Graupner FS catalogue, or refer to that product on

the Internet at www.graupner.de.

22 Description of transmitter

PUPIL

#11

0:01h

stop

flt

DSC

0:00

6.0V 99% HoTT

The transmitter is now ready for use.

In contrast, when the mx-16 HoTT is used in

Teacher mode, the transmitter must be switched on

before the appropriate cable is plugged in.

3. Connect the other end of the connecting lead to

the appropriate apparatus, taking into account the

operating instructions supplied with that device.

Important:

Ensure that all connectors are ﬁ rmly seated in

their sockets.

Note regarding ﬂ ight simulators:

The range of ﬂ ight simulators available commercially

is now very wide, and you may ﬁ nd that it is necessary

to swap over certain contacts at the barrel connector

or the DSC module. This work must be carried out by a

Graupner Service Centre.

DSC

Direct Servo Control

The original function of this socket was for “Direct Servo

Control”, and that’s why the abbreviation is still in use.

However, for technical reasons “direct servo control” is

no longer possible with the HoTT system using a diag-

nosis lead.

The mx-16 HoTT transmitter’s standard two-pole DSC

socket is now used as a Trainer (buddy box) socket

(Teacher or Pupil), and as an interface for ﬂ ight simula-

tors.

For the DSC connection to work you must check the

following:

Carry out any adjustments required in the appropri-1.

ate menus:

See page 132 for information on setting up the mx-

16 HoTT transmitter to work as part of a Trainer sys-

tem.

ALWAYS2. leave the transmitter’s On / Off switch in

the “OFF” position when using a ﬂ ight simulator, and

when using the mx-16 HoTT transmitter as a Pu-

pil unit in a Trainer system, for only in this position is

the RF section of the transmitter module switched off

(no RF signal) even when the DSC lead is plugged

in. At the same time the transmitter’s current drain is

reduced slightly.

The central Status LED should now glow a con-

stant red, and the abbreviation “DSC” appears in the

transmitter’s base display on the left, below the mod-

el number. At the same time the display of telemetry

symbols is suppressed:

Data storage

Card slot

micro-SD and micro-SDHC

When you switch off the mx-16 HoTT transmitter and

remove the battery compartment cover, you will see the

card slot for memory cards (of the micro-SD and micro-

SDHC type) in the right-hand side of the compartment:

Any standard commercial micro-SD memory card with a

capacity of up to 2 GB can be used, and also any micro-

SDHC card of up to 32 GB. However, the manufacturer

recommends the use of memory cards with capacities

up to only 4 GB, as these are completely adequate in all

normal circumstances.

The memory cards for which the transmitter is intended

are familiar from their use in digital cameras and mobile

telephones. Place the card in the slot with the contacts

facing up, towards the back panel, and push it in until it

locks. Re-install the battery and close the battery com-

partment; the transmitter can now be switched on again.

The base display shows a stylised memory card symbol

to indicate that a memory card is present:

Description of transmitter

#01

3:33h

stop

flt

0:00

5.5V

50%

5.2V HoTT

Data recording / storage

The process of saving data on the SD card is coupled to

the ﬂ ight timer: if the timer is started, then data saving

commences - provided that a suitable memory card is in

the card slot - and ceases again when the ﬂ ight timer is

stopped. The ﬂ ight timer is started and stopped as de-

scribed in the “Timers” section on page 59 for ﬁ xed-wing

models, and pages 67 and 68 for model helicopters.

When data is being recorded, the card symbol

ﬂ ashes constantly and slowly.

When data is being written to the memory card, the

memory card symbol swells from left to right to indicate

the process.

When a data storage process is concluded, you will ﬁ nd

an (empty) “Models” folder and a “Log-Data” folder on

the memory card. The latter contains the log ﬁ les, stored

in sub-folders named “Model name”, using the format

0001 Year-Month-Day.bin, 0002 Year-Month-Day.bin etc.

However, if a model memory has not yet been named,

then you will ﬁ nd the associated log ﬁ les in a sub-folder

named “NoName” when you remove the memory card

from the transmitter and insert it in the card slot of a PC

or laptop. The data can subsequently be analysed on a

compatible PC using the PC program available on the

Download page for the transmitter at www.graupner.de.

Importing voice ﬁ les

As mentioned in the “Headphone socket” section on

page 21, the signals associated with the Telemetry

menu and voice messages can be generated via this

socket, in addition to the transmitter’s audible signals.

These voice messages are collected in a voice package

and stored in the transmitter’s internal memory, but they

can be replaced by a voice package in another language

at any time. For more information on this please refer to

the “HIDDEN MODE” section starting on page 26.

Importing and exporting model memories

Any model memories can be copied onto a memory

card in the transmitter, or copied from the card into the

transmitter, so that you can exchange data between

identical transmitters, and also back up your data. For

more information please see the “Model memories”

section starting on page 52.

Note:

Some of the special characters used in certain model

names cannot be accepted due to speciﬁ c limitations

of the FAT or FAT32 ﬁ le system used by memory cards.

During the copy process they are replaced by a tilde (~)

character.

24 Description of transmitter - screen and keypad

Signal strength indicator

Battery operating time since

last battery charge, in hr:min

Screen and keypad

Flight timer in min:sec

(count-up / count-down)

Stopwatch in min:sec

(count-up / count-down)

Flight phase name

Switching between

ﬂ ight phases using switch

Receiver power supply voltage

Right-hand touch-key

ef cd

leaf through / alter values

SET Select / Conﬁ rm

Model name

Model memory 1 … 20

Battery voltage and charge state in %

(If voltage falls below a particular level, a warning display

appears - see pictures on right-hand page; at the same time

a warning signal is emitted.)

Visual display of the trim lever positions; alternatively - if rota-

ry controls CTRL 7 … 9 are operated - display of the current

settings of these two controls

Model type display

(ﬁ xed-wing / helicopter)

Left-hand touch-key

ef cd leaf through

ef pressed brieﬂ y together:

switches to Servo display

ESC = interrupt / back

ESC touched for about three

seconds; Switches to the

Telemetry menu, and

back to the base display

See page 28 for possible warnings

Simultaneous brief press of

ef or cd = CLEAR

Description of transmitter - screen and keypad

Operating the “Data Terminal”

Input buttons ESC,SET,CLEAR,

symbols

On-screen telemetry symbols

The active model memory is not yet “bound”

Not ﬂ ashing: RF switched off at transmitter

Flashing aerial symbol:

The last receiver bound to the active model is

inactive, or out of range

>M x No telemetry signal detected

>M Signal strength display

>P Display of Pupil signal strength on the Teacher

transmitter’s screen.

Buttons to the left of the screen

ESC• button

A brief press on the ESC button returns you step by

step within the function select system, taking you

right back to the basic display. If you make a change

in the meantime, the change is retained.

If touched for about three seconds in the base dis-

play, ESC opens and closes the Telemetry menu.

Arrow buttons • ef cd

A brief press on one of these buttons allows you 1.

to leaf through lists, such as the Model Select or

Multi-Function list, always moving in the direction

of the arrow; the arrow buttons are also used to

move through menu lines within menus.

A brief simultaneous press of the 2. ef buttons

switches from the base transmitter display, and

from almost any menu position, into the “Servo

display” menu.

Buttons to the right of the screen

SET• button

Starting from the base screen display - as it ap-1.

pears when you switch the transmitter on - a brief

press of the SET button takes you to the multi-

function menus. You can also call up a selected

menu using the SET button.

Within the set-up menus you can activate (con-2.

ﬁ rm) and disable the corresponding set-up ﬁ elds

with a brief press of the SET button.

Arrow buttons • ef cd

1. “Leafs through” the multi-function menu and the

menu lines within the set-up menus, in the same

manner as the left-hand touch-key’s arrow but-

tons.

2. Selects and adjusts parameters in set-up ﬁ elds af-

ter you have activated them by brieﬂ y pressing

the SET button; the buttons fc and ed are

assigned the same function in each case, i. e. it

makes absolutely no difference which of the two

buttons you use.

3. A brief simultaneous press of the cd or ef

buttons resets an altered parameter value in the

active input ﬁ eld to the default value (CLEAR).

Notes:

It is not the contact with the touch-key itself that trig-•

gers the corresponding action, but the cessation of

the touch.

If you switch the transmitter off and then immediate-•

ly on again, you may ﬁ nd that the touch-keys have

no effect. This is not a fault! Switch the transmitter off

again, and wait a few seconds before switching it on

once more.

Short-Cuts

You can call up particular menus or options directly us-

ing the following button combinations:

CLEAR•

A brief simultaneous press of the cd or ef but-

tons of the right-hand touch-key resets an altered pa-

rameter value in the active input ﬁ eld to the default

value.

“• Servo display”

A brief simultaneous press of the ef buttons of the

left-hand touch-key switches from the transmitter’s

base display, and from almost any menu position, to

the “Servo display”, menu; see page 113.

“• Telemetry”

Press the central ESC button of the left-hand touch-

key for about three seconds at the transmitter’s base

display; see section starting on page 117.

“• HIDDEN MODE”

(language selection and contrast)

Simultaneously press the arrow buttons cd of the

left-hand touch-key AND the central SET button of

the right-hand touch-key; see next page.

Input lock•

Can be activated and disabled at the transmitter’s ba-

sic display by simultaneously holding the ESC and

SET buttons pressed in for about two seconds.

26 Description of transmitter

The “HIDDEN MODE” (VERSTECKTER MODUS) menu

of the mx-16 HoTT transmitter can be accessed from

virtually any menu position by holding the arrow buttons

cd of the left-hand touch-key and the SET button of

the right-hand touch-key pressed in; after about three

seconds this display appears:

¿VERSTECKTER MODUS¿

KONTRAST

SPRACHE

DEUTSCH

ANSAGEN DEUTSCH

CONTRAST

In the “CONTRAST” (KONTRAST) line you can adjust

the screen contrast to suit your preference by brieﬂ y

pressing the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key, as described in full on page 114 / 115. With a

second brief press of the SET or ESC button you return

to the line select point.

In the …

LANGUAGE

… (SPRACHE) line below it, which you can access by

brieﬂ y pressing the arrow button d of the left-hand

or right-hand touch-key, you can select your preferred

language.

¿VERSTECKTER MODUS¿

KONTRAST

SPRACHE

DEUTSCH

ANSAGEN DEUTSCH

HIDDEN MODE

Language selection and screen contrast

Activate the value ﬁ eld by pressing the central SET but-

ton of the right-hand touch-key:

¿VERSTECKTER MODUS¿

KONTRAST

SPRACHE

ANSAGEN DEUTSCH

DEUTSCH

Now replace the default language “DEUTSCH” (Ger-

man) with your preferred language using the arrow

buttons of the right-hand touch-key. For example:

¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿

CONTRAST

LANGUAGE

VOICE DEUTSCH

ENGLISH

If you change the language, all the settings stored in the

transmitter are retained in full. When this manual went to

press, the following two languages were available:

German•

English•

The languages French, Italian and Spanish will be made

available later on the Download page of the transmitter

at www.graupner.de in the form of an update.

VOICE MESSAGES

As mentioned in the “Headphone socket” section on

page 21, the signals associated with the Telemetry

menu and voice messages can be generated via this

socket, in addition to the transmitter’s audible signals.

The default language for these messages is German.

These voice messages are collected in a voice package

and stored in the transmitter’s internal memory, but they

can be replaced by a voice package in another language

at any time.

When this manual went to press, the following langua-

ges were available:

German•

English•

The languages French, Italian and Spanish will be made

available later on the Download page of the transmitter

at www.graupner.de in the form of additional voice ﬁ les.

The active voice package can be replaced using either

the PC program which can be found on the transmitter’s

Download page at ww.graupner.de, or using an SD card,

as described below.

Preparation

If you have not already done so, insert your SD or

SDHC card in the transmitter, as described on page 22.

When you switch the transmitter on, it immediately cre-

ates a “VoiceFile” folder on the memory card.

Remove the prepared memory card from the transmitter,

and insert it in a suitable card reader. Connect this to

your PC or laptop, and copy the voice package, typically

“voice_gb.vdf”, into this folder; this is the ﬁ le which you

previously downloaded from the transmitter’s Download

page. Remove the memory card from the card reader,

and insert it in the transmitter once more. Switch the

transmitter on with RF switched off:

RF ON/OFF?

ON OFF

Description of transmitter

Changing the language

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key

to move to the “VOICE” line:

¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿

CONTRAST

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VOICE DEUTSCH

Activate voice output by pressing the central SET button

of the right-hand touch-key:

¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿

CONTRAST

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VOICE DEUTSCH

Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key

to replace the default language “DEUTSCH” (German)

with the language of your choice. For example:

¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿

CONTRAST

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VOICE ENGLISH

Conﬁ rm your selection by brieﬂ y pressing the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key again: the

selected voice package is now loaded into the transmit-

ter’s memory:

¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿

CONTRAST

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VOICE ENGLISH

22/100%

The loading process is ﬁ nished when the progress bar

at the bottom edge of the screen disappears:

¿ HIDDEN MODE ¿

CONTRAST

LANGUAGE

ENGLISH

VOICE ENGLISH

Finally switch the transmitter off to conclude the proce-

dure.

All the settings stored in the transmitter are retained in

full even after you have switched languages.

Notes:

If the warning message …•

MUST BE

OFF

… appears, then the transmitter’s RF section is still

active. Switch this section off in the “RF module” line

of the “Basic settings” menu, and repeat the proce-

dure.

If the warning …•

SD-CARD

INSERT

… appears, then there is no memory card in the card

slot, or the card cannot be read.

If the warning …•

MISSING

IMPORT

DATA

… appears, then there is no suitable voice ﬁ le on the

SD card you have inserted.

28 Description of transmitter

Warnings

BIND N/A

“Binding not present”

No receiver is bound to the

currently active model mem-

ory. A brief touch of the SET

button takes you directly to the

corresponding option.

RF ON/OFF?

OFF

Do you want the RF signal to

be “ON” or “OFF?

battery

needs

charging

Battery must be charged

Operating voltage too low

fail safe

setup

t.b.d

Fail-Safe not yet set up

MISSING

IMPORT

DATA

No suitable voice ﬁ les found

on the memory card

throttle

too

high !

The throttle stick (or helicopter

limiter) is set too far in the

direction of full-throttle

MUST BE

OFF

Request to switch off the RF

section

(voice ﬁ les can only be loaded

with the RF section switched

off)

Warnings

The bottom line of the screen displays function ﬁ elds

which vary according to the menu selected.

SEL STO SYM ASY

The function ﬁ elds are activated by touching the SET

button.

Function ﬁ elds

SEL• select

STO• store (e. g. transmitter control position)

SYM• adjust values symmetrically

ASY• adjust values asymmetrically

• Switch symbol ﬁ eld

(assigning switches of all kinds)

• Switch to second page (next menu)

within a menu

On-screen function ﬁ elds

SEL,STO,SYM,ASY, ,

CAN‘T

RECEIVE

DATA

No bound receiver in range.

student

signal

No connection between

Teacher and Pupil transmitters

SD-CARD

INSERT

No SD or SDHC memory card

in the card slot, or card cannot

be read.

TRAINER

Wireless Link

INHACT

A “wireless Trainer connection” was used before the

transmitter was last switched off; do you wish that con-

nection to be continued (ACT), or switched OFF (INH)?

Description of transmitter

As soon as you operate one of the two rotary controls

CTRL 7 + 8 on the centre console, a small symbol ap-

pears to the right of the two vertical position indicators:

At the same time the position display of the two central

vertical bars switches for the duration of the actuation

from the display of the current trim position to the cur-

rent position of the rotary controls CTRL 7 + 8.

As you would expect, the left-hand bar represents the

position of the left-hand rotary control CTRL 7, and the

right-hand bar reﬂ ects the position of CTRL 8 (however,

both horizontal bars continue to show the current posi-

tion of the corresponding transmitter stick trim levers):

#01

3:33h

stop

flt

0:00

50%

5.2V HoTT

About two seconds after you cease operating one of the

two rotary controls, the screen reverts to a display of the

current position of the four trim levers for the two dual-

axis stick units.

Position display

Rotary proportional controls CTRL 7 and 8

To prevent programming errors, it is possible to lock

the touch-keys, and with them access to all the set-up

options, from the base display of the mx-16 HoTT

transmitter by touching the ESC and SET buttons for

about two seconds. This is indicated by an inverted key

symbol at the centre point of the trim bars:

#01

3:33h

stop

flt

0:00

5.5V

50%

5.2V HoTT

The lock is immediately active, but the control system

remains ready for use.

Touching the ESC and SET buttons again for about two

seconds disengages the lock: the next time you switch

the transmitter on, the lock is also disengaged.

Input lock

30 Using the transmitter for the ﬁ rst time

Preliminary notes

In theory the Graupner HoTT system permits the simul-

taneous operation of more than 200 models.

However, in practice the mixed operation of different

technical systems in the 2.4 GHz ISM band - as required

by the approval regulations - reduces this number

considerably. Generally, however, it will always be pos-

sible to operate even more models simultaneously on

the 2.4 GHz band than on the 35 / 40 MHz frequency

bands which we have used to date. However, the actual

limiting factor - as it has always been - is likely to remain

the size of the (air-) space available. The simple fact that

no frequency control procedure is necessary - a great

convenience in itself - equates to an enormous gain in

safety, especially at ﬂ ying sites where groups of pilots

may be distributed over a large area, with nobody in

overall control.

Battery charged?

When you take receipt of your transmitter, the battery

will be in the discharged state, so you must ﬁ rst charge

it as described on page 14. If you do not do this, the

battery will soon fall below the

pre-set threshold voltage, and

you will see and hear a warn-

ing signal to remind you to

recharge it.

Switching the transmitter on

When you switch the transmitter on, the following display

appears in the centre of the transmitter screen for about

two seconds:

RF ON/OFF?

OFF

Within this period you can switch off the RF signal if

required by moving the black ﬁ eld to the right using the

c or f arrows of the right-hand touch-key; when you

do this, ON should appear normal, and OFF in inverse

form (black background).

RF ON/OFF?

ON OFF

You can now switch the RF module off by brieﬂ y press-

ing the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key.

Until this point the central LED glowed blue, but it now

changes to red, and at the same time the screen switch-

es to the transmitter’s base display:

#01

0:33h

stop

flt

0:00

0.0V

50%

5.2V HoTT

The symbol combination means that the currently

active model memory is already “bound” to a Graupner

HoTT receiver, but there is currently no connection with

this receiver. (In our example we - of course - switched

off the RF signal!)

In contrast, if you switch the transmitter on without

switching off the RF signal, the central LED glows an

intense blue, and the symbolic transmitter mast ﬂ ashes.

At the same time the transmitter emits an audible warn-

ing until a connection is made with the corresponding

receiver. Once this connection exists, a ﬁ eld strength

indicator appears instead of the “x” at the base of the

symbolic aerial, for example , and the visual and

audible warnings cease.

battery

needs

charging

Using the transmitter for the ﬁ rst time

Preliminary notes regarding the mx-16 HoTT transmitter

For more information please visit our Internet site at www.graupner.de

At the right of the same line a display in the same format

appears when a telemetry connection is made, showing

the strength of the telemetry signal picked up from the

receiver (>M) together with the actual voltage of the

receiver power supply.

However, if the symbol combination appears, and

the central LED glows a constant red, the currently ac-

tive model memory is not “bound” to any receiver.

Low-voltage warning

If the transmitter voltage falls below a particular value,

a visual and audible low-voltage warning is generated.

The default value is 4.7 V, but this can be varied in the

“General Settings” menu (page 114).

Firmware update

Firmware updates for the transmitter are carried out at

the owner’s discretion using the ﬁ ve-pin mini-USB port

on the back of the transmitter, in conjunction with a PC

running Windows XP, Vista or 7. Be sure to back up all

stored model memories before carrying out the up-

date, so that you can restore the data if necessary.

The latest software and information can be found in the

Download section for the corresponding product at www.

graupner.de.

Note:

Once you have registered your transmitter at http://

graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung you will

automatically be informed of new updates by e-mail as

they become available.

Any standard commercial USB lead with a ﬁ ve-pin mini-

USB plug at the transmitter end can be used to connect

the transmitter to the PC; a typical example is that sup-

plied with the interface, Order No. 7168.6.

Using the transmitter for the ﬁ rst time

Important notes:

The transmitter included in the set is prepared at •

the factory with the correct settings for most Eu-

ropean countries (except France).

If you wish to operate the RC system in France,

you MUST ﬁ rst set the Country setting on the

transmitter to “FRANCE” mode; see page 115. IT

IS PROHIBITED to use the system IN FRANCE

using the Universal / EUROPE mode!

You can operate up to eight servos using the •

mx-16 HoTT transmitter and the receiver sup-

plied in the set, which is already bound to the

transmitter.

However, in the interest of maximum possi-

ble ﬂ exibility, control channels 5 … 8 are not as-

signed to transmitter controls by default; this

also helps to eliminate the danger of inadvertent-

ly using them incorrectly. For the same reason

virtually all the mixers are inactive by default. For

more details of this please refer to page 74 (ﬁ xed-

wing model) or 76 (helicopter).

The basic procedure for programming a new •

model memory can be found on page 48, and in

the programming examples starting on page 142.

When switching on, binding or setting up the ra-•

dio control system, please ensure at all times

that the transmitter aerial is an adequate distance

from the receiver aerials. If the transmitter aeri-

al is too close to the receiver aerials, the receiver

will be swamped, and the red LED on the receiv-

er will begin to glow. At the same time the down-

link channel will stop working. As a result the

ﬁ eld strength bars on the transmitter screen are

replaced by “x”, and the receiver battery voltage

is displayed as 0.0 V. At the same time the radio

control system switches to Fail-Safe mode.

If this should happen, simply increase the dis-

tance between transmitter and receiver until the

displays revert to “normal”.

32 Using the receiver for the ﬁ rst time

Using the receiver for the ﬁ rst time

Preliminary notes regarding the GR-16 receiver

For more information please visit the Internet at www.graupner.de.

Receiving system

The mx-16 HoTT radio control set includes a GR-16

2.4 GHz bi-directional receiver which is suitable for con-

nection to a maximum of eight servos.

If you switch a HoTT receiver on, and “its” transmitter is

switched off or not within range, the red LED on the re-

ceiver lights up steadily for about one second, and then

starts to ﬂ ash slowly. This means that no connection

with a Graupner HoTT transmitter exists (at this stage).

When the connection is made, the green LED glows

constantly, and the red LED goes out.

In order to create a connection, the Graupner HoTT

receiver must ﬁ rst be “bound” to “its” model memory in

“its” Graupner HoTT transmitter; this procedure is known

as “binding”. However, binding is only necessary once

for each receiver / model memory combination (see

pages 61 or 70), and has been carried out at the factory

for model memory 1 using the components supplied in

the set. You therefore only need to carry out the “binding”

process - as described later - with additional receivers,

or if you switch to a different model memory. The pro-

cedure can also be repeated whenever you wish - for

instance, if you change the transmitter.

Receiver voltage display

Once a telemetry connection exists, the actual voltage

of the receiver power supply is displayed on the right-

hand side of the transmitter screen.

Temperature warning

If the temperature of the receiver falls below a limit value

set on the receiver (the default is -10°C), or exceeds

the upper warning threshold, which is also set on the

receiver (the default is +70°C), the transmitter generates

a warning in the form of steady beeps at intervals of

about one second.

Firmware update

Firmware updates for the receiver are carried out using

the receiver’s telemetry socket in conjunction with a PC

running Windows XP, Vista or 7. For this you require the

separately available USB interface, No. 7168.6 and the

adapter lead, Order No. 7168.6A.

The latest software and information can be found in the

Download area for the corresponding product at www.

graupner.de.

Note:

Once you have registered your transmitter at http://

graupner.de/de/service/produktregistrierung you will

automatically be informed of new updates by e-mail as

they become available.

Servo connections and polarity

The servo sockets of Graupner HoTT receivers are

numbered. The connector system is polarised: look for

the small chamfers when inserting the connectors, and

on no account force the plugs into the sockets.

The sockets marked “1+B-” and “6+B-” are intended

for the connection of the battery. It is also possible to

connect the appropriate servos to both these sockets in

parallel with the power supply by using a Y-lead, Order

No. 3936.11.

Do not connect the battery to these sockets with

reversed polarity, as this is likely to ruin the receiver

and any devices connected to it.

The power supply voltage is through-connected via all

the numbered sockets. The function of each individual

channel is determined by the transmitter you are using,

rather than by the receiver. Example: the throttle servo

socket is deﬁ ned by the radio control system, and may

differ according to the make and type.

In the case of Graupner radio control systems the

throttle function is assigned to channels 1 or 6, whereas

it is allocated to channel 3 in the case of Futaba radio

control systems, for example.

Concluding notes:

The much higher servo resolution of the HoTT sys-•

tem results in a substantially more direct response

compared with previous technologies. Please take a

little time to become accustomed to the ﬁ ner control

characteristics offered by the system!

If you wish to use a speed controller with integral •

BEC* system in parallel with a separate receiver bat-

tery, in most cases (depending on the speed control-

ler) the positive terminal (red wire) must be removed

from the three-pin connector, as shown in the dia-

gram. Be sure to read the appropriate notes in the in-

structions supplied with your speed controller before

doing this.

Carefully raise the central lug of the connector slight-

ly (1), withdraw the red

wire (2) and insulate the

bare contact with tape

to avoid possible short

circuits (3).

red

Observe the installation notes regarding the receiv-

er, receiver aerial and servos, which you will ﬁ nd on

page 34.

Reset

If you wish to carry out a receiver reset, locate the SET

button on the top of the receiver and hold it in while you

* Battery Elimination Circuit

Using the receiver for the ﬁ rst time

connect its power supply; release the button again.

If the reset is carried out with the transmitter switched

off, or if the receiver is not already bound, the receiver

LED ﬂ ashes red slowly after about two or three sec-

onds; at this stage it is immediately possible to initiate a

binding process at the transmitter. If the reset is carried

out with an already bound receiver, if the transmitter is

switched on, and if the associated model memory is ac-

tive, then the LED lights up green after a short interval to

indicate that your transmitter / receiving system is ready

for use once more.

Please note the following:

Resetting the receiver resets ALL the settings

stored in the receiver to the default settings, with

the exception of the binding information! If you

carry out a reset by mistake, this means that you

will have to restore all the receiver settings entered

using the Telemetry menu.

On the other hand, a deliberate RESET is particu-

larly useful if you wish to “re-house” a receiver in a

different model, as it represents an easy method of

avoiding the transference of unsuitable settings.

34 Installation Notes

chanical linkage can obstruct the servo’s movement.

The sequence in which the servos are connected to the

receiver is dictated by the model type. Please see the

socket assignments listed on pages 43 / 44 and 47.

Be sure to read the additional safety notes on pages 3

… 9.

If the receiver is ever switched on when the transmitter

is off, the servos may carry out uncontrolled movements.

You can avoid this by switching the system on in this

order:

Always switch the transmitter on ﬁ rst,

then the receiver.

When switching the system off:

Always switch the receiver off ﬁ rst,

then the transmitter.

When programming the transmitter you must always

ensure that any electric motors in the system cannot

possibly burst into life accidentally, and that an I.C.

engine ﬁ tted with an automatic starter cannot start

unintentionally. In the interests of safety it is always best

to disconnect the ﬂ ight battery, or cut off the fuel supply.

The following section contains notes and helpful

ideas on installing radio control components in the

model:

Wrap the receiver in foam rubber at least 6 mm thick. 1.

Fix the foam round the receiver using rubber bands,

to protect it from vibration, hard landings and crash

damage.

All switches must be installed in a position where 2.

they will not be affected by exhaust gases or vibra-

tion. The switch toggle must be free to move over its

full range of travel.

Always install servos using the vibration-damping 3.

grommets and tubular metal spacers supplied. The

rubber grommets provide some degree of protection

from mechanical shock and severe vibration. Don’t

over-tighten the servo retaining screws, as this will

compress the grommets and thereby reduce the vi-

bration protection they afford. The system offers good

security and vibration protection for your servos, but

only if the servo retaining screws are ﬁ tted and tight-

ened properly. The drawing below shows how to in-

stall a servo correctly. The brass spacers should be

pushed into the rubber grommets from the underside.

Servo mounting lug

Retaining screw

Rubber grommet

Tubular brass spacer

The servo output arms must be free to move over 4.

their full arc of travel. Ensure that no parts of the me-

Installation Notes

Installing the receiver

Regardless of which Graupner receiving system you are

using, the procedure is always the same:

Please note that the receiver aerials must be arranged

at least 5 cm away from all large metal parts and leads

which are not attached or connected directly to the

receiver. This includes steel and carbon ﬁ bre compo-

nents, servos, fuel pumps, cables of all sorts, etc. Ideally

the receiver should be installed in an easily accessible

position in the model, away from all other installed

components. Under no circumstances run servo leads

immediately adjacent to the receiver aerials, far less coil

them round it!

Tests have shown that a vertical (upright) position of a

single aerial produces the best results when long ap-

proaches are ﬂ own with a model. If the receiver features

a diversity aerial system (two aerials), the second aerial

should be deployed at an angle of 90° to the ﬁ rst.

The servo sockets of Graupner receivers are numbered.

The socket marked “6+B” is intended for the battery,

but an eighth servo can also be connected to it using a

Y-lead, Order No. 3936.11.

The power supply is through-connected using all the

numbered receiver sockets; in principle the battery can

be connected to any of the eight sockets.

The function of each individual channel is determined

by the transmitter in use, rather than by the receiver.

However, it is possible to alter the channel assignment

(mapping) by changing the programming in the Telem-

etry menu. Nevertheless, we recommend that you carry

out this process using the “Receiver output” option; see

page 60 or 69.

Installation Notes

Receiving system power supply

A reliable power supply is one of the basic essentials for

reliable model control. Free-moving pushrods, a fully-

charged battery, battery connecting leads of adequate

cross-section, minimal transfer resistance at the connec-

tors etc. all help to minimise energy consumption, but

if you have attended to all this, and the receiver volt-

age displayed on the transmitter screen still collapses

repeatedly, or is generally (too) low, then please note the

following:

The ﬁ rst point to check is that your batteries are always

fully charged at the start of each ﬂ ying session. Check

that contacts and switches are low in resistance. It is a

good idea to measure the voltage drop over the installed

switch harness under load, as even a new, heavy-duty

switch can cause a voltage drop of up to 0.2 Volt. Ageing

effects and oxidation of the contacts can increase this

several times over. Constant vibration and movement

at the contacts also “gnaws away” at the contacts, and

tends to produce a creeping increase in transfer resist-

ance.

It is also true that even small servos, such as the Graup-

ner/JR DS-281, can draw currents of up to 0.75 Ampere

when stalled (mechanically obstructed). Just four servos

of this type in a “foamy” can therefore place a load of up

to 3 Amps on the airborne power supply ...

For this reason you should always choose a receiver

battery which constantly delivers an adequate voltage,

i. e. which does not collapse under severe load. To “cal-

culate” the necessary battery capacity we recommend

as a starting point that you provide 350 mAh for each

analogue servo, and at least 500 mAh for each digital

servo.

For example, a 1400 mAh battery would represent an

absolute minimum as the power supply for a receiving

system with a total of four analogue servos. When mak-

ing your calculations, however, please bear the receiver

in mind as well, as it draws a current of around 70 mA

due to its bi-directional function.

Regardless of these considerations, it is generally advis-

able to connect the power supply to the receiver using

two leads: lead “1” is connected to the 6+B receiver

socket in the usual way, and lead “2” to the opposite

socket, marked 1+B, at the other end of the receiver

socket bank. For example, you could use a switch or

voltage regulator with two power supply leads running

to the receiver. You might install a Y-lead, Order No.

3936.11, between lead and receiver, as shown in the

diagram below, if you wish to use one or both of the

receiver sockets to connect a servo, speed controller,

etc. The dual connection at the switch or voltage regu-

lator not only reduces the risk of a cable fracture, but

also ensures a more even energy supply to the servos

connected to the receiver.

Auxiliary function

Y-lead,

Order No. 3936.11

PRX stabilised

receiver power supply,

Order No. 4136

Four-cell Ni-MH battery packs

Traditional four-cell packs are a good choice for power-

ing your Graupner HoTT receiving system, provided that

you observe the conditions described above, i. e. you

must ensure that the packs have adequate capacity and

maintain their voltage well.

Five-cell NiMH battery packs

Five-cell batteries offer a wider margin of safety in terms

of voltage compared with four-cell packs. However,

please note that not all servos available on the market

can tolerate the voltage of a ﬁ ve-cell pack (in the long-

term), especially when the battery is freshly charged.

For example, many of these servos respond to the high

voltage with a clearly audible “rumble”.

It is therefore important to check the speciﬁ cation of the

servos you intend to use before you make the decision

to use ﬁ ve-cell packs.

Two-cell Nanophosphate® (A123) batteries

Taking into account the current situation, these new cells

are now regarded as the optimum choice for receiver

packs. A123 cells can be fast-charged in conjunction

with a suitable battery charger, and are protected by a

metal case and therefore comparatively robust. It is also

true that a much higher number of charge / discharge

cycles is attributed to this cell type than, for example,

to LiPo cells. The nominal voltage of 6.6 Volt of a two-

cell Nanophosphate® pack presents no problems to

Graupner HoTT receivers, nor to those servos, speed

controllers, gyros, etc. which are expressly approved for

use at these higher voltages. Please note, however,

that virtually all servos, speed controllers, gyros etc.

sold in the past, and also most of those currently

available, are only approved for use on an operating

voltage in the range 4.8 to 6 Volt. If you wish to con-

nect these devices to the receiver, it is essential to use

a stabilised regulated power supply, such as the PRX,

Order No. 4136; see Appendix. If you neglect this, there

is a danger that the connected devices will quickly suffer

permanent damage

Two-cell LiPo battery packs

For a given capacity LiPo batteries are a great deal

lighter than the battery types described above, but they

36 Installation Notes

are more susceptible to mechanical stress and damage

due to their lack of a metal case. Moreover LiPo batter-

ies only have a limited ability to be fast-charged, and

generally do not survive such a high number of charge

/ discharge cycles as is claimed for other batteries,

such as Nanophosphate® types. The comparatively

high nominal voltage of 7.4 Volt of a two-cell LiPo pack

presents no problems to Graupner HoTT receivers, nor

to those servos, speed controllers, gyros, etc. which are

expressly approved for use at these higher voltages.

Please note, however, that virtually all servos, speed

controllers, gyros etc. sold in the past, and also

most of those currently available, are only approved

for use on an operating voltage in the range 4.8 to 6

Volt. If you wish to connect these devices to the re-

ceiver, it is essential to use a stabilised regulated power

supply, such as the PRX, Order No. 4136; see Appendix.

If you neglect this, there is a danger that the connected

devices will quickly suffer permanent damage.

For your notes

38 Deﬁ nition of terms

Deﬁ nition of terms

Control functions, transmitter controls, function inputs, control channels, mixers, switches, control switches

To make it easier for you to understand the mx-16

HoTT manual, the following section contains deﬁ nitions

of many terms which crop up again and again in the

remainder of the text.

Control function

The term “control function” can be thought of as the

signal generated for a particular function which needs

to be controlled - initially independent of its subsequent

progress through the transmitter. In the case of ﬁ xed-

wing model aircraft the control functions include throttle,

rudder and aileron, whereas collective pitch, roll and

pitch-axis are typical of those used for helicopters. The

signal of a control function may be assigned directly, or

to several control channels simultaneously via mixers.

A typical example of the latter is separate aileron ser-

vos, or pairs of roll-axis or pitch-axis servos in a model

helicopter. The essential feature of a control function is its

inﬂ uence on the mechanical travel of the corresponding

servo.

Transmitter control

The term “transmitter control” refers to the mechanical

elements on the transmitter which are operated directly

by the pilot. Their movements in turn generate corre-

sponding movements in the servos, speed controllers

etc. at the receiver end. The transmitter controls include

the following:

The two dual-axis stick units for the control functions •

1 to 4; for both model types (“ﬁ xed-wing” and “helicop-

ter”) these four functions can be interchanged in any

way you wish using the “Mode” function, e. g. throttle

left or right, without having to re-connect the servos.

The dual-axis stick function for throttle (or airbrakes) is

often referred to as the Ch 1 (Channel 1) control.

The three rotary proportional controls CTRL 6, 7 + 8•

The switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, and CTRL 9 and 10•

The switches SW 1 … 3, plus 8 and 9, if they have •

been assigned to a control channel in the “Transmit-

ter control settings” menu.

When a proportional transmitter control is operated, the

servo or servos follow the position of the control directly,

whereas a switched channel provides just the two or

three set servo positions.

Function input

This is an imaginary point on the signal path, and must

not be considered the same as the point on the circuit

board where the transmitter control is connected! The

two menus “Stick mode” and “Transmitter control

settings” affect the course of the signal “after” this point,

and it is possible (and likely) that there will be differences

between the number of the transmitter control (as stated

above) and the number of the subsequent control chan-

nel.

Control channel

There is a point on the signal path where the signal con-

tains all the control information required for a particular

servo – this may be directly generated by a transmitter

control or indirectly via a mixer – and from this point on

we call the signal a “control channel”. This signal is only

affected by any adjustments carried out in the “Servo

settings” menu before leaving the transmitter via the RF

module. Once picked up at the receiver, this signal may

be modiﬁ ed by any settings made in the Telemetry menu

before ﬁ nally passing to the corresponding servo in the

model.

Mixer

The transmitter’s software includes a wide range of mixer

functions. Their purpose is to enable a control function to

affect multiple servos at the branching point of the mixer

input, or alternatively to allow several control functions

to affect one servo. For more information please refer to

the numerous mixer functions as described in the section

starting on page 88 of the manual.

Switch

The three standard switches SW 2, 3 and 8, the two

three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7 and the two

momentary buttons SW 1 and 9 can also be incorpo-

rated into the programming of the transmitter controls.

However, all these switches are also generally intended

for switching program options, e. g. starting and stopping

timers, switching mixers on and off, transferring control in

Trainer mode etc. Each physical switch function can be

assigned to as many functions as you wish. Numerous

examples are described in the manual.

Transmitter control switch

It is often desirable to switch a function on or off auto-

matically at a particular position of another transmitter

control, e. g. at a deﬁ ned position of one of the dual-axis

sticks. Typical examples are switching a stopwatch on

and off to allow you to record the motor run time, extend-

ing spoilers automatically (and many others). The mx-

16 HoTT software includes a total of two (three - for

helicopters) “control switches” of this type.

Two transmitter control switches are available for the Ch

1 stick in each model memory, both for ﬁ xed-wing model

aircraft and helicopters. For helicopters a third is present

in the form of the throttle limiter; see the right-hand side

and page 67.

This manual includes a range of instructive examples

which make programming as simple as child’s play.

Please refer to the programming examples in the section

starting on page 142.

Assigning switches and control switches

The basic procedure

At many points in the program there is the option of

using a switch (SW 1 … 9) or a control switch (G1 … 3;

see below) to operate a function, or to switch between

settings, such as the DUAL RATE / EXPO function, ﬂ ight

phase programming, mixers and more. The mx-16

HoTT allows you to assign several functions to a single

switch.

The process of assigning switches is exactly the same

in all the relevant menus, and we will explain the basic

programming procedure at this point so that you can

concentrate on the special features when reading the

detailed menu descriptions.

A switch symbol appears in the bottom line of the screen

at all programming points where switches can be as-

signed:

Move to the appropriate column using the arrow buttons

of the left or right touch-key.

This is the procedure for assigning a switch:

Brieﬂ y press the 1. SET button or the right-hand touch-

key. The following message appears on the screen:

push desired switch

into position ON

Now simply move the switch you wish to use to the 2.

“ON” position, press the push-button, or move the

Ch 1 stick from the “OFF” position in the direction of

“ON”. Please note: the so-called control switches as-

signed to this transmitter control (see right) carry out

the task of an ON / OFF switch in software; the same

applies to the throttle limiter (see page 79) which is

available in the “Helicopter” model type. This com-

pletes the assignment process.

Changing the direction of switching:

If the switch turns out to work in the wrong direction, you

can correct it as follows: move the switch to the desired

OFF position, activate switch assignment once more

and assign the switch again, this time with the switch

direction you prefer.

Erasing a switch:

Activate the switch symbol as described under Point

2, then press the button combination cd or ef

simultaneously, or press the right-hand touch-key

(CLEAR) button brieﬂ y.

Transmitter control switches

Many functions are best controlled automatically by a

particular (freely programmable) position of the Ch 1

transmitter stick (or the throttle limiter in the case of heli-

copters), rather than by a conventional physical switch.

Typical applications:

Automatically switching an on-board glowplug ener-•

gizer on and off according to the throttle position of

the Ch 1 stick (“G1” or “G2”). In this case the switch

for the plug energizer is controlled by a mixer at the

transmitter.

Automatically switching a stopwatch on and off to •

record the pure “ﬂ ight time” of a model helicopter; this

is accomplished using the “G3” switch of the throt-

tle limiter.

Automatically switching the “AIL • ¼ RUD” mixer off

when the airbrakes are extended, in order to keep

the wings parallel with the ground when landing on

a slope face, without the (usually coupled) rudder af-

fecting the model’s heading.

Automatically extending landing ﬂ aps with coupled el-•

evator trim adjustment on the landing approach, as

soon as the throttle stick is reduced below the set

threshold point.

Automatically switching a stopwatch on and off in or-•

der to time the run of an electric motor.

For both model types the mx-16 HoTT transmitter’s

software caters for these purposes with two “control

switches” of this type; they can be assigned to the Ch 1

stick: “G1” is switched on at around -80% of full travel,

while “G2” is switched on at around +80%. The Helicop-

ter program also includes an extra control switch “G3” on

the throttle limiter close to the 100% point; see page 79.

All these control switches can be included without

restriction in the free programming of the switches, i. e.

they can be assigned to a function instead of a physical

switch. This means that you are able to assign one of

the control switches G1 … G2 (or G1 … G3) instead

of a physical switch at any point in the software where

switches are assigned. All you have to do is move the

Ch 1 stick or the throttle limiter control (by default the

rotary proportional control CTRL 6) from the desired

“OFF” position in the direction of “ON”.

40 Digital trims

Digital trims

Description of function, and Ch 1 cut-off trim

Digital trims with visual and audible indicators

Both the dual-axis stick units are ﬁ tted with digital trim

systems. When you give the trim lever a brief push (one

“click”), the neutral position of the associated stick chan-

nel changes by one increment. If you hold the trim lever

in one direction, the trim value changes continuously in

the corresponding direction with increasing speed.

The degree of trim offset is also “audible”, as the pitch of

the tone changes to reﬂ ect the setting. When you are ﬂ y-

ing a model, you can ﬁ nd the trim centre position easily

without having to look at the screen: if you over-run the

centre setting, the trim stays in the centre position for a

moment.

The current trim values are automatically stored when

you switch from one model memory to another. The dig-

ital trims are also stored separately for each ﬂ ight phase

within a model memory, with the exception of the “Ch 1”

(Channel 1) trim, which is the throttle / airbrake trim on a

ﬁ xed-wing model.

The Ch 1 trim includes another special function which

makes it easy to re-locate the idle throttle setting of a

glowplug motor.

However, since the trim functions described in these

instructions only affect the “Motor off” direction, the trim

display on the transmitter’s screen will vary according

to your individual set stick mode, i. e. the “forward” or

“back” throttle / collective pitch minimum position of the

Ch 1 stick, and also according to “left stick” or “right

stick” for throttle / collective pitch. The illustrations in

these instructions always refer to “Throttle / Collective

pitch right” for both model types, and to “Throttle back”

for ﬁ xed-wing models and “Collective pitch forward” for

model helicopters.

2. Model helicopters

In helicopter mode the Ch 1 trim has another feature in

addition to “cut-off trim”, as described under “Fixed-wing

models” on the left; this time in conjunction with the

“Throttle limit function” (see page 79): while the throttle

limit slider is in the bottom half of its travel, i. e. in the

“start-up range”, the Ch 1 trim lever acts as idle trim on

the throttle limit, and the idle trim is displayed on the

screen:

stop

flt

50%

MCTRL 7

Current trim position

Trim at motor OFF position

Last idle position

Throttle limit control

In contrast to a ﬁ xed-wing model aircraft, this display is

suppressed if the throttle limit control is moved to the

“right” half of its travel.

stop

flt

50%

MCTRL 7

Throttle limit control

Note regarding helicopters:

The Ch 1 trim only affects the throttle servo and not the

collective pitch servos; it also works evenly over the full

stick travel. Please note that the helicopter throttle servo

must be connected to receiver output 6 (see Receiver

socket assignment, page 47).

1. Fixed-wing models

The Ch 1 trim features a special cut-off trim which is

designed for glowplug motors: you initially use the trim

lever in the usual way to select a reliable idle setting for

the motor.

If you now move the Ch 1 trim lever to its end-point in

the direction of “motor cut-off”, pushing the lever in a

single movement, a marker appears on the screen in the

last position. You can now return to the idle setting for

starting the motor simply by pushing the stick one click

in the direction of “open throttle”.

stop

flt

50%

Current trim position

Trim at motor OFF position

Last idle position

Idle direction

Ch 1 trim lever

The cut-off trim feature is disabled if you enter “none” or

“none / inv” in the “Motor at Ch 1” line within the “Basic

settings” menu (page 56 / 57).

Note:

Since this trim function is only effective in the “Mo-

tor off” direction, the above illustration will not apply if

you change the direction of the Ch 1 stick for throttle

minimum from “back” (which is reﬂ ected in the illustra-

tion above) to “forward” in the “Motor at Ch1” line of the

“Basic settings” menu.

For your notes

42 Fixed-wing model aircraft

Fixed-wing model aircraft

This program provides convenient support for normal

model aircraft with up to two aileron servos and two ﬂ ap

servos, V-tail models, ﬂ ying wings and deltas with two

elevon (aileron / elevator) servos and two ﬂ ap servos.

The majority of power models and gliders belong to the

“normal” tail type with one servo each for elevator, rud-

der, ailerons and throttle or electronic speed controller

(airbrakes on a glider). There is also the special model

type “2 EL Sv” which provides a means of connecting

two elevator servos to channels 3 and 8 in parallel.

If your model features two separate aileron servos (and

also in some cases two ﬂ ap servos), the aileron travel of

both pairs of control surfaces can be set up with dif-

ferential movement in the “Wing mixers” menu, i. e. the

down-travel can be set independently of the up-travel.

Finally the program caters for camber-changing ﬂ aps,

which can be operated by any of the transmitter controls

“CTRL 6 … 10”. Alternatively a phase-speciﬁ c trim is

available for ﬂ aps, ailerons and elevator in the “Phase

trim” menu.

If the model features a V-tail instead of a conventional

tail, you need to select the tail type “V-tail” in the “Basic

settings” menu, as this automatically superimposes the

elevator and rudder control functions in such a way that

each tail panel can be actuated by a separate servo.

For deltas and ﬂ ying wings it is easy to set up mixed

elevons, i. e. the aileron and elevator functions can be

carried out via common control surfaces at the trailing

edge of the right and left wing. As standard the program

contains the appropriate mixer functions for the two

servos.

Up to four ﬂ ight phases can be programmed in each of

the twenty model memories.

The digital trim positions are stored separately for each

ﬂ ight phase, with the exception of the Ch 1 trim. The Ch

1 trim provides a simple means of re-locating the correct

idle throttle setting.

Two timers are available at all times when ﬂ ying. The

screen also displays the transmitter operating time since

the battery was last charged.

All the transmitter controls (CTRL) and switches (SW)

can be assigned to virtually any of the inputs 5 … 8 in

the “Transmitter control settings” menu.

“Dual Rate” and “Exponential” can be programmed

separately for aileron, rudder and elevator, giving two

modes of control.

Depending on the model type you have selected, the

“Wing mixers” menu presents you with up to twelve

additional pre-deﬁ ned mixers and coupling functions

which you can simply select and set up when necessary,

in addition to three free mixers:

1. Aileron differential (switchable)

2. Flap differential (switchable)

3. Aileron ¼ rudder (switchable)

4. Aileron ¼ ﬂ ap (switchable)

5. Airbrake ¼ elevator (switchable)

6. Airbrake ¼ ﬂ ap (switchable)

7. Airbrake ¼ aileron (switchable)

8. Elevator ¼ ﬂ ap (switchable)

9. Elevator ¼ aileron (switchable)

10. Flap ¼ elevator (switchable)

11. Flap ¼ aileron (switchable)

12. Differential reduction

left

right

Airbrake

Flap

Airbrake

Elevator

Airbrake-Function 1

left

right

Rudder/Elevator

V-Tail

Airbrake

Flap

Airbrake

Elevator

Airbrake

Aileron

Fixed-wing models: receiver assignment

Installation notes

The servos MUST be connected to the receiver

outputs in the following order:

Outputs not required are simply left vacant.

Please note the following points in particular:

If you are using only one aileron servo, receiver out-•

put 5 (right aileron) is left unused; it can also be used

for another purpose if you select “1 AIL” in the “Basic

settings” menu.

If you are using only one ﬂ ap servo, receiver output 7 •

(right ﬂ ap) MUST be left unused, assuming that you

have selected “2 FL” in the “Basic settings” menu.

Please also read the information on the following

pages.

Receiver socket assignment for models with up to two ailerons and two ﬂ aps, plus “normal” tail type, V-tail,

and two elevator servos (3 + 8)

Servo 48 V

C 577

Bes Nr 4101

Receiver battery

Switch harness

Telemetry sensor

Y-lead,

Order No. 3936.11

Receiver

3 = Elevator / left V-tail

2 = Aileron / left aileron

8 = 2nd elevator / aux. function

7 = Right ﬂ ap / reserve

5 = Right aileron / reserve

4 = Rudder / right V-tail

1 = Throttle / brake

6 = Flap / left ﬂ ap / reserve

44 Fixed-wing models: receiver assignment

Receiver socket assignment for models of the “Delta / Flying wing” type, with up to two ﬂ aps

Se vo 48 V

C 577

Bes Nr 4101

Receiver battery

Switch harness

Telemetry sensor

Y-lead,

Order No. 3936.11

Receiver

3 = Right elevon

2 = Left elevon

8 = Auxiliary function

7 = Right ﬂ ap / reserve

5 = Reserve function

4 = Rudder

1 = Throttle / brake

6 = Flap / left ﬂ ap / reserve

As there are several possible combinations of servo

orientation and control surface linkage, you may ﬁ nd that

the direction of rotation of one or more servos is incor-

rect. Use the following table to solve the problem.

Model

type

Servo rotating in

wrong direction Remedy

V-tail Rudder and elevator

reversed

Reverse servos 3 + 4 in

the “servo set.” menu

Rudder correct,

elevator reversed

Swap over servos 3 + 4

at the receiver

Elevator correct,

rudder reversed

Reverse servos 3 + 4 in

the “servo set.” menu,

AND swap over at the

receiver

Delta,

ﬂ ying

wing

Elevator and ailerons

reversed

Reverse servos 2 + 3 in

the “servo set.” menu

Elevator correct,

ailerons reversed

Reverse servos 2 + 3 in

the “servo set.” menu,

AND swap over at the

receiver

Ailerons correct,

elevator reversed

Swap over servos 2 + 3

at the receiver

All menus which are relevant to ﬁ xed-wing models are

marked with an “aeroplane” symbol in the “Program

descriptions”:

This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus

when programming a ﬁ xed-wing model aircraft.

For your notes

46 Model helicopters

Model helicopters

Collective

Pitch Curve

Channel 1 Throttle

The continued development of model helicopters and

helicopter components, such as gyros, speed governors,

rotor blades etc., has led to the current position where

helicopters are capable of sophisticated 3-D aerobatics.

In contrast, if you are a beginner to helicopter ﬂ ying, you

need a simple set-up so that you can quickly get started

on the initial stages of hovering practice, and then

gradually learn to exploit all the options provided by the

mx-16 HoTT.

The helicopter program of the mx-16 HoTT can cope

with all current model helicopters equipped with 1 … 4

servos for collective pitch control, entirely regardless of

whether they are powered by a fuel-driven or electric

motor.

Each model memory can include three ﬂ ight phases

plus auto-rotation.

Two timers are constantly included in the basic screen

display. At the same time the period which has elapsed

since the last charge process is also displayed.

You can return to the correct idle position for the digital

Ch 1 trim simply by pressing a button.

“Dual Rate” and “Exponential” are available for roll,

pitch-axis and tail rotor; they can be coupled together,

and programmed to provide two settings.

All the transmitter controls (CTRL) and switches (SW)

can be assigned to inputs 5 … 8 in virtually any order.

This is carried out in the “Transmitter control settings”

menu.

In addition to three linear mixers, which can be assigned

to any functions and can also be switched on and off,

the “Helicopter mixers” menu provides ﬁ ve-point curves

for the collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor mixers,

variable separately for each ﬂ ight phase; these provide

non-linear mixer characteristics.

1. Collective pitch

2. Ch 1 ¼ throttle

3. Ch 1 ¼ tail rotor

Such advanced features are not needed by the begin-

ner, who will initially simply set the hover point to coin-

cide with the centre point of the stick arc, and adjust the

collective pitch travel as required.

Moreover the “Heli mixers” menu offers two additional

set-up options in the lines “Gyro” and “Inp8”, plus a

“swashplate limiter”.

The mixer inputs for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis

can then be adjusted in the “Swashplate mixers” menu.

The throttle limit function in the “Transmitter control

settings” menu provides an effective means of starting

the motor in any ﬂ ight phase. By default the proportional

rotary control CTRL 7 is assigned to this input, and this

control function determines the maximum throttle servo

position, i. e. the trim lever controls the motor over the

idle range. Only when this rotary knob is turned in the di-

rection of full-throttle do the programmed throttle curves

take effect. If you have set up the two timers, they also

start recording the ﬂ ight time automatically at this point.

See page 79 for more information on this.

Model helicopters: receiver assignment

Receiver socket assignment for model helicopters

Note for modellers upgrading from earlier Graupner

systems:

Compared with the previous receiver channel sequence,

servo socket 1 (collective pitch servo) and servo socket

6 (throttle servo) have been interchanged. The servos

must be connected to the receiver output sockets in the

order shown at bottom right. Outputs not required are

simply left vacant. For more information on the different

types of swashplate, please refer to the “Basic settings”

menu described on page 64 / 65.

All menus which are relevant to model helicopters are

marked with a “helicopter” symbol in the “Program

descriptions”:

This means that you can easily skip irrelevant menus

when programming a model helicopter.

Installation notes

The servos MUST be connected to the receiver

outputs in the order shown on this page:

Outputs not required are simply left vacant.

Please note the additional information on the follow-

ing pages.

Note:

To be able to exploit all the convenience and safety

features of the throttle limiter (see page 79), the speed

controller should be connected to receiver output “6”,

and not to receiver output “8”, as shown in the drawing

on the left. See page 97 for more details.

Se vo 48 V

C 577

Bes Nr 410

Receiver battery

Switch harness

Telemetry sensor

Y-lead,

Order No. 3936.11

Receiver 1 = PCollective pitch or roll-axis

(2) or pitch-axis (2) servo

2 = Roll-axis (1) servo

3 = Pitch-axis (1) servo

5 = Free, or pitch-axis (2) servo

4 = Tail rotor servo (gyro)

6 = Throttle servo

(speed controller)

7 = (Gyro gain)

8 = (Speed governor)

48 Program description: reserving a new memory

If you have already read through the manual to this

point, you will undoubtedly have made your ﬁ rst attempt

at programming the system already. Even so, it is impor-

tant to describe each menu here in detail, to ensure that

you have comprehensive instructions for each applica-

tion you are likely to encounter.

In this section we start with setting up a “free” model

memory prior to “programming” a new model:

#01

0:00h

stop

flt

0:00

0.0V

6.1V HoTT

99%

From the basic display press the central SET button of

the right-hand touch-key to move to the “Multi-function

list”. (You can return to the basic screen at any time by

pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand touch-

key.) By default the menu point “Model memory” is

displayed inverse (black background) and is therefore

active when you ﬁ rst call up the multi-function select

menu after switching the transmitter on. If this is not the

case, select the “Model memory” menu using the arrow

buttons (cd,ef) of the left or right-hand touch-key,

then brieﬂ y press the central SET button of the right-

hand touch-key:

mod.mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

base sett.

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

Detailed description of programming

Reserving a new memory

select model

clear model

copy mod–>mod

export to SD

import from SD

Now touch the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key once more to move on to the “select model”

sub-menu.

¿¿free¿¿

R08

¿¿free¿¿

In the transmitter’s default state the ﬁ rst model memory

is already initialised with the “Fixed-wing model” model

type, and the receiver supplied in the set is “bound” to

it. This is indicated by the receiver code displayed at top

right of the screen; in the example above this is R08. If,

on the other hand, the model memory is “unbound”, you

will see “---”.

The remainder of the model memories are not yet

occupied, and are “unbound”; these are entitled

“ÄÄfreeÄÄ”. If you want to set up a ﬁ xed-wing model,

then you can immediately start the programming pro-

cedure after leaving the “select model” sub-menu and

the “Model memory” menu by pressing the central ESC

button of the left-hand touch-key each time … alterna-

tively you can select one of the free model memories

using the left or right-hand touch-key …

¿¿free¿¿

R08

¿¿free¿¿

... and then brieﬂ y press the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key to conﬁ rm your choice.

After this you are invited to select the basic model type,

i. e. either “Fixed-wing” or “Helicopter”:

Sel model type

( empty mod mem )

Use the e or f button of the left or right-hand touch-

key to select the appropriate basic model type, then

touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to conﬁ rm your choice. The screen switches back to the

basic display: your chosen model memory is now initial-

ised with the selected basic model type, and the screen

switches back to the basic display. The model memory is

now reserved for that use.

However, if you wish to get started with a helicopter,

then use the c or d button of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select one of the model memories entitled

“ÄÄfreeÄÄ”, and conﬁ rm your choice with a brief touch

of the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key.

You are now requested to deﬁ ne the basic model type,

i. e. either “ﬁ xed-wing” or “helicopter”. Use the c or d

button of the left or right touch-key to select the cor-

Program description: reserving a new memory

directly to the corresponding option. For more de-

tailed information on binding a receiver please refer

to pages 61 and 70.

Beneath the “BIND. n/v” warning described earlier •

you will also see the warning …

fail safe

setup

t.b.d

… for a few seconds as an indication that no Fail-

Safe settings have been entered yet. For more infor-

mation on this please refer to page 116.

If the warning …•

throttle

too

high !

… appears on the screen, move the throttle stick (or

the limiter - by default the rotary knob CTRL 6 - if set-

ting up a helicopter) back to idle. This warning only

appears in accordance with the settings you have en-

tered in the “Motor at Ch1” or “Collective pitch min.”

section of the “Basic settings” menu, as described

on pages 56 and 67. If you are setting up a non-pow-

ered ﬁ xed-wing model, enter “none” or “none/inv” at

this point; this disables the throttle warning message,

and makes available the “Brake ¼ NN *“ mixers in

the “Wing mixers” menu, which would otherwise be

suppressed.

If the transmitter’s model memories are already occu-•

pied, then a pictogram of the selected model type ap-

pears in the appropriate model memory, followed by

a blank line, or the model’s name if a name has al-

responding symbol, then again press the central SET

button of the right-hand touch-key brieﬂ y in conﬁ rmation.

This initialises the selected model type for the model

memory you have just selected, and you can now start

programming your model in this memory.

It is now only possible to change this memory to a dif-

ferent model type if you ﬁ rst erase the model memory

(“Model memory” menu, page 52).

Notes:

If you wish to erase the model memory which is cur-•

rently active in the basic display, you will have to de-

ﬁ ne one of the two model types “ﬁ xed-wing” or “heli-

copter” immediately after completing the erase

procedure. You cannot avoid making this choice by

switching the transmitter off. If you wish to remove

a model memory which you inadvertently occupied,

you can simply erase it from a different model mem-

ory.

However, if you erase a model memory which is not

currently active, after the procedure you will see the

memory marked as “ÄÄfreeÄÄ” under Model Se-

lect.

After the selected model memory has been initial-•

ised with your preferred basic model type, the screen

shifts to the newly reserved model memory. At the

same time the following warning appears for a few

seconds …

BIND N/A

… as an indication that this memory has not yet been

bound to a receiver. With a brief touch of the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key you can move

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

ready been entered in the “Basic settings” menu

(pages 56 and 64), together with an indicator that the

memory is bound to a receiver, if appropriate.

If the battery voltage is too low, the software prevents •

you switching model memories in the interests of

safety. In this case the screen displays this message:

not possible now

voltage too low

Basically there are now four different options for assign-

ing the four control functions aileron, elevator, rudder

and throttle / airbrakes (ﬁ xed-wing model), and roll,

pitch-axis, tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch (model

helicopter) to the two primary dual-axis sticks. Which of

these options is adopted depends on the personal pref-

erence of the individual model pilot. This function is set

in the “Stick mode” line for the currently active model

memory in the “Basic settings” menu (page 56 or 64):

mod Name

stick mode

CH8 delay

motor on C1

yes

tail type normal

As mentioned earlier, for maximum ﬂ exibility the trans-

mitter controls 5 … 8 are by default not assigned to

transmitter controls, and can be assigned to any chan-

nels you like; this also helps to avoid accidental mishan-

dling.

This means that in the default state of the equipment

only those servos connected to receiver outputs 1

… 4 can usually be controlled by the two dual-axis

sticks, whereas servos connected to sockets 5 …

50 Program description: reserving a new memory

max. 8 remain steadfastly at their centre position. If

you set up a new model helicopter, servo 6 may also re-

spond to some extent to the controls - depending on the

position of the throttle limiter CTRL 6. For both model

types this situation only changes once you have carried

out the appropriate assignments in the “Transmitter

control settings” menu.

If you wish to use a newly initialised model memory,

then this MUST ﬁ rst be “bound” to a (further) receiver

before any servos connected to the receiver can be con-

trolled from the transmitter. For more information on this

please refer to the “Binding” section on pages 61 and 70.

You will ﬁ nd a description of the basic steps for program-

ming a ﬁ xed-wing model aircraft in the Programming

Examples section starting on page 142; for model

helicopters the equivalent section starts on page 164.

The following menu descriptions are arranged in the

order that they are listed in the individual menus in the

multi-function list.

For your notes

52 Program description: model memories

The section on pages 24 and 25 explains the basic

method of using the buttons, while the previous two

double-pages explains how to move to the Multi-function

list and reserve a new model memory. At this point we

wish to start with the “normal” description of the indi-

vidual menu points in the sequence in which they occur

on the transmitter itself. For this reason we start with the

menu …

Model memory

mod.mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

base sett.

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

The transmitter can store up to twenty complete sets

of model data, including the digital trim values set by

the four trim levers. The trims are automatically stored,

which means that the settings you have carefully estab-

lished through test-ﬂ ying are never lost when you swap

models. A pictogram of the selected model type, and - if

you have entered a model name in the “Basic settings”

menu (pages 56 and 64) - the name appears in all three

sub-menus of the “Model memory” menu following the

model number.

If necessary, use the arrow buttons of the left or right-

hand touch-key to select the “Model memory” menu,

then brieﬂ y touch the SET button of the right-hand

touch-key:

Model memories

Calling up a model, erasing a model, copying model ¼ model

clear model

select model

clear model

copy mod–>mod

export to SD

import from SD

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the “clear model” sub-menu, then

touch the SET button.

Select the model to be erased using the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch-key, …

ULTIMATE

GRAUBELE

STARLET

BELL47G

model to be cleared:

R08

–––

… then touch the SET button again; the program re-

sponds with the security query:

model

GRAUBELE

to be erased ?

NO YES

If you answer NO, the process is interrupted, and you

are returned to the previous screen page. If you answer

YES with the f button of the left or right-hand touch-

key and conﬁ rm your choice with the SET button, then

the selected model memory is erased.

select model

clear model

copy mod–>mod

export to SD

import from SD

If you now brieﬂ y press the SET button again, you move

to the “Call up model” sub-menu:

05 ¿¿free¿¿

ULTIMATE

GRAUBELE

STARLET

BELL47G

06 ¿¿free¿¿

R08

–––

Now use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select from the list the model memory you

wish to use, and conﬁ rm your selection by pressing the

SET button. Pressing ESC takes you back to the previ-

ous menu page without switching models.

Notes:

If the warning message “Throttle too high” appears •

when you switch models, the throttle or collective

pitch stick (Ch 1), or the throttle limiter, is positioned

too far towards full-throttle.

If the battery voltage is too low, it may not be possible •

to switch model memories for safety reasons. In this

case the screen displays the following message:

not possible now

voltage too low

Program description: model memories

select the target memory using the arrow buttons cd

of the left or right-hand touch-key, and conﬁ rm your

choice with SET. Alternatively you can interrupt the

process with ESC. It is possible to overwrite a model

memory which already contains model data.

ULTIMATE

GRAUBELE

STARLET

BELL47G

copy to model:

05 ¿¿free¿¿

R08

–––

When you conﬁ rm the selected model memory by touch-

ing the SET button, the security query appears:

model

ULTIMATE

to be copied ?

NO YES

03 ¿¿free¿¿

Selecting NO interrupts the process, and returns you to

the previous page. If you select YES with the f button,

and conﬁ rm your choice by touching the SET button,

then the selected model is copied into the chosen target

model memory.

Note:

When you copy a model memory, the binding data is

copied together with the model data, so that a receiving

system bound to the original model memory can also

be operated with the copy of the memory, i. e. it does not

require another binding process.

Caution:

The erasure process is irrevocable. All data in the

selected model memory is reset to the factory

default settings.

Note:

If you wish to erase the currently active model memory

in the basic display, you will be required to deﬁ ne the

model type “Helicopter” or “Fixed-wing” immediately.

However, if you erase a non-active model memory, then

the message “ÄÄfreeÄÄ” appears in the Model select

menu.

copy model ¼ model

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the “copy model ¼ model” sub-

menu, then touch the SET button.

select model

clear model

copy mod–>mod

export to SD

import from SD

Select the model to be copied using the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch-key …

ULTIMATE

GRAUBELE

STARLET

BELL47G

copy from model:

R08

–––

… then brieﬂ y press the SET button of the right-hand

touch-key in the “Copy to model” window. You can now

Export to SD

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the “Export to SD” sub-menu, then

touch the SET button.

select model

clear model

copy mod–>mod

export to SD

import from SD

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the model to be exported:

ULTIMATE

GRAUBELE

STARLET

BELL47G

export to SD-CARD:

R08

–––

When you conﬁ rm the selected model memory with a

brief press of the SET button, this security query ap-

pears:

model

ULTIMATE

export ?

NO YES

SD-CARD

You can interrupt the process with NO; if you do this,

you are returned to the starting screen. However, if you

select YES with the f button, and conﬁ rm your choice

by touching the SET button, then the selected model is

54 Program description: model memories

copied to the SD card.

Notes:

If the warning …•

SD-CARD

INSERT

… appears instead of a model selection, there is no

SD card in the card slot; see page 22.

When you copy a model memory, the binding data is •

copied along with the model data, so that the receiv-

ing system associated with the original model mem-

ory can also be operated using the SAME transmitter

and the copied memory without repeating the bind-

ing procedure.

An exported ﬁ xed-wing model is stored on the memo-•

ry card under \\Models\mx-16 with the format “aMod-

elname.mdl” and a model helicopter with the format

“hModelname.mdl”. However, if you export a “name-

less” model, then you will ﬁ nd its data stored on the

memory card under “a-” and “hNoName.mdl”.

Some of the special characters used in certain mod-•

el names cannot be accepted due to speciﬁ c limita-

tions of the FAT or FAT32 ﬁ le system used by memo-

ry cards. During the copy process they are replaced

by a tilde (~) character.

If the memory card already contains a model ﬁ le of •

the same name, it will be overwritten without warning.

Import from SD

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the “Import from SD” sub-menu, then

brieﬂ y press the SET button.

select model

clear model

copy mod–>mod

export to SD

import from SD

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the model to be imported from the

SD memory card:

EXTRA

ALPINA

COBRA

BELL47G

import from SD-CARD:

11/03/10

11/03/11

11/03/12

When you do this, and brieﬂ y press the SET button of

the right-hand touch-key again, an “Import to model:”

window is displayed. Use the arrow buttons cd of the

left or right-hand touch-key to select the target memory,

conﬁ rm your choice with SET, or press ESC to interrupt

the process. An occupied memory can be overwritten:

ULTIMATE

GRAUBELE

STARLET

BELL47G

import to model :

05 ¿¿free¿¿

E08

–––

When you conﬁ rm the selected model memory by touch-

ing the SET button, this security query is displayed:

model

ULTIMATE

import ?

NO YES

03 ¿¿free¿¿

You can interrupt the process with NO; if you do this, you

are returned to the starting screen. However, if you use

the f button to select YES, and conﬁ rm your choice

by touching the SET button, then the selected model is

imported into the selected model memory.

Notes:

If the warning …•

SD-CARD

INSERT

… appears instead of a model selection, there is no

SD card in the card slot; see page 22.

When you import a model memory, the binding data •

is copied along with the model data, so that the re-

ceiving system associated with the original model

memory can also be operated using the SAME trans-

mitter and the copied memory without repeating the

binding procedure.

For your notes

56 Program description: base settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

Base settings

Basic model-speciﬁ c settings for ﬁ xed-wing model aircraft

Before you start programming speciﬁ c parameters,

some basic settings must be entered which apply only

to the currently active model memory. Select the “Basic

settings” (basic model settings) menu using the arrow

buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key, then touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:

mod.mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

base sett.

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

model name

mod name

stick mode

CH8 delay

motor on C1

yes

tail type normal

Touch the SET button of the right-hand touch-key to

move to the next screen page, where you can select

characters to assemble the model name. You can enter

up to nine characters to deﬁ ne a model name:

0123456789

PQRSTUVWXYZ

model name

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

GRAUB

Use the arrow buttons of the left-hand touch-key to se-

lect the desired character, then move to the next position

in the name by touching one of the arrow buttons ef

of the right-hand touch-key, or its central SET button.

Simultaneously pressing thecd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) inserts a space at that

point.

You can move to any character position within the input

ﬁ eld using the ef buttons of the right-hand touch-key.

Touching the central ESC button of the left-hand touch-

key returns you to the previous menu page.

The model name entered in this way appears in the

basic display, and also in the sub-menus of the “Model

memory” menu.

stick mode

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

full throttle

left rudder

right rudder

idle

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left aileron

right aileron

Motor Vollgas

idle

left rudder

right rudder

full throttle

idle

left aileron

right aileron

elev. down

elev. up

left rudder

right rudder

Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the

principal control functions of a ﬁ xed-wing model on the

two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are aileron,

elevator, rudder and throttle (or airbrakes). Which of

these options you select depends on your individual

preferences and ﬂ ying style.

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move to the “Stick mode” line. You will see

the Select ﬁ eld framed:

mod name

stick mode

CH8 delay

motor on C1

yes

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

Brieﬂ y press the SET button to highlight the current stick

mode (black background). Now use the arrow buttons

of the right-hand touch-key to select one of the options

1 to 4.

Simultaneously pressing the cd buttons or the ef

buttons of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) returns the

display to stick mode “1”.

Touching the SET button again disables the select ﬁ eld

once more, so that you can switch lines.

motor on C1

mod name

stick mode

CH8 delay

motor on C1

yes

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

When you select “motor on C1” using the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch-key, you will see the

corresponding input ﬁ eld framed. Touch the central SET

button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight the cur-

rent setting. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-hand

touch-key to switch between the four possible options:

“idle fr.”: The idle position of the throttle / airbrake

stick (C1) is forward, i. e. away from the pilot.

Program description: base settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

Depending on your choice in this menu, the Ch 1 trim •

acts “normally” (over the full control travel), or just

at the idle end of the range, i. e. only at the “back” or

“forward” end of the stick travel.

Please note the •Cut-off trim function, which is de-

scribed on page 40.

CH8 delay

Notes:

If you select “Idle forward / back” in the “Motor at C1” •

line, this menu line is suppressed.

This option is also only effective if you have acti-•

vated at least one ﬂ ight phase; see below under

“Phases”.

mod name

stick mode

CH8 delay

motor on C1

yes

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

If you select “no”, the transition delay for control channel

8 of about one second, which takes effect every time

you switch ﬂ ight phases, is switched off; selecting “yes”

switches it on.

When you select the “K8 delayed” line using the arrow

buttons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key, the cor-

responding input ﬁ eld is framed. Brieﬂ y press the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight the

current setting (black background). Now use the arrow

buttons of the right-hand touch-key to select one of the

two options.

The throttle warning message “Throttle too

high”, see page 28, and the option “cut off”

are activated. In the “Wing mixer” menu the

“Brake ¼ NN *” mixers and the option “CH8

delay” are disabled.

“idle re.”: The idle position of the throttle / airbrake

stick (C1) is back, i. e. towards the pilot.

The throttle warning message “Throttle too

high”, see page 28, and the – following – op-

tion “cut off” are activated. In the “Wing

mixer” menu the “Brake ¼ NN *” mixers

and the option “CH8 delay” are disabled.

“no”: The brake system is “retracted” in the for-

ward position of the throttle / brake stick. In

the “Wing mixer” menu the “Brake ¼ NN *”

mixers are activated.

The throttle warning message “Throttle too

high”, see page 28, and the option “cut off”

are disabled.

„no/inv“ The brake system is “retracted” in the back

position of the throttle / brake stick. In the

“Wing mixer” menu the “Brake ¼ NN *”

mixers are activated.

The throttle warning message “Throttle too

high”, see page 28, and the option “cut off”

are disabled.

Notes:

Please note that a glowplug engine or electric •

motor could burst into life accidentally if the re-

ceiving system is switched on when you are pro-

gramming the transmitter. To be on the safe side,

disconnect the fueltank or the ﬂ ight battery.

cut off

Note:

This menu line is suppressed if you choose “none” or

“none/inv” in the “Motor at Ch 1” line.

Depending on your selected setting for “Idle forward

/ rear” in the “motor on C1” line, you can select in this

menu line a “Motor OFF” position which can be called

up using a switch. The default settings are -100% for the

throttle servo position, and +150% for the transmitter

control position.

mod name

stick mode

motor on C1

idle re.

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

cut off –––

+150%–100%

STO

If you wish to change the default value of the throttle

servo’s “Motor OFF” position, brieﬂ y press the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight the

current setting. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand

touch-key to set a value at which the motor is reliably

“off”, but without stalling the throttle servo; a typical

value is -125%:

mod name

stick mode

motor on C1

idle re.

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

cut off –––

+150%

STO

–125%

The - high - default value in the centre column ensures

that the motor can be stopped over the maximum possi-

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

58 Program description: base settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

ble range of the throttle stick using the switch which has

yet to be assigned in the right-hand column.

However, if you want to set an individual threshold after

which it is possible to switch to the motor OFF position,

then move the throttle / collective pitch stick to your pre-

ferred position, and brieﬂ y press the central SET button

of the right-hand touch-key:

mod name

stick mode

motor on C1

idle re.

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

cut off –––

+100%

STO

–125%

Note:

You can obtain a switching threshold of more than

+100% by temporarily increasing the travel of servo 1

to more than 100% in the “Servo settings” menu, then

returning it to the original value after storing the switch-

ing threshold.

In the right-hand column you can now assign a switch

which can be used (in an emergency) to cut the motor.

We recommend one of the two self-centring momentary

buttons SW 1 or 9:

mod name

stick mode

motor on C1

idle re.

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

cut off +100%

STO

–125% 9

tail type

mod name

stick mode

motor on C1

idle re.

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

cut off +100%–125% 9

When you select “tail type” using the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch-key, you will see

the corresponding input ﬁ eld framed. Touch the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight the

current setting. Now use the arrow buttons of the right-

hand touch-key to select the option which matches your

model:

„normal“: This setting caters for all models in which

each of the functions elevator and rudder

is operated by one servo.

„V-tail“: The elevator and rudder functions are

operated by two control surfaces set in a

V-shape, each controlled by a separate

servo. The two-way coupling function for

the rudder and elevator control systems

is automatically carried out by the trans-

mitter software. If necessary, the ratio

of rudder travel to elevator travel can be

adjusted in the “Dual Rate” menu (page

82).

„Delt/FlW“: The mixed elevon (aileron and eleva-

tor) control system requires two or four

separate servos, one or two in each wing.

However, the elevator trim only affects

servos 2 + 3, even if you select “2ail2ﬂ ” -

see below.

„2elev sv“: This option is designed for model aircraft

with two elevator servos. When the eleva-

tor stick is moved, the servo connected

to receiver output 8 moves in parallel with

servo 3. The elevator trim lever affects

both servos.

Note regarding “2elev sv”:

In this mode a transmitter control which

is assigned to input 8 in the “Transmitter

control settings” menu is de-coupled

from servo “8”; this is for safety reasons.

Ailerons / Camber-changing ﬂ aps

stick mode

motor on C1

idle re.

tail type normal

cut off +100%–125% 9

aile/flap 1aile

When you select the “Aileron / Flap” line using the arrow

buttons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key, you will

see the corresponding input ﬁ eld framed. Touch the cen-

tral SET button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight

the current setting. Now use the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key to select one of the three options.

“1aile” Both ailerons are actuated by a single

servo.

“2aile” Each aileron is actuated by one servo.

“2ail2ﬂ ” Each aileron is actuated by a separate

servo; there are also one or two camber-

changing ﬂ ap servos.

The mixers and associated adjustment facilities which

appear in the “Wing mixers” menu (see section start-

ing on page 88) vary according to the data you enter

Program description: base settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

here. The software provides a maximum of twelve

ready-made mixers for up to two aileron servos and two

camber-changing ﬂ ap servos.

Note:

If your model is equipped with only one ﬂ ap servo, you

should still select “2ail2ﬂ ”, but leave the “AIL ¼ FL”

mixer in the “Wing mixer” menu, which is described on

page 91, at 0%. In contrast, all the other wing mixers

can be used in the usual way. The second ﬂ ap socket

which is now “vacant” must ON NO ACCOUNT be used

for any other purpose!

timer

Two timers are shown in the basic display: one stop-

watch and one ﬂ ight timer:

GRAUBELE

#01

0:00h

stop

flt

0:00

0.0V

6.1V HoTT

99%

You can assign a physical switch or a control switch to

these two timers in the right-hand column of the “timer”

line, indicated by the switch symbol at the bottom

edge of the screen.

motor on C1 idle re.

tail type normal

cut off +100%–125% 9

aile/flap 2aile

timer 0:00 –––

The assigned switch starts both timers, and also halts

the stopwatch.

The method of assigning a physical switch or a control

switch is described on page 39.

The ﬂ ight timer, and the saving of telemetry data on

a memory card ﬁ tted in the card slot (see page 22),

always starts simultaneously with the stopwatch, but

continues to run even when the stopwatch is halted

(switched off). It can only be stopped by touching the

central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key when the

stopwatch is already halted.

Once the timers are stopped, you can reset both timers

to their initial value by brieﬂ y pressing the cd or ef

buttons of the right-hand touch key (CLEAR).

Switching between “count-up” and “count-down”

Count-up timer (stopwatch function)

If you assign a switch and start the stopwatch with the

initial value of “0:00”, the timer runs up until the maxi-

mum of 180 minutes and 59 seconds, then re-starts at

0:00.

Count-down timer (alarm timer function)

You can select a starting time within the range 0 to 180

minutes in the left-hand minutes ﬁ eld, and a starting

time within the range 0 to 59 seconds in the right-hand

seconds ﬁ eld. Any combination of times can also be

selected.

Simultaneously touching the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any settings you

have made to “0” or “00”.

motor on C1 idle re.

tail type normal

cut off +100%–125% 9

aile/flap 2aile

timer 0:00 2

Procedure

Select the desired input ﬁ eld using the arrow buttons 1.

ef of the left or right-hand touch-key.

Touch 2. SET in the centre of the right-hand touch-key.

Select the required time in the highlighted minutes3.

and seconds ﬁ elds using the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key.

Touch the central 4. SET button to conclude the input

process.

Once you have switched back to the basic dis-5.

play by touching the central ESC button of the left-

hand touch-key the required number of times, touch

the cd or ef buttons of the right-hand touch-

key (CLEAR) simultaneously, with the stopwatch

stopped, to switch the stopwatch to the “Timer” func-

tion; see top right in the following illustration:

GRAUBELE

#01

0:00h

stop

flt

10:01

0:00

0.0V

6.1V HoTT

99%

When you operate the assigned switch, the stopwatch

now starts from the set initial value, counting down

(“Timer function”). When the set time has elapsed, the

60 Program description: base settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

timer does not stop, but continues to run so that you can

read off the time elapsed after reaching zero. To make

this clear, the over-run time is shown highlighted (black

background).

Sequence of sounds

30 sec. before zero: triple beep

single beep every two seconds

20 sec. before zero: double beep

single beep every two seconds

10 sec. before zero: single beep

single beep every second

5 sec. before zero: single beep every second at higher

rate

zero: longer beep; display switches to

inverse video

The “alarm timer” is reset by simultaneously touching

the cd or ef buttons of the right-hand touch-key

(CLEAR), once you have halted the timer.

Note:

A count-down timer is indicated in the basic display by

a ﬂ ashing colon (:) between the minutes ﬁ eld and the

seconds ﬁ eld.

Phase 2, Phase 3 and Phase 4

You will automatically be in the “normal” ﬂ ight phase 1

unless you have already assigned a switch to phases 2,

3 or 4.

Both the number and name of this ﬂ ight phase are ﬁ xed

permanently as “normal”, and cannot be changed. For

this reason the “normal” phase is simply concealed, i. e.

it is not displayed as phase 1.

10:01 2

phase 2

phase 3

phase 4

takeoff

landing

speed

–––

aile/flap 2aile

timer

It is also important to understand that the ﬂ ight phases

have their own inherent priorities which need to be ob-

served, particularly when assigning individual switches.

The underlying scheme can be described as follows:

If all assigned ﬂ ight phase switches are closed or •

open, the “normal” ﬂ ight phase is active.

If only one switch is closed, then the ﬂ ight phase as-•

signed to the currently closed switch is active.

If two switches are closed, then the ﬂ ight phase with •

the lower number is active.

For example, this would be phase 2, if one of the

switches assigned to phase 3 or 4 is also closed, or

phase 3, if the switches assigned to phases 3 and 4

are closed.

As a result you may wish to take the inherent phase •

priorities into account when assigning names to the

ﬂ ight phases; see below.

At the servo end the transition does not occur •

“abruptly”, but with a ﬁ xed transition period of about

one second.

Programming

When you select “phase 2”, “phase 3” or “phase 4” using

the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand touch-

key, the “Name” ﬁ eld for that ﬂ ight phase is already

framed.

If the default name does not seem appropriate, touch

the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and

the current setting is shown highlighted. Now use the

arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to select an

appropriate name from those available. Touch the SET

button to conclude the input process.

Now press the f button of the left or right-hand touch-

key to move to the right-hand column at the bottom of

the screen, indicated by the switch symbol , and

brieﬂ y touch the central SET button. You can now assign

a switch to the phase as described on page 39. We

recommend one of the two three-position switches SW

4/5 or SW 6/7, in each case starting from the centre

toggle position.

For more information on ﬂ ight phase programming

please refer to page 86, in the section entitled “Phase

trim”.

Receiver output

For maximum ﬂ exibility in terms of receiver socket

assignment, the mx-16 HoTT software provides the

means to swap over the servo outputs 1 to max. 8;

this is carried out on the second page of the “Receiver

output” sub-menu.

10:01 2

phase 2

phase 3

phase 4

takeoff

landing

speed –––

timer

receiv out

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to move to the next page of the display. Here you can

assign the “control channels” for servos 1 … 8 to any

receiver output you wish to use. However, please note

Program description: base settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

that the display in “Servo display” - which you can ac-

cess from virtually any menu position by simultaneously

touching the eand f buttons of the left-hand touch-

key - refers exclusively to the “control channels”, i. e. the

outputs are NOT swapped over.

output

S55

output

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the servo / output combination you

wish to change, then touch the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key. Now you can assign the desired

servo(s) to the selected output using the right-hand

arrow buttons, and conﬁ rm your choice with SET … or

alternatively touch the cd or ef buttons of the right-

hand touch-key (CLEAR) simultaneously to revert to the

default sequence.

Please note that any subsequent changes to servo

settings, such as servo travel, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers

etc., must be carried out according to the original

(default) receiver socket sequence.

Note:

It is also possible to distribute the control functions

amongst as many receivers as you wish, using the

channel-mapping function in the mx-16 HoTT’s inte-

gral Telemetry menu, or even to assign the same control

function to multiple receiver outputs. For example, you

might wish to actuate each aileron with two servos in-

stead of just one, etc. However, we strongly recommend

that you use only one of the two options, as a combina-

tion will soon lead to confusion.

rx bind

Graupner HoTT receivers have to be “instructed” to

communicate exclusively with a particular model (i. e.

model memory) of a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This

process is known as “binding”, and is only necessary

once for each new combination of receiver and model.

Important note:

When carrying out the binding procedure, please

ensure that the transmitter aerial is always an

adequate distance from the receiver aerials: keeping

the aerials about 1 m apart is safe in this respect.

Otherwise you risk a failed connection to the down-

link channel, and consequent malfunctions.

“Binding” multiple receivers to one model

If necessary, it is possible to bind more than one re-

ceiver to a single model. This is accomplished by initially

binding the receivers individually, as described in the

next section. When operating the system, please note

that only the receiver which was bound last will

establish a telemetry link to the transmitter. For this

reason all telemetry sensors installed in the model must

be connected to this receiver, since only the last bound

receiver is able to transmit their data via the down-link

channel. The second, and all other receivers, run in

parallel to the receiver last bound to the transmitter, but

completely independently of it; they operate in Slave

mode with the down-link channel switched off.

“Binding” transmitter and receiver

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move to the “rx bind” line:

phase 2

phase 3

phase 4

takeoff

landing

speed –––

receiv out

rx bind –––

If you have not already done so, switch on the power

supply to your receiver now: the red LED on the receiver

flashes.

Press and hold the SET button on the receiver until,

after about three seconds, the red-flashing LED starts to

flash red / green; this will last for a further three seconds.

You can now release the SET button on the receiver.

The receiver is in Bind mode as long as the LED flashes

red / green.

Within this period of about three seconds briefly touch

the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to

initiate the binding process between a receiver and

the current model memory. At the same time the word

“BINDING” starts flashing on the screen in the frame of

the “Bound receiver” line, instead of the three “---”:

phase 2

phase 3

phase 4

takeoff

landing

speed –––

receiv out

rx bind BINDING

The receiver LED is now ﬂ ashing red again, and if it

goes out without about ten seconds, and instead glows

a constant green, then the binding process has been

completed successfully. Your model / receiver combina-

tion is now ready for use. In parallel with this the screen

62 Program description: base settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

displays the code number for the receiver now “bound”

to this model memory. For example:

phase 2

phase 3

phase 4

takeoff

landing

speed –––

receiv out

rx bind R08

If, in contrast, the red LED on the receiver ﬂ ashes

for longer than about ten seconds, then the binding

process has failed. In parallel with this the screen will

display three “---” once more. If this should occur, alter

the relative position of the aerials, and repeat the whole

procedure.

range test

The integral range-check reduces the transmitter’s out-

put power in such a way that you can test the system’s

operation at a distance of up to about ﬁ fty metres.

Carry out the range-check of the Graupner HoTT

system in accordance with the following instructions. We

recommend that you ask a friend to help with range-

checking.

Install the receiver in the model as required, prefer-1.

ably after completing the binding process with the

transmitter.

Switch the radio control system on and wait until the 2.

green LED on the receiver glows. Now you can ob-

serve the servo movements.

Place the model on a ﬂ at surface (paving, close-mown 3.

grass or earth), with the receiver aerials at least

15 cm above the ground. This means that you may

have to place the model on a raised object for the pe-

riod of the check.

Hold the transmitter at hip-height, and away from your 4.

body. However, do not point the aerial straight at the

model; instead rotate and / or angle the tip of the aeri-

al so that it is vertical while you carry out the check.

If you have not already done so, use the arrow but-5.

tons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key to move

to the “Test range” line, and initiate range-check mode

by brieﬂ y pressing the central SET button of the right-

hand touch-key:

phase 3

phase 4 landing

speed –––

receiv out

rx bind R08

range test 99sec

When you start the range-check, the transmitter’s

output power is signiﬁ cantly reduced, and the blue

LED on the aerial base starts to ﬂ ash. At the same

time the time display on the transmitter screen starts

counting down, and a double beep sounds every ﬁ ve

seconds.

From ﬁ ve seconds before the end of the range-check

you will hear a triple beep every second. When the

99 seconds of the range-check period have elapsed,

the transmitter switches back to full power, and the

blue LED glows constantly once more.

Within this period walk away from the model, moving 6.

the sticks all the while. If at any point within a distance

of about ﬁ fty metres you notice a break in the connec-

tion, attempt to reproduce it.

If the model is ﬁ tted with a motor, switch it on in order 7.

to check the system’s interference rejection.

Walk further away from the model until you no longer 8.

have full control over it.

At this point wait until the test period has elapsed, with 9.

the model still switched on and ready for use. When

the range-check period is over, the model should re-

spond again to control commands. It this is not 100%

the case, do not use the system. Contact your nearest

Service Centre of Graupner GmbH & Co. KG.

Carry out the range-check before every ﬂ ight, and 10.

simulate all the servo movements which are likely to

occur in a typical ﬂ ight. To ensure safe operation of

the model, the range must always be at least ﬁ fty me-

tres on the ground.

Caution:

Never initiate a range-check when you are actually

operating a model!

RF transmit

In this menu line you can manually switch the transmit-

ter’s RF transmission on and off again for a speciﬁ c

model for the current period that the transmitter is

switched on. For example, you might wish to do this to

save power when demonstrating the programming of a

model. If you switch the transmitter off with the RF

module switched off, next time you switch the trans-

mitter on it will be switched back on again.

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move to the “RF module” line, and touch

the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to

activate the value window:

Program description: base settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

phase 4 landing 6

receiv out

rx bind R08

range test 99sec

RF transmit OFF

Now you can use the right-hand arrow buttons to switch

between OFF and ON. Touch the central SET button of

the right-hand touch-key again to conclude the input.

64 Program description: base settings - model helicopter

Base settings

Basic model-speciﬁ c settings for model helicopters

Before you start programming speciﬁ c parameters,

some basic settings must be entered which apply only

to the currently active model memory. Select the “Basic

settings” (Basic model settings) menu using the arrow

buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key, and press the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:

mod.mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

free mixer

contr set.

heli mixer

swashp. mix

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

base sett.

Model name

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

1 servo

cut off –––

+150%–100%

Touch the SET button of the right-hand touch-key to

move to the next screen page, where you can select

characters to assemble the model name. You can enter

up to nine characters to deﬁ ne a model name:

0123456789

model name

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

STAR

PQRSTUVWXYZ

Use the arrow buttons of the left-hand touch-key to

select the desired character. Touch one of the arrow but-

tons ef of the right-hand touch button, or its central

SET button, to move to the next position in the name, at

which point you can again select a character. Simultane-

ously touching the cd or ef buttons of the right-

hand touch-key (CLEAR) inserts a space at that point.

You can move to any character position within the input

ﬁ eld using the ef buttons of the right-hand touch-key.

You can return to the previous menu page by brieﬂ y

pressing the central ESC button of the left-hand touch-

key.

The model name entered in this way appears in the

basic display, and also in the sub-menus of the “Model

memory” menu point.

Stick mode

Basically there are four possible ways of arranging the

principal control functions of a model helicopter on

the two dual-axis sticks: the primary functions are roll,

pitch-axis, tail rotor and throttle / collective pitch. Which

of these options you select depends on your individual

preferences and ﬂ ying style:

“MODE 2” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 3” (Throttle at right stick) “MODE 4” (Throttle at left stick)

“MODE 1” (Throttle at right stick)

pitch axis

tail rotor

pitch axis

tail rotor

throttle

roll

throttle

tail rotor

throttle throttle

pitch axis

roll

pitch axis

roll

Motor/Pitch

throttle

tail rotor

throttle

roll

pitch axis

tail rotor

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the “Stick mode” line; the select ﬁ eld

is now framed:

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

1 servo

cut off –––

+150%–100%

STARLET

Brieﬂ y press the SET button: the current stick mode

appears highlighted. Now use the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key to choose one of the options 1 to 4.

By simultaneously touching the cd or ef buttons of

the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) the display reverts to

stick mode “1”.

A further brief press on the SET button disables the

select ﬁ eld again, so that you can change to a different

line.

Swashplate type

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

1 servo

cut off –––

+150%–100%

STARLET

You will require a particular program variant to suit the

number of servos which operate the collective pitch

function.

Select “Swashplate” with the arrow buttons cd of

the left or right-hand touch-key, and the select ﬁ eld is

framed. Touch the SET button: the current number of

collective pitch servos is highlighted on the screen. You

can now determine the required variant using the arrow

Program description: base settings - model helicopter

buttons of the right-hand touch-key:

“1 servo”: The swashplate is tilted by one roll servo

and one pitch-axis servo. Collective pitch

is controlled by one separate servo.

The “Swashplate mixer” menu point is

suppressed in the multi-function menu if

you select “1 servo” as the swashplate

type. This is because model helicopters

with only one collective pitch servo are

controlled WITHOUT transmitter mixers

for the swashplate functions collective

pitch, pitch-axis and roll.

“2 servo”: The swashplate is moved axially by two

roll servos for collective pitch control;

pitch-axis control is de-coupled by a

mechanical compensating rocker.

“3sv(2rol)”: A symmetrical three-point swashplate

linkage using three linkage points ar-

ranged equally at 120°, actuated by one

pitch-axis servo (front or rear) and two

roll servos (left and right). For collective

pitch control all three servos move the

swashplate axially.

“3sv(140)”: Asymmetrical three-point swashplate link-

age using three linkage points, connected

to one pitch servo (rear) and two roll

servos (front left and right). For collective

pitch control all three servos move the

swashplate axially.

“3sv(2nic)”: A symmetrical three-point linkage as

above, but rotated through 90°, i. e. one

roll servo on one side, and two pitch-axis

servos front and rear.

“4sv(90)”: Four-point swashplate linkage using two

roll and two pitch-axis servos.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the swashplate

type to “1 servo”.

Swashplate type: 1 servo

Swashplate type: 2 servos

Swashplate type: 3 servos (2 roll)

Swashplate type: 3 servos (140°)

Swashplate type: 3 servos (pitch-axis)

Swashplate type: 4 servos (90°), 2 pitch / 2 roll

Note:

With the exception of the “1 servo” pre-set, the swash-

plate mixer ratios are set in the “Swashplate mixers”

menu; see page 112.

Cut off

As part of the auto-rotation set-up procedure of the

mx-16 HoTT transmitter’s Helicopter program there is

the option to deﬁ ne a “motor OFF” position for the throt-

tle servo or speed controller for use in an emergency.

However, if you set an idle position in the “Throttle” line

instead of an emergency OFF position - for example, in

order to avoid having to re-start the engine after every

practice auto-rotation landing - then this option is not

available. In this case we recommend that you use the

“Motor stop” option described below as the emergency

OFF solution. Depending on the option (“forward / back”)

you have selected in the “Collective pitch minimum”

line, you can deﬁ ne a “Motor OFF” position in this menu

line which can be called up by operating a switch. The

66 Program description: base settings - model helicopter

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off –––

STARLET

STO

–125% +100%

Note:

You can obtain a switching threshold of more than

+100% by temporarily increasing the travel of servo 1

to more than 100% in the “Servo settings” menu, then

returning it to the original value after storing the switch-

ing threshold.

In the right-hand column you can now assign a switch

which can be used (in an emergency) to cut the motor.

We recommend one of the two self-centring momentary

buttons SW 1 or 9:

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off

STARLET

STO

–125% +100% 1

Direction of rotation of main rotor

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off

STARLET

–125% +100% 1

In the “Rotor direction” line you enter the direction of

rotation of the main rotor using the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key, after brieﬂ y pressing the central

SET button:

“right”: the main rotor spins clockwise as viewed from

above.

“left”: the main rotor spins anti-clockwise as viewed

from above.

Simultaneously touching the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) switches to “right”.

right-hand

rotation

left-hand

rotation

The program requires this information in order to set up

the mixers to work in the correct “sense”; this applies to

the mixers which compensate for rotor torque and motor

power. You will ﬁ nd these in the “Helicopter mixer”

menu:

Pitch

Ch1 ¼ throttle

Ch1 ¼ tail rotor

default settings are -100% for the “Motor OFF” position

of the throttle servo and +150% for the throttle curve:

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off –––

+150%–100%

STARLET

STO

If you wish to change the default value of the throttle

servo’s “Motor OFF” position, brieﬂ y press the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key: the current

setting is highlighted. Now use the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key to set a value at which the motor is

reliably “off”, but without stalling the servo. For example:

-125%:

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off –––

+150%

STARLET

STO

–125%

The - high - default value in the centre column ensures

that the motor can be stopped over the maximum pos-

sible range of the throttle curve using the switch which

has yet to be assigned in the right-hand column.

However, if you want to set an individual threshold after

which it is possible to switch to the motor OFF position,

then move the throttle / collective pitch stick to the posi-

tion you desire, and brieﬂ y press the central SET button

of the right-hand touch-key:

Program description: base settings - model helicopter

Collective pitch min.

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off –125% +100% 1

pitch min rear

In the “Collective pitch min.” line you can set up the

direction of operation of the throttle / collective pitch

stick to suit your preference. This setting is crucial to the

correct operation of all the other options in the helicopter

program which affect the throttle and collective pitch

functions, i. e. the throttle curve, idle trim, tail rotor mixer

etc.

Brieﬂ y touch the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key, and the direction of operation of the throttle /

collective pitch stick is highlighted. Now you can select

the required variant using the arrow buttons of the right-

hand touch-key:

Pitch

The meaning is as follows:

“front”: minimum collective pitch when the collective

pitch stick (Ch 1) is “forward” (away from you);

“rear”: minimum collective pitch when the collective

pitch stick (Ch 1) is “back” (towards you).

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of

the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) returns the collective

pitch min. position to “rear”.

Note:

The Ch 1 trim always affects the throttle servo only.•

By default what is known as the “throttle limiter” is set •

(see page 79); this limits the travel of the throttle ser-

vo in the direction of maximum throttle, acting sepa-

rately from the collective pitch servos. This point can

be programmed using the “Lim” input in the “Trans-

mitter control settings” menu.

Timers

Two timers are shown in the basic display: one stop-

watch and one ﬂ ight timer.

STARLET

#02

0:00h

stop

flt

0:00

0.0V

6.1V HoTT

99%

A physical switch or a control switch - e. g. the control

switch G3 located on the throttle limiter - can be as-

signed to these two timers in the “Timers” line …

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off –125% +100% 1

pitch min rear

timer 0:00 –––

… using the switch symbol at the bottom right-hand

side of the screen. The assigned switch starts both tim-

ers, and also halts the stopwatch.

The method of assigning a physical switch or a control

switch is described on page 39.

The ﬂ ight timer, and the saving of telemetry data on a

memory card inserted in the card slot (see page 22)

always starts simultaneously with the stopwatch, but

continues to run even when the stopwatch is halted

(switched off). It can only be stopped by touching the

central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key with the

stopwatch halted.

Once stopped, both timers can be reset to the initial

value by simultaneously touching the cd buttons of

the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR).

Switching between “count-up” and “count-down”

Count-up timer (stopwatch function)

If you assign a switch and start the stopwatch with the

initial value of “0:00”, the timer runs up until the maxi-

mum of 180 minutes and 59 seconds, then re-starts at

0:00.

Count-down timer (timer function)

In the left-hand minutes ﬁ eld you can select a starting

time within the range 0 to 180 minutes; in the right-hand

seconds ﬁ eld the range is 0 to 59 seconds. Any combi-

nation of times can also be selected.

Simultaneously pressing the cd buttons of the right-

hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any settings you have

entered to “0” or “00”.

68 Program description: base settings - model helicopter

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off –125% +100% 1

pitch min rear

timer 10:01 G3

Procedure

Select the desired input ﬁ eld using the arrow buttons 1.

ef of the left or right-hand touch-key.

Touch 2. SET in the centre of the right-hand touch-key.

Select the required time in the highlighted minutes3.

and seconds ﬁ elds using the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key.

Touch the central 4. SET button to conclude the input

process.

Switch back to the basic display by repeatedly touch-5.

ing the central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key.

With the stopwatch halted, press the cd buttons of

the right-hand touch-key simultaneously (CLEAR) to

switch the stopwatch to the “Timer” function; see top

right in the next illustration:

STARLET

#02

0:00h

stop

flt

10:01

0:00

0.0V

6.1V HoTT

99%

If you now operate the assigned switch, the stopwatch

starts from the set initial value, counting down (“Timer

function”). When the set time has elapsed, the timer

does not stop, but continues to run to allow you to read

off the time elapsed after reaching zero. To make this

clear, the over-run time is shown highlighted (black

background).

Sequence of sounds

30 sec. before zero: triple beep

single beep every two seconds

20 sec. before zero: double beep

single beep every two seconds

10 sec. before zero: single beep

single beep every second

5 sec. before zero: single beep every second at higher

rate

zero: longer beep; display switches to

inverse video

The “alarm timer” is reset by simultaneously pressing

the cd or ef buttons of the right-hand touch-key

(CLEAR) after you have halted the timer.

Note:

A count-down timer is indicated in the basic display by

a ﬂ ashing colon (:) between the minutes ﬁ eld and the

seconds ﬁ eld.

Phase 2 / Phase 3

You will automatically be in the “normal” ﬂ ight phase 1

unless you have already assigned a switch to phases 2

or 3.

Both the number and name of this ﬂ ight phase are ﬁ xed

permanently as “normal”, and cannot be changed. For

this reason the “normal” phase is simply concealed, i. e.

it is not displayed as phase 1.

10:01 G3

phase 2

phase 3

hover

speed

–––

rotor direct right

pitch min rear

timer

It is also important to understand that the ﬂ ight phases

have their own inherent priorities which need to be ob-

served, particularly when assigning individual switches.

The underlying scheme can be described as follows:

If all assigned ﬂ ight phase switches are closed or •

open, the “normal” ﬂ ight phase is active.

If only one switch is closed, then the ﬂ ight phase as-•

signed to the currently closed switch is active.

If two switches are closed, then the ﬂ ight phase with •

the lower number is active.

For example, this would be phase 2 if the switches

assigned to phase 2 and 3 are closed.

The “auto-rotation phase” ALWAYS has precedence •

over all other ﬂ ight phases, regardless of the priori-

ties outlined above. When the auto-rotation phase

is selected, the switch is always made WITHOUT

DELAY.

With this in mind, you may wish to take the inherent •

phase priorities into account when assigning names

to the ﬂ ight phases; see below.

At the servo end the transition does not occur •

“abruptly”, but with a ﬁ xed transition period of about

one second.

Programming

When you select “Phase 2” or “Phase 3” using the arrow

buttons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key, the

Program description: base settings - model helicopter

“Name” ﬁ eld for that ﬂ ight phase is already framed.

If the default name does not seem appropriate, touch

the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and

the current setting is shown highlighted. Now use the

arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to select an

appropriate name from those available. Touch the SET

button to conclude the input process.

Now press the f button of the left or right-hand touch-

key to move to the right-hand column at the bottom of

the screen, indicated by the switch symbol , and

brieﬂ y touch the central SET button. You can now assign

a switch to the phase as described on page 39. We

recommend one of the two three-position switches SW

4/5 or SW 6/7, in each case starting from the centre

toggle position.

For more information on ﬂ ight phase programming

please refer to page 94, in the section entitled “Flight

phase speciﬁ c settings for collective pitch, throttle and

tail rotor”.

Auto-rotation

10:01 G3

phase 2

phase 3

hover

speed

–––

pitch min rear

timer

autorotat.

The name “Auto-rotation” is permanently assigned to

Phase 4, and CANNOT be altered. The only available

option is to assign a switch to it using the switch symbol

at the right of the screen.

For more information on programming ﬂ ight phases

please refer to the “Helicopter mixers” section starting

servo(s) to the selected output using the right-hand

arrow buttons, and conﬁ rm your choice with SET … or

alternatively touch the cd or ef buttons of the right-

hand touch-key (CLEAR) simultaneously to revert to the

default sequence.

Please note that any subsequent changes to servo

settings, such as servo travel, Dual Rate / Expo, mixers

etc., must be carried out according to the original

(default) receiver socket sequence.

Typical application:

In the helicopter program of the mx-16 HoTT the

outputs for one collective pitch servo and the throttle

servo have been interchanged compared to all earlier

GRAUPNER/JR mc-systems. The throttle servo is now

assigned to receiver output “6” and the collective pitch

servo to output “1”. However, you may wish to retain the

earlier conﬁ guration.

output

S55

output

Note:

It is also possible to distribute the control functions

amongst as many receivers as you wish, using the

channel-mapping function in the mx-16 HoTT’s

integral Telemetry menu, or even to assign the same

control function to multiple receiver outputs. However,

we strongly recommend that you use only one of the two

options, as a combination will soon lead to confusion.

on page 94.

Receiver output

For maximum ﬂ exibility in terms of receiver socket

assignment, the mx-16 HoTT software provides the

means to swap over the servo outputs 1 to max. 8;

this is carried out on the second page of the “Receiver

output” sub-menu.

10:01 G3

phase 2

phase 3

hover

speed

timer

autorotat. 2

receiv out

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to move to the next page of the display. Here you can

assign the “control channels” for servos 1 … 8 to any

receiver output you wish to use. However, please note

that the display in “Servo display” - which you can ac-

cess from virtually any menu position by simultaneously

touching the e and f buttons of the left-hand touch-

key - refers exclusively to the “control channels”, i. e. the

outputs are NOT swapped over.

motor on C1 idle re.

tail type normal

cut off +100%–125% 9

aile/flap 2aile

timer 0:00 2

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the servo / output combination you

wish to change, then touch the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key. Now you can assign the desired

70 Program description: base settings - model helicopter

rx bind (Bound receiver)

Graupner HoTT receivers have to be “instructed” to

communicate exclusively with a particular model (i. e.

model memory) of a Graupner HoTT transmitter. This

process is known as “binding”, and is only necessary

once for each new combination of receiver and model.

Important note:

When carrying out the binding procedure, please

ensure that the transmitter aerial is always an

adequate distance from the receiver aerials: keeping

the aerials about 1 m apart is safe in this respect.

Otherwise you risk a failed connection to the down-

link channel, and consequent malfunctions.

“Binding” multiple receivers to one model

If necessary, it is possible to bind more than one re-

ceiver to a single model. This is accomplished by initially

binding the receivers individually, as described in the

next section.

When operating the system, please note that only

the receiver which was bound last will establish a

telemetry link to the transmitter. For this reason all te-

lemetry sensors installed in the model must be connect-

ed to this receiver, since only the last bound receiver

is able to transmit their data via the down-link channel.

The second, and all other receivers, run in parallel to

the receiver last bound to the transmitter, but completely

independently of it; they operate in Slave mode with the

down-link channel switched off.

“Binding” transmitter and receiver

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move to the “rx bind” line:

phase 2

phase 3

hover

speed

autorotat. 2

receiv out

rx bind –––

If you have not already done so, switch on the power

supply to your receiver now: the red LED on the receiver

ﬂ ashes.

Press and hold the SET button on the receiver until,

after about three seconds, the red-ﬂ ashing LED starts to

ﬂ ash red / green; this will last for a further three seconds.

You can now release the SET button on the receiver.

The receiver is in Bind mode as long as the LED ﬂ ashes

red / green.

Brieﬂ y touch the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key within this period of about three seconds:

this initiate the binding process between a receiver and

the current model memory. At the same time the word

“BINDING” starts ﬂ ashing in the frame of the “rx bind”

line on the screen, instead of the three “---”:

phase 2

phase 3

hover

speed

autorotat. 2

receiv out

rx bind BINDING

The receiver LED is now ﬂ ashing red again, and if it

goes out within about ten seconds, and instead glows

a constant green, then the binding process has been

completed successfully. Your model / receiver combina-

tion is now ready for use. In parallel with this the screen

displays the code number for the receiver now “bound”

to this model memory. For example:

phase 2

phase 3

hover

speed

autorotat. 2

receiv out

rx bind R08

If, in contrast, the red LED on the receiver ﬂ ashes

for longer than about ten seconds, then the binding

process has failed. In parallel with this the screen will

display three “---” once more. If this should occur, alter

the relative position of the aerials and repeat the whole

procedure.

Range test

The integral range-check reduces the transmitter’s output

power in such a way that you can test the system’s

operation at a distance of up to about ﬁ fty metres.

Carry out the range-check of the Graupner HoTT system

in accordance with the following instructions. We recom-

mend that you ask a friend to help with range-checking.

Install the receiver in the model as required, prefer-1.

ably after completing the binding process with the

transmitter.

Switch the radio control system on and wait until the 2.

green LED on the receiver glows. Now you can ob-

serve the servo movements.

Place the model on a ﬂ at surface (paving, close-mown 3.

grass or earth), with the receiver aerials at least 15

cm above the ground. This means that you may have

to place the model on a raised object for the period of

the check.

Program description: base settings - model helicopter

Hold the transmitter at hip-height, and away from your 4.

body. Do not point the aerial straight at the model; in-

stead rotate and / or angle the aerial tip so that it is

vertical while you carry out the check.

If you have not already done so, use the arrow but-5.

tons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key to move

to the “Test range” line, and initiate range-check

mode by brieﬂ y pressing the central SET button of

the right-hand touch-key:

phase 3 speed 4

autorotat. 2

receiv out

rx bind R08

range test 99sec

When you start the range-check, the transmitter’s

output power is signiﬁ cantly reduced, and the blue

LED on the aerial base starts to ﬂ ash. At this point

the time display on the transmitter screen starts

counting down, and a double beep sounds every ﬁ ve

seconds.

From ﬁ ve seconds before the end of the range-check

you will hear a triple beep every second. When the

99 seconds of the range-check period have elapsed,

the transmitter switches back to full power, and the

blue LED glows constantly once more.

Within this period walk away from the model, moving 6.

the sticks all the while. If at any point within a distance

of about ﬁ fty metres you notice a break in the connec-

tion, attempt to reproduce it.

If the model is ﬁ tted with a motor, switch it on in order 7.

to check the system’s interference rejection.

Walk further away from the model until you no longer 8.

have full control over it.

At this point wait until the test period has elapsed, 9.

with the model still switched on and ready for use.

When the range-check period is over, the model

should respond again to control commands. It this is

not 100% the case, do not use the system. Contact

your nearest Graupner Service Centre.

Carry out a range-check before every ﬂ ight, and sim-10.

ulate all the servo movements which are likely to oc-

cur in a typical ﬂ ight. To ensure safe operation of the

model, the range must always be at least ﬁ fty metres

on the ground.

Caution:

Never initiate a range-check when you are actually

operating a model!

RF transmit

In this menu line you can manually switch the transmit-

ter’s RF transmission on and off again for a speciﬁ c

model for the period that the transmitter is currently

switched on. For example, you might wish to do this to

save power when demonstrating the programming of a

model. If you switch the transmitter off with the RF

module switched off, next time you switch the trans-

mitter on it will be switched back on again.

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move to the “RF transmit” line, and touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to activate

the value window:

autorotat. 2

receiv out

rx bind R08

range test 99sec

RF transmit ON

Now you can use the right-hand arrow buttons to switch

between OFF and ON. Touch the central SET button of

the right-hand touch-key again to conclude the input.

72 Program description: servo settings

Column 3 “Centre”

The facility to offset the servo travel centre is intended

for adjusting servos whose centre setting is not standard

(servo centre point at 1.5 ms or 1500 μs), and also for

minor adjustments, e. g. when ﬁ ne-tuning the neutral

position of the model’s control surfaces.

The neutral position can be shifted over the range

-125% to +125% of normal servo travel, within the

maximum servo travel of +/- 150%, regardless of the

trim lever position and any mixers you have set up. The

setting affects the associated servo directly, independ-

ently of all other trim and mixer settings.

However, please note that an extreme shift of the servo’s

neutral point may result in servo travel to one side of

neutral only, as total servo travel is limited to +/- 150%

for both electronic and mechanical reasons.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in

the highlighted input ﬁ eld to “0%”.

connected, assuming that these have not been swapped

over. This means that changing the stick mode does not

affect the numbering of the servos.

Column 2 “Rev.”

The direction of servo rotation can be adjusted to suit

the actual installation in your model. This means that

you don’t need to concern yourself with servo directions

when installing the mechanical linkages in the model,

as you can reverse them as and when necessary. The

direction of rotation is indicated by the symbols “=>” and

“<=”. Be sure to set the direction of servo rotation before

you make adjustments to the remaining options!

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the direction

of rotation to “=>”.

normal

reversed

normal

reversed

rev cent +

trav

100% 100%

In this menu you can adjust parameters which only af-

fect the servo connected to a particular receiver output,

namely the direction of servo rotation, neutral point and

servo travel. Always start with the servo setting in the

left-hand column.v

Basic procedure:

Use the arrow buttons 1. cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the relevant servo (1 to 8).

If necessary, use the arrow buttons 2. ef of the left

or right-hand touch-key to select the desired column,

and move the associated transmitter control from its

centre position if you wish to deﬁ ne an asymmetri-

cal setting.

Touch the central 3. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key, and the corresponding input ﬁ eld is highlighted

(black background).

Set the appropriate value using the arrow buttons of 4.

the right-hand touch-key.

Touch the central 5. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to conclude the input process.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons 6. cd or

ef of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any

settings you have entered to the default value.

Important:

The numbers in the servo designations refer to the

receiver output socket to which a particular servo(s) is

Servo settings

Servo direction, centre, travel

Program description: servo settings

Column 4 “- Servo travel +”

In this column you can adjust servo travel symmetrically

or asymmetrically (different each side of neutral). The

adjustment range is 0 … 150% of normal servo travel.

The reference point for the set values is the setting in

the “Centre” column.

To set symmetrical travel, i. e. to adjust travel equally on

both sides of neutral, move the associated transmitter

control (stick, proportional rotary knob or switch) to a

position in which the marking frame encloses both sides

of the travel setting.

Note:

You may need to assign a transmitter control to a servo

which is connected to one of the control channels 5

… 8; this is accomplished in the “Transmitter control

settings” menu; see next page.

To set up asymmetrical travel, move the associated

transmitter control (stick, rotary proportional knob or

switch) to the side to be adjusted, so that the marking

frame only encloses the value you wish to change.

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to activate value adjustment; the value ﬁ eld is now

highlighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand

touch-key to change the values. A further brief press

on the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

concludes the input process.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the param-

eter in the highlighted input ﬁ eld to 100%.

Important:

In contrast to the “Transmitter control settings” menu,

this setting affects the servo directly, regardless of how

the control signal for this servo is generated, i. e. either

The graph alongside

shows an example of

asymmetrical servo

travel, with a setting of

-50% and +150%. Transmitter control travel

Servo travel

directly by a stick channel, or by means of any type of

mixer function.

74 Program description: transmitter control settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

Transmitter control settings

Basic procedures for assigning transmitter controls and switches

trv

+100% +100%

free

I8 +100% +100%

free

In addition to the two dual-axis stick units for the control

functions 1 to 4, the mx-16 HoTT is ﬁ tted as standard

with a range of supplementary controls:

Two three-position switches: SW 4/5 or CTRL 9 and •

SW 6/7 or CTRL 10. These are assigned in this menu

as “CTRL 9” and “CTR 10” respectively.

Three rotary proportional controls: CTRL 6, 7 and •

8. These are included in the menu as “CTRL 6”,

“CTRL 7” and “CTRL 8”.

Three two-position switches: SW 2, 3 and 8. These •

are indicated in the menu by “2”, “3” and “8” plus a

switch symbol, which indicates the direction of opera-

tion of the switch.

Two momentary switches: SW 1 and SW 9. These •

are indicated by “1” and “9” plus a switch symbol and

direction indicator, as mentioned above.

The two dual-axis stick units directly affect the servos

connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 (assuming that you

have set up a newly initialised model memory with the

model type “Fixed-wing model”). In contrast, the “sup-

plementary” transmitter controls listed above are inactive

when the transmitter is in its default state (as delivered).

As already mentioned on page 20, this means that the

transmitter in its basic form only controls servos con-

nected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 using the primary

sticks - even when you have initialised a new model

memory with the model type “Fixed-wing model” and

“bound” it to the receiver you intend to install. Any servos

connected to receiver sockets 5 … 8 simply stay at their

centre point when you operate the associated transmit-

ter controls.

This may seem rather inconvenient at ﬁ rst sight, but

it is the only way to ensure that you can select any of

the “supplementary” transmitter controls for any task

you like, and that you are not required deliberately to

“program away” the transmitter controls which are not

required for a particular model.

Any superﬂ uous transmitter control will have an

effect on your model if you operate it by mistake -

unless it is inactive, i. e. unless no function is assi-

gned to it.

That is why you can select these “supplementary” trans-

mitter controls with complete freedom in the “Transmitter

control settings” menu and assign them to any function

input (see page 38) you like, as this method ensures

that the transmitter meets your own requirements

exactly. This also means that each of these transmitter

controls can be assigned to several functions simulta-

neously. For example, the same toggle switch SW X,

which you assign to an input in this menu, can also be

assigned as the On / Off switch controlling the “Timers”

in the “Basic settings” menu.

The basic procedure:

Select the appropriate input I5 … I8 using the arrow 1.

buttons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key.

If necessary, use the arrow buttons 2. ef of the left or

right-hand touch-key to switch to the desired column.

Touch the central 3. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key, and the corresponding input ﬁ eld is highlighted.

Operate the transmitter control you wish to use, and 4.

set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key.

Touch the central 5. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to conclude the input process.

Simultaneously pressing the 6. cd or ef buttons

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any set-

tings you have entered to the appropriate default val-

ue.

Column 2 “Assigning transmitter controls and

switches”

Select one of the function inputs 5 to 8 using the cd

buttons of the right-hand touch-key.

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to activate the assignment facility.

trv

free

I8 free

+100% +100%

operate desired

switch or control

Now move the appropriate transmitter control (CTRL

6 to 10), or operate the selected switch (SW 1 to 3, 8

or 9). Note that the rotary proportional controls are not

detected until they have moved a few “ratchet clicks”, i. e.

they need to be operated for slightly longer. If the travel

is not sufﬁ cient for the transmitter to detect it, move the

control in the opposite direction.

If you assign one of the two-position switches, then this

control channel works like an On / Off switch. It is then

possible to switch to and fro between two end-point

values using this simple switch, e. g. motor ON / OFF.

The three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, which you

Program description: transmitter control settings - ﬁ xed-wing model

will ﬁ nd in the “Transmitter control settings” menu as

“Control 9” and “Control 10”, provide a centre position in

addition to the two end-points.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) with the switch assign-

ment activated - see illustration above - resets the input

to “free”.

Tips:

When assigning the switches please take care to set •

them to the appropriate direction of travel, and en-

sure that all inputs not required are left at or set to

“free”, to eliminate the possibility of errors if unused

transmitter controls are operated accidentally.

You can alter the effective end-points of an assigned •

switch by adjusting servo travel, as described in the

next section.

The screen now displays either the transmitter control

number or the switch number, followed by a switch sym-

bol which indicates the direction of operation, e. g.:

trv

ctrl 7

free

3+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

Column 3 “-Travel+”

In this column the transmitter control can be adjusted

symmetrically or asymmetrically, i. e. different to either

side. The available range is +/-125% of the normal servo

travel.

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select one of the inputs 5 to 8.

If you wish to set up symmetrical travel, i. e. the same in

both directions, move the associated transmitter control

(rotary proportional controls CTRL 6 … 8 or switches

4/5 and 6/7) to a position at which the marking frame

encloses both sides of the travel setting:

trv

ctrl 7

free

+100% +100%

If you wish to set up asymmetrical travel, i. e. different for

both directions, move the associated transmitter control

(rotary proportional control or switch) to a position at

which the marking frame encloses the side of the travel

setting you wish to change:

trv

ctrl 7

free

3+100% +100%

+100% +100%

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to activate the value setting; the value ﬁ eld is now shown

highlighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand

touch-key to alter the values:

trv

ctrl 7

free

+111% +111%

3+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

+100% +100%

I8 +100% +100%

ctrl 7

free

+88% +111%

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to conclude the input process.

Negative and positive parameter values are possible;

this enables you to set the appropriate direction of

movement of the transmitter control or its direction of

effect to suit your model.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the altered

parameter in the highlighted input ﬁ eld to +100%.

Important:

In contrast to servo travel adjustments, changing the

transmitter travel setting affects all mixer and coupling

inputs derived from it, i. e. in the ﬁ nal analysis all the

servos which can be operated using the associated

transmitter control.

76 Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter

Transmitter control settings

Basic procedures for assigning transmitter controls and switches

trv

free

ctrl 6

+100% +100%

thr

gyr

lim

In addition to the two dual-axis stick units for the control

functions 1 to 4, the mx-16 HoTT is ﬁ tted as standard

with a range of supplementary controls:

Two three-position switches: SW 4/5 or CTRL 9 and •

SW 6/7 or CTRL 10. These are assigned in this menu

as “CTRL 9” and “CTR 10” respectively.

Three rotary proportional controls: CTRL 6, 7 and •

8. These are included in the menu as “Control 6”,

“Control 7” and “Control 8”.

Three two-position switches: SW 2, 3 and 8. These •

are indicated in the menu by “2”, “3” and “8” plus a

switch symbol, which indicates the direction of opera-

tion of the switch.

Two momentary switches: SW 1 and SW 9. These •

are indicated by “1” and “9” plus a switch symbol and

direction indicator, as mentioned above.

The two dual-axis stick units directly affect servos

connected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 and 6 (assuming

that you have set up a newly initialised model memory

with the model type “Helicopter”). In contrast, the “sup-

plementary” transmitter controls listed above are inactive

when the transmitter is in its default state (as delivered).

The exception is the rotary proportional knob CTRL 7

(throttle limiter), which acts upon servo 6 by default.

As already mentioned on page 20, this means that the

transmitter in its basic form only controls servos con-

nected to receiver outputs 1 … 4 using the primary

sticks, plus servo 6 - depending on the position of the

throttle limiter - even when you have initialised a new

model memory with the model type “Helicopter” and

“bound” it to the receiver you intend to install. Any ser-

vos connected to receiver sockets 5, 7 and 8 simply stay

at their centre point when you operate the associated

transmitter controls.

This may seem rather inconvenient at ﬁ rst sight, but

it is the only way to ensure that you can select any of

the “supplementary” transmitter controls for any task

you like, and that you are not required deliberately to

“program away” the transmitter controls which are not

required for a particular model.

Any superﬂ uous transmitter control will have an

effect on your model if you operate it by mistake,

unless it is inactive, i. e. unless no function is assi-

gned to it.

That is why you can select these “supplementary” trans-

mitter controls with complete freedom in the “Transmitter

control settings” menu, and assign them to any function

input (see page 38) you like, as this method ensures

that the transmitter meets your own requirements

exactly. This also means that each of these transmitter

controls can be assigned to several functions simultane-

ously. For example, the same toggle switch SW X which

you assign to an input in this menu, can also be as-

signed as the On / OFF switch controlling the “Timers” in

the “Basic settings” menu.

Note:

For model helicopters input 6 must always be left “free”.

Please see the section entitled “Throttle” on the next

double-page.

The basic procedure

Select the appropriate input I5, throttle, gyro, I8 or 1.

Lim using the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-

hand touch-key.

If necessary, use the arrow buttons 2. ef of the left or

right-hand touch-key to switch to the desired column.

Touch the central 3. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key, and the corresponding input ﬁ eld is highlighted.

Operate the transmitter control you wish to use, and 4.

set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key.

Touch the central 5. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to conclude the input process.

Simultaneously pressing the 6. cd or ef buttons

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets any set-

tings you have entered to the appropriate default val-

ue.

Column 2 “Assigning transmitter controls and

switches”

Select one of the function inputs I5, throttle, gyro, I8

or lim using the cd buttons of the left or right-hand

touch-key.

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to activate the assignment facility.

trv

free

ctrl 6

lim

+100% +100%

operate desired

switch or control

Now move the appropriate transmitter control (CTRL

6 to 10), or operate the selected switch (SW 1 to 3, 8

Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter

3+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

thr

gyr

lim

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to activate the value setting; the value ﬁ eld is now shown

highlighted. Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand

touch-key to alter the values:

+111% +111%

+100% +100%

trv

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

thr

gyr

lim

+88%

+100% +100%

+111%

+100% +100%

trv

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

thr

gyr

lim

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to conclude the input process.

Negative and positive parameter values are possible;

this enables you to set the appropriate direction of

movement of the transmitter control or its direction of

effect to suit your model.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the altered

parameter in the highlighted input ﬁ eld to +100%.

or 9). Note that the rotary proportional controls are not

detected until they have moved a few “ratchet clicks”, i. e.

they need to be operated for slightly longer. If the travel

is not sufﬁ cient for the transmitter to detect it, move the

control in the opposite direction.

If you assign one of the two-position switches, then this

control channel works like an On / Off switch. It is then

possible to switch to and fro between two end-point

values using this simple switch, e. g. motor ON / OFF.

The three-position switches SW 4/5 and 6/7, which you

will ﬁ nd in the “Transmitter control settings” menu as

“CTRL 9” and “CTR 10”, provide a centre position in

addition to the two end-points.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) with the switch assign-

ment activated - see illustration above - resets the input

to “free”.

Tips:

When assigning the switches please take care to set •

them to the appropriate direction of travel, and en-

sure that all inputs not required are left at or set to

“free”, to eliminate the possibility of errors if unused

transmitter controls are operated accidentally.

You can alter the effective end-points of an assigned •

switch by adjusting servo travel as described in the

next section.

The screen now displays either the transmitter control

number or the switch number, followed by a switch sym-

bol which indicates the direction of operation, e. g.:

trv

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

thr

gyr

lim

3+100% +100%

+100% +100%

Column 3 “-Travel+”

In this column the transmitter control can be adjusted

symmetrically or asymmetrically, i. e. different to either

side. The available range is +/-125% of the normal servo

travel.

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select one of the inputs I5, throttle, gyro, I8

or lim.

If you wish to set up symmetrical travel, i. e. the same in

both directions, move the associated transmitter control

(rotary proportional control or switches 4/5 and 6/7) to a

position at which the marking frame encloses both sides

of the travel setting:

3+100% +100%

+100% +100%

trv

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

thr

gyr

lim

If you wish to set up asymmetrical travel, i. e. different for

both directions, move the associated transmitter control

(rotary proportional control or switch) to a position at

which the marking frame encloses the side of the travel

setting you wish to change:

78 Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter

Important:

In contrast to servo travel adjustments, changing the

transmitter travel setting affects all mixer and coupling

inputs derived from it, i. e. in the ﬁ nal analysis all the

servos which can be operated using the associated

transmitter control.

“Throttle”

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

trv

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

thr

gyr

lim

In principle all transmitter controls (rotary proportional

knob) and switches present on the transmitter can be

assigned to the individual inputs within the Helicopter

program.

However, please note that some inputs available in this

menu are already pre-deﬁ ned for helicopter-speciﬁ c

functions, and for this reason cannot be used without

restriction.

For example, the receiver sequence printed on page 47

shows that the throttle servo (or the speed controller of

an electric-powered model helicopter) must be con-

nected to receiver output “6”, i. e. control channel “6” is

reserved for motor speed control.

However, in contrast to a ﬁ xed-wing aircraft, the throt-

tle servo or speed controller is not directly controlled

by the throttle stick or any other transmitter control, but

via a complex mixer system - see “Helicopter mixers”

menu, starting on page 94. The “throttle limit function”

(described on the next page) also has an inﬂ uence on

this mixer system.

Assigning a transmitter control or switch in the “Throt-

tle” line, or its supplementary control signal, would only

unnecessarily “confuse” this complex mixer system.

For this reason the “Throttle” input MUST always

be left “free” when you are programming a model

helicopter.

„Gyr“

trv

thr

gyr

lim

+100%

3+100% +100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

If the gyro you are using features inﬁ nitely variable gain

control, then you can pre-set the static gyro effect by

setting an “offset” within the range +/-125%, separately

for each ﬂ ight phase, in the “Gyro” line of the “Helicopter

mixers” menu - see the section starting on page 98.

Once you have entered these pre-deﬁ ned - static - gain

settings (set separately for each ﬂ ight phase in the

“Helicopter mixers” menu), you can use a transmitter

control such as one of the rotary proportional controls

CTRL 7 or 8 to vary gyro gain around the set “offset

point”; all you have to do is assign that transmitter con-

trol in the “Gyro” line of this menu: in the centre position

of the transmitter control this corresponds to the setting

selected in the “Helicopter mixers” menu (see section

starting on page 98). If the transmitter control is moved

from this centre point in the direction of full travel, gyro

gain is increased; towards the opposite end-point it is

reduced. This is a fast, simple method of ﬁ ne-tuning gyro

gain when the model is in ﬂ ight - perhaps to suit varying

weather conditions - or alternatively to ﬁ nd the optimum

setting. In software terms you can also limit the gain

range to both sides by restricting the transmitter control

travel. However, please be sure to read the set-up

notes provided with your gyro before carrying out

these adjustments, as you could render your heli-

copter uncontrollable if you make a mistake.

Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter

By default the “lim” input is assigned to the rotary pro-

portional control CTRL 6, which is located at top left on

the transmitter:

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

trv

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

thr

gyr

lim

This pre-deﬁ ned assignment eliminates the need to

program two ﬂ ight phases - “with idle-up” and “without

idle-up” - as are often used by other radio control sys-

tems for this purpose, since the method of raising the

system rotational speed below the hover point is more

ﬂ exible with the mx-16 HoTT program, and can be

ﬁ ne-tuned more accurately than using the conventional

“idle-up” function. However, if you prefer to program your

helicopter “with idle-up”, then switch off the “throttle limit”

function, described below, by setting the “Lim” input to

“free”.

Meaning and application of “throttle limit”

As mentioned previously under “Throttle”, the power

output of the engine or motor of a model helicopter is

not controlled directly using the throttle (Ch 1) stick - in

contrast to ﬁ xed-wing model aircraft. Instead it is control-

led indirectly by the throttle curve settings which you set

up in the “Helicopter mixers” menu. Alternatively the

throttle is controlled by the speed controller if the unit

you are using is a governor or regulator.

Note:

Naturally it is possible to set up different throttle curves

to suit different stages of ﬂ ight using ﬂ ight phase pro-

Throttle limit function

“Lim” input

gramming.

By their very nature, both methods of controlling power

have the same result, i. e. that a helicopter’s motor never

gets anywhere near its idle speed during “normal” ﬂ ying,

so it is impossible to start or stop the motor easily unless

some other means is used.

The “Throttle limiter” function solves this problem in

an elegant manner: a separate transmitter control - as

standard this is the rotary proportional control CTRL 6

located at top left on the transmitter - is employed to limit

the setting of the throttle servo or the speed controller,

which means that you can throttle right back to the idle

position. At this setting the trim of the throttle / collective

pitch stick assumes control, and can be used to switch

off an electric motor directly. At the other extreme, the

throttle servo or speed controller can, of course, only

reach its full-throttle position if you release full servo

travel using the throttle limit control. That is why the

“lim” input is reserved in the Helicopter program for the

“Throttle limiter” function.

For this reason the right-hand positive value in the

“Travel” column must be large enough to ensure that it

does not limit the full-throttle setting available via the

throttle curve settings when the throttle limit control is at

its maximum position. Usually this means a value in the

range +100% to +125%. The left-hand negative value in

the “Travel” column should be set in such a way that the

throttle limit control reliably cuts the electric motor, or

closes the throttle to the point where you can cut the I.C.

motor using the (digital) Ch 1 trim. For this reason you

should leave this value at +100%, at least for the time

being.

This variable “limiting” of throttle travel provides a

convenient means of starting and stopping the motor.

However, it also gives an additional level of safety if, for

example, you have to carry your helicopter to the ﬂ ight

line with the motor running: you simply move the control

to its minimum position, and this prevents any accidental

movement of the Ch 1 stick affecting the throttle servo.

If the carburettor is too far open (or the speed controller

not at “stop”) when you switch the transmitter on, you

will hear an audible warning, and the screen displays

the message:

throttle

too

high !

Tip:

You can call up the “Servo display” menu to check the

inﬂ uence of the throttle limit slider. This menu can be ac-

cessed from virtually any menu points by simultaneously

pressing the ef buttons of the left-hand touch-key.

Bear in mind that servo output 6 controls the throttle

servo on the mx-16 HoTT.

Basic idle setting

Start by turning the throttle limiter - by default the rotary

proportional knob CTRL 6 located at top left on the

transmitter - clockwise to its end-point. Move the throt-

tle / collective pitch stick to the maximum position, and

ensure that a standard throttle curve is active in the

“Channel 1 ¼ throttle” sub-menu of the …

“Heli mixer” (page 94 … 105)

… menu. If you have already altered the standard

throttle curve which is present when you ﬁ rst initialise a

model memory, then this should be reset to the values

“Point 1 = -100%”, “Point 3 = 0%” and “Point 5 = +100%”

- at least temporarily.

80 Program description: transmitter control settings – model helicopter

input

output

point 3

ch1 thr

Note:

Since the throttle trim lever has no effect when the throt-

tle limiter is open, its position is not relevant at this point.

Now - without starting the glow motor - adjust the

mechanical linkage of the throttle servo so that the

carburettor barrel is fully open; if necessary, carry out

ﬁ ne-tuning using the travel setting for servo 6 in the

“Servo settings” menu.

Close the throttle limiter completely by turning the rotary

proportional knob CTRL 6 anti-clockwise to its end-

point. Use the trim lever of the throttle / collective pitch

stick to move the trim position marker to the motor OFF

position (see illustration in the right-hand column of the

next page).

Note:

In contrast, when the throttle limiter is closed, the posi-

tion of the throttle / collective pitch stick is not relevant;

it can therefore be left in the maximum collective pitch

position, i. e. the throttle linkage can be adjusted be-

tween full-throttle (throttle limiter open) and “motor OFF”

(throttle limiter closed) using just the throttle limiter.

Now, with the throttle limiter closed, adjust the mechani-

cal throttle linkage so that the carburettor is just fully

closed. However, do check carefully that the throttle

servo is not stalled at either of its extreme end-points

(full-throttle / motor OFF).

stop

flt

MCTRL 7

Current trim position

Trim at motor OFF posi

Last idle position

Throttle limit con

For this reason the Ch 1 trim display is also completely

suppressed as soon as the throttle limit control is moved

to the right of the centre position.

stop

flt

50%

MCTRL 7

Throttle limit contro

Note:

Since this trim function is only effective in the “Motor

off” direction, the illustration above changes if you alter

the transmitter control direction for the collective pitch

minimum position of the Ch 1 stick from “back” (reﬂ ected

in the picture above) to “forward” in the “Collective pitch

min.” line of the “Basic settings” menu. In the same

way the effects shown in the illustration swap sides if

you change the stick mode from collective pitch right

(reﬂ ected in the pictures above) to collective pitch left in

the “Stick mode” line of the “Basic settings” menu; see

page 67.

To complete this basic set-up you still have to adjust the

idle trim range to coincide with point “1” of the throttle

curve. This is accomplished by setting point “1” of the

“Ch 1 ¼ throttle” mixer in the “Heli mixer” menu to a

value of about -65 to -70%:

input

output

point 1

–100%

–66%

ch1 thr

To check that the setting is exact, i. e. that there is a

seamless transition from idle trim to the throttle curve,

you need to close the throttle limiter and move the

collective pitch stick to and fro slightly at the minimum

end-point. When you do this, the throttle servo must not

move! In any case ﬁ ne-tuning must be carried out with

the model ﬂ ying.

The motor is always started with the throttle limiter

completely closed; this has the effect that the idle speed

is adjusted solely using the trim lever of the throttle /

collective pitch stick.

Throttle limit in conjunction with the digital trim

When used with the throttle limit control CTRL 6, the

Ch 1 trim places a marker at the set idle position of the

motor; at this point the motor can be stopped using the

trim. If the trim is in its end-range (see screen-shot: top

picture in the right-hand column), then a single click

immediately takes you back to the marker, i. e. to the

pre-set idle position (see also page 40).

The cut-off trim only acts as idle trim in the left-hand half

of the travel of the throttle limit control, i. e. the marker is

only set and stored within this range.

For your notes

82 Dual Rate / Expo - ﬁ xed-wing model

D/R Expo

Switchable control characteristics for aileron, elevator and rudder

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-

key to leaf through to the “D/R Expo” menu point of the

multi-function menu:

mod. mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

base sett.

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

A brief press on the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key opens this menu point:

100%

aile

elev

rudd

DUAL EXPO

–––

The Dual Rate / Expo function provides a means of

switching to reduced control travels, and of inﬂ uencing

the travel characteristics, for aileron, elevator and rudder

(control functions 2 ... 4).

Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control

travel adjustment in the “Transmitter control settings”

menu, i. e. it affects the corresponding stick function, re-

gardless of whether that function controls a single servo

or multiple servos via any number of complex mixer and

coupling functions.

For each switch position the servo travels can be set to

any value within the range 0 to 125% of full travel.

Expo works in a different way. If you set a value greater

than 0%, exponential provides ﬁ ne control of the model

around the centre position of the primary control func-

tions (aileron, elevator and rudder), without forfeiting

full travel at the end-points of stick movement. If you set

a value lower than 0%, travel is increased around the

neutral position, and diminishes towards the extremes of

travel. The degree of “progression” can therefore be set

to any value within the range -100% to +100%, where

0% equates to normal, linear control characteristics.

Another application for exponential is to improve the

linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the standard

nowadays. With a rotary servo the movement of the

control surface is inevitably non-linear, as the linear

movement of the output disc or lever diminishes pro-

gressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the

rate of travel of the control surface declines steadily

towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of

the linkage point on the output disc or lever. You can

compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value

greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of

the output device increases disproportionately as stick

travel increases.

Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the

corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that

function controls a single servo or multiple servos via

any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.

The Dual Rate and Expo functions can be switched on

and off together if you assign a switch to the function.

The result of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can be

controlled simultaneously using a single switch, and

this can be advantageous - especially with high-speed

models.

Flight phase dependent Dual-Rate and Expo set-

tings

If you have assigned a switch and - if you wish - a more

appropriate name to one of the phases 2 to 4 in the

“Base settings” menu (see page 60), then this appears

at bottom left, e. g. “normal”. If necessary, operate the

associated switch in order to switch between the ﬂ ight

phases.

The basic set-up procedure

Switch to the desired ﬂ ight phase, and then select 1.

the desired line “aile”, “elev” or “rudd” using the arrow

buttons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key.

If necessary, use the 2. ef buttons of the left or right-

hand touch key to select the desired column.

Brieﬂ y press the central 3. SET button of the right-hand

touch-key: the corresponding input ﬁ eld is now high-

lighted (black background).

Set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the 4.

right-hand touch-key.

Touch the central 5. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to conclude the input process.

Simultaneously press the 6. cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) to reset any changed

settings to the default values.

Dual Rate function

If you wish to switch between two possible D/R settings,

use the f button of the left or right-hand touch-key to

move to the right-hand column, marked at the bottom

edge of the screen with the switch symbol , then

brieﬂ y touch the central SET button …

100% 0%

aile

DUAL EXPO

–––

normal

push desired switch

into position ON

Dual Rate / Expo - ﬁ xed-wing model

which indicates the direction of operation when you

move the switch.

For example, the system enables you to ﬂ y with a linear

curve characteristic in the one switch position, and to

pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch posi-

tion.

Select the right-hand column, marked with EXPO at

the bottom edge of the screen, in order to change the

Dual-Rate value for each of the two switch positions in

the highlighted ﬁ eld, using the arrow buttons of the right-

hand touch-key.

100%

+11%

aile

elev

rudd

DUAL EXPO

–––

+22%

normal

Simultaneously touching the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value in

the highlighted input ﬁ eld to 0%.

Examples of different Expo values:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each

case.

… and assign a physical switch as described in the sec-

tion “Assigning switches and control switches” on page

39. The assigned switch appears on the screen together

with a switch symbol which indicates the direction of

operation of the switch. Select the left-hand column,

marked DUAL at the bottom edge of the screen, and set

the values for each of the two switch positions sepa-

rately in the highlighted ﬁ eld using the arrow buttons of

the right-hand touch-key.

Simultaneously touching the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to 100%.

Caution:

For safety reasons the Dual Rate value should always

be at least 20% of total control travel.

Examples of different Dual Rate values:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

Exponential function

If you wish to switch between two settings, use the f

button of the left or right-hand touch-key to move to the

right-hand column, marked at the bottom edge of the

screen with the switch symbol , then brieﬂ y touch

the central SET button and assign a switch to the func-

tion, as described in the section “Assigning switches

and control switches” on page 39. The assigned switch

appears on the screen together with a switch symbol

Combined Dual Rate and Expo

If you enter values for both Dual Rates and Expo, the

two functions are superimposed as follows:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

e. g. “switch back”:

88%

100%

77%

DUAL EXPO

–––

aile

elev

rudd

normal

and after moving switch “2” to the “forward” position:

122%

100%

111%

+11%

DUAL EXPO

–––

+22%

aile

elev

rudd

normal

84 Program description: Dual Rate / Expo – model helicopter

D/R Expo

Switchable control characteristics for roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor

100%

DUAL EXPO

–––

roll

nick

tail

The Dual Rate / Expo function provides a means of

switching to reduced control travels, and inﬂ uencing the

travel characteristics, for the roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor

servos (control functions 2 … 4).

A separate curve for control function 1 (motor / collective

pitch) can be set individually for throttle, collective pitch

and tail rotor in the “Helicopter mixers” menu. These

curves feature up to ﬁ ve separately programmable

points; see the sections starting on page 94 and 167.

Dual Rate works in a similar way to transmitter control

travel adjustment in the “Transmitter control settings”

menu, i. e. it affects the corresponding stick function, re-

gardless of whether that function controls a single servo

or multiple servos via any number of complex mixer and

coupling functions.

For each switch position the servo travels can be set to

any value within the range 0 to 125% of full travel.

Expo works in a different way. If you set a value greater

than 0%, exponential provides ﬁ ne control of the model

around the centre position of the primary control func-

tions (roll, pitch-axis and tail rotor), without forfeiting full

travel at the end-points of stick movement. If you set

a value lower than 0%, travel is increased around the

neutral position, and diminishes towards the extremes of

travel. The degree of “progression” can be set within the

range -100% to +100%, where 0% equates to normal,

linear control characteristics.

Another application for exponential is to improve the

linearity of rotary-output servos, which are the standard

nowadays. With a rotary servo the movement of the

control surface is inevitably non-linear, as the linear

movement of the output disc or lever diminishes pro-

gressively as the angular movement increases, i. e. the

rate of travel of the control surface declines steadily

towards the extremes, dependent upon the position of

the linkage point on the output disc or lever. You can

compensate for this effect by setting an Expo value

greater than 0%, with the result that the angular travel of

the output device increases disproportionately as stick

travel increases.

Like Dual Rates, the Expo setting applies directly to the

corresponding stick function, regardless of whether that

function controls a single servo or multiple servos via

any number of complex mixer and coupling functions.

The Dual Rate and Expo functions can also be switched

on and off together if you assign a switch to the func-

tion. The result of this is that Dual Rates and Expo can

be controlled simultaneously using a single switch, and

this can be advantageous - especially with high-speed

models.

Flight phase dependent Dual-Rate and Expo set-

tings

If you have assigned a switch and - if you wish - a more

appropriate name to one of the phases 2, 3 or Auto-

rotation in the “Basic settings” menu (see page 68

and 69), then this appears at bottom left, e. g. “normal”.

If necessary, operate the associated switch in order to

switch between the ﬂ ight phases.

The basic set-up procedure

Switch to the desired ﬂ ight phase, and then select 1.

the desired line “Roll”, “Pitch” or “Tail” using the arrow

buttons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key.

If necessary, use the 2. ef buttons of the left or right-

hand touch key to select the desired column.

Brieﬂ y press the central 3. SET button of the right-hand

touch-key: the corresponding input ﬁ eld is now high-

lighted (black background).

Set the desired value using the arrow buttons of the 4.

right-hand touch-key.

Touch the central 5. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to conclude the input process.

Simultaneously press the 6. cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch key (CLEAR) to reset any changed

settings to the default values.

Dual Rate function

If you wish to switch between two possible D/R settings,

use the f button of the left or right-hand touch-key to

move to the right-hand column, marked at the bottom

edge of the screen with the switch symbol , brieﬂ y

touch the central SET button …

100% 0%

roll

DUAL EXPO

–––

push desired switch

into position ON

… and assign a physical switch as described in the sec-

tion “Assigning switches and control switches” on page

39. The assigned switch appears on the screen together

with a switch symbol which indicates the direction of

operation of the switch.

Select the left-hand column, marked DUAL at the bottom

Program description: Dual Rate / Expo – model helicopter

Combined Dual Rate and Expo

If you enter values for both Dual Rates and Expo, the

two functions are superimposed as follows:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100%, DR = 125% Expo = +100%, DR = 50% Expo = –100%, DR = 50%

e. g. “switch back”:

100% 0%

DUAL EXPO

–––

88%

77%

0% 2

roll

nick

tail

normal

and after moving switch “2” to the “forward” position:

100% 0%

DUAL EXPO

–––

122%

111%

+11% 2

+22%

roll

nick

tail

normal

edge of the screen, and set the values for each of the

two switch positions separately in the highlighted ﬁ eld

using the arrow buttons cd or ef of the right-hand

touch-key.

Simultaneously press the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch key (CLEAR) resets an altered value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to 100%.

Caution:

For safety reasons the Dual Rate value should always

be at least 20% of total control travel.

Examples of different Dual Rate values:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Dual Rate = 100% Dual Rate = 50% Dual Rate = 20%

Exponential function

If you wish to switch between two settings, use the f

button of the left or right-hand touch-key to move to the

right-hand column, marked at the bottom edge of the

screen with the switch symbol , then brieﬂ y touch

the central SET button and assign a switch to the func-

tion, as described in the section “Assigning switches

and control switches” on page 39. The assigned switch

appears on the screen together with a switch symbol

which indicates the direction of operation when you

move the switch.

For example, the system enables you to ﬂ y with a linear

curve characteristic in the one switch position, and to

pre-set a value other than 0% in the other switch posi-

tion.

Select the right-hand column, marked with EXPO at

the bottom edge of the screen, in order to change the

Dual-Rate value for each of the two switch positions in

the highlighted ﬁ eld, using the arrow buttons of the right-

hand touch-key.

100%

roll

nick

tail

DUAL EXPO

–––

+11% 2

+22%

normal

Simultaneously touching the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value in

the highlighted input ﬁ eld to 0%.

Examples of different Expo values:

Servo travel

Stick deflection Stick deflection Stick deflection

Expo = +100% Expo = +50% Expo = –100%

In these examples the Dual Rate value is 100% in each

case.

86 Program description: Phase trim – ﬁ xed-wing model

Phase trim

Flight phase-speciﬁ c trims for ﬂ aps, ailerons and elevator

If you wish to enter values other than “0”, e. g. to have

more lift at launch, or to be able to ﬂ y more slowly

when thermalling, or faster when ﬂ ying speed tasks, but

WITHOUT having to change the basic settings each

time, then you need to use alternative ﬂ ight phases.

This is done by activating “Phase 2” and, if necessary,

“Phase 3” in the “Basic settings” menu. You might then

use “Phase 4” for the “thermal” settings.

This is accomplished by moving to the “Basic settings”

menu and assigning a switch to the selected phase or

phases. If you decide to use one of the three-position

switches SW 4/5 or 6/7 as the phase switch, then it is

advisable to assign it to the “Speed” phase and “Land-

ing” phase at the extremes, with “normal” at the centre

position. In our example phase 2 contains the “Launch”

settings, and since this has top priority, you can shift to

this phase from any other phase using a two-position

switch.

Notes:

At the centre position of SW 4/5 or 6/7 the switch •

symbols on the screen should look as in the picture

at top right.

Please note the priorities of the individual ﬂ ight phas-•

es, as described in detail on page 60.

The default name for “Phase 2” is “take off”, that for

“Phase 3” is “speed”, and that for “Phase 4” is “landing”.

However, you can assign your own choice of names

at any time by selecting the appropriate line, pressing

the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and

selecting one of the following names in the highlighted

ﬁ eld using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key.

take off•

thermal•

If you have not assigned a switch to phases 2, 3 and 4

in the “Basic settings” menu, i. e. you have not assigned

switches to these alternative phases, you automatically

remain in ﬂ ight phase 1 - “normal”.

The number and name (“normal”) of this ﬂ ight phase

are permanently assigned, and cannot be altered. For

this reason the “normal” phase is not stated as Phase

1 “normal” in the “Basic settings” menu; it is simply

concealed.

10:01 2

phase 2

phase 3

phase 4

takeoff

landing

speed

–––

aile/flap 2aile

timer

If you select the “Phase trim” menu with this basic

arrangement, you will ﬁ nd just the “normal” line on the

screen, whose pre-set values of 0% are not usually

altered.

P H A S E T R I M

normal

¿0%

AIL ELEFLA

Note:

In this menu you will have at least one control function

(ELE), and a maximum of three functions (ELE, AIL and

FLA), available for phase-speciﬁ c trim settings, depend-

ing on the settings you have entered in the “Aileron /

ﬂ ap” line of the “Basic settings” menu (see page 58).

dist(ance)•

speed•

acro•

landing•

air-tow•

test•

timer 10:01 2

phase 2

phase 3

phase 4 thermal

takeoff

speed

receiv out

These names will appear in the transmitter’s basic

display …

GRAUBELE

#01

2:22h

stop

flt

«normal »

0:00

5.5V

51%

5.2V HoTT

… and in the “Phase trim” menu - see lower picture.

Setting up ﬂ ight phase trims

In the “Phase trim” menu you can adjust the trims for the

previously selected ﬂ ight phases.

The ﬁ rst step is to use the phase switch you have

already assigned to move to the phase which you wish

to adjust (the “*” at far left indicates the currently active

phase).

Program description: Phase trim – ﬁ xed-wing model

P H A S E T R I M

normal

¿0%

takeoff

speed

thermal

AIL ELEFLA

Select the desired control surface function using the

arrow buttons ef of the left or right-hand touch-key,

then brieﬂ y press the central SET button of the right-

hand touch-key. The trim values in the highlighted value

ﬁ eld can now be adjusted using the arrow-buttons of the

right-hand touch-key.

You can activate each phase by operating the assigned

phase select switch or switches. Note that the servos

do not change from one setting to another abruptly;

they move smoothly with a transition time of around one

second.

With this option, which works in a similar way to trans-

mitter control sub-trim or offset settings with other radio

control systems, it is possible to set values within the

range -99% to +99%. However, typical values are nor-

mally in single ﬁ gures or low double ﬁ gures.

normal 0%

+2%

+8%

–3%

–5%

–7%

+2%

+5%

+10%

P H A S E T R I M

takeoff

speed

thermal

AIL ELEFLA

If you have made any changes, simultaneously pressing

the cd or ef buttons of the right-hand touch-key

(CLEAR) resets them to the default value of 0%.

Note:

In this menu you will have at least one control function

(ELE), and a maximum of three functions (ELE, AIL and

FLA), available for phase-speciﬁ c trim settings, depend-

ing on the settings you have entered in the “Aileron /

ﬂ ap” line of the “Basic settings” menu (see page 58).

88 Program description: wing mixers – ﬁ xed-wing model

Fixed-wing mixers

–––

ail

diff aile.

rudd

flaps

brak

elev

flap

aile

elev

flap

aile

elev

flap

diff–red

aile

diff flaps

(The display varies according to the information you

have entered in the “Motor at Ch 1” and “Ail / Flap” lines

in the “Basic settings” menu. The selection above

shows the maximum number of options, and equates to

the setting “No (motor)” and “2AIL 2FL”).

The mx-16 HoTT transmitter’s program contains a se-

ries of pre-programmed coupling functions, and all you

have to do is set the mixer ratios and (optionally) assign

a switch. The number of pre-programmed mixer func-

tions in the mixer list will vary according to the pre-set

“model type” (tail type, number of wing servos, with or

without motor - see the section starting on page 56). For

example, if your model is not ﬁ tted with camber-chang-

ing ﬂ aps, and you have not entered any ﬂ ap servos in

the “Basic settings” menu, the software automatically

suppresses all the ﬂ ap mixers, as are the “Brake ¼ NN

*“ mixers if you enter “Idle forward” or “Idle back” in the

“Motor at Ch 1” line. This makes the menus clearer and

easier to understand, and also avoids potential program-

ming errors.

What is a mixer?

The basic function

In many models it is often desirable to use a mixer to

couple various control systems, e. g. to link the ailerons

and rudder, or to inter-connect a pair of servos where

two control surfaces are actuated by separate servos. In

all these cases the signal which ﬂ ows directly from the

“output” of a transmitter stick to the associated servo

is “bled off” at a particular point - this effect can also

be “concealed” in transmitter control options such as

“D/R Expo” or “Transmitter control settings” - and

the derived signal is then processed in such a way that

it affects the “input” of another control channel, and

therefore eventually another receiver output.

Example: V-tail mixer

e48 V

C 577

Bs N 410

Se v 48 V

C 577

es N 410

V-tail mixer

Control function inputs

Control channels

(receiver outputs)

Elevator stick

Rudder stick

Right rudder / elevator

Left rudder / elevator

Rudder

Elevator

Rudder

Elevator

The mx-16 HoTT transmitter software contains a

large number of pre-programmed coupling functions as

standard, designed to mix together two (or more) control

channels. The mixer required in this example is sup-

plied “ready-made” in the software, and just has to be

activated in the “tail” line of the “Basic settings” menu in

the form of “V-tail”.

The software also includes three freely programmable

linear mixers in the ﬁ xed-wing and helicopter programs,

all of which can be used in each model memory.

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

For more information please refer to the general notes

on “Free mixers” in the section of this manual starting on

page 106.

Program description: wing mixers – ﬁ xed-wing model

ing ﬂ aps are deﬁ ned; this is intentional, as it elimi-

nates the danger of errors when a ﬂ ap command is

given.

The basic programming procedure

Use the 1. cd buttons of the left or right-hand touch-

key to select the desired mixer.

Use the2. f button of the left or right-hand touch-key

to move to the right-hand column, marked by the

switch symbol at the bottom edge of the screen.

Touch the central 3. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key; the corresponding input ﬁ eld is now highlighted

(black background).

Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to 4.

set the desired value, and assign the switch if neces-

sary, as described on page 39.

With the exception of the “Diff. red.” line, negative and

positive parameter values are possible; this may be

necessary to obtain the correct direction of servo ro-

tation (control surface deﬂ ection).

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of

the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered

value to the default value.

Touch the central 5. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to conclude the input process.

Mixer neutral point (offset)

The neutral point of the mixers …

Aileron ¼ NN *

Elevator ¼ NN *

… is by default the zero point of the transmitter control,

i. e. that is the point at which they have no effect. At the

end-point of the transmitter control the full mixer value is

applied.

The default neutral point (“offset”) of the mixers …

Airbrake ¼ NN *

… at which the airbrakes are always retracted, is the

forward position of the Ch 1 stick (throttle / airbrakes)

if you select “none” in the “Motor at Ch 1” line of the

“Basic settings” menu, and is the back position of the

Ch 1 stick if you select “none/inv”.

diff aile (differential aileron travel)

Aileron differential compensates for an unwanted side-

effect which occurs when ailerons are deﬂ ected: the

problem known as “adverse yaw”. When ailerons are

deﬂ ected, the drag generated by the down-going aileron

is greater than that produced by the up-going aileron.

The differential drag causes a yawing motion around the

vertical axis in the opposite direction to the desired turn.

This effect is much more pronounced in model gliders

with high aspect ratio wings than in power models with

their much shorter moment arms, and usually has to be

countered by giving a simultaneous rudder deﬂ ection in

the opposite direction to the yaw. However, this in turns

causes additional drag and reduces the aircraft’s ef-

ﬁ ciency even further.

Aileron differential reduces the angular travel of the

down-going aileron relative to the up-going aileron, and

this reduces the drag and therefore the adverse yaw.

However, electronic differential can only be applied

if each aileron is actuated by its own servo, usually

mounted in the wings themselves. The shorter pushrods

also result in virtually slop-free aileron linkages with

reliable centring.

Mechanical solutions are also possible, but they usually

Notes:

There are various alternative methods of positioning •

the camber-changing ﬂ aps; these include:

a) settling on just one position per ﬂ ight phase, sim-

ply by setting appropriate trim values in the “Pha-

se trim” menu, as described on the preceding

double-page;

b) controlling the ﬂ aps manually using any transmit-

ter control assigned to “Input 6” (in the “Transmit-

ter control settings” menu - see page 74), after

setting the basic ﬂ ap positions in the “Phase trim”

menu, as described earlier. Ideally the transmit-

ter control would be one of the rotary proportional

controls CTRL 6 … 8.

The selected transmitter control directly operates

the two ﬂ ap servos connected to receiver outputs

6 and 7, assuming that you have speciﬁ ed ﬂ aps in

the “Ail. / Flap” line of the “Basic settings” menu.

The same control determines the ﬂ ap setting of

the ailerons via the percentage value entered in

the “FL ¼ AIL” mixer line.

However, for ﬁ ner control of the ﬂ ap positions, we

recommend that you reduce their travel to about

25% in the “E6” line of the “Transmitter control

settings” menu.

c) It is also possible to leave the default setting of

“0%” in the appropriate line of the “FL ¼ AIL”

menu, and to assign the same transmitter con-

trol to both input 6 and input 5 in the “Transmitter

control settings” menu. The magnitude of the ef-

fect on the two pairs of wing ﬂ aps can then be ad-

justed using the servo travel adjustment facility.

If a transmitter control is assigned to input “7”, it will •

be de-coupled by the software if two camber-chang- * NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

90 Program description: wing mixers – ﬁ xed-wing model

Note:

Negative values are not usually necessary if the correct

channels are used.

ail ¼ rudd (Aileron ¼ rudder)

In this case the rudder automatically “follows” when an

aileron command is given, and the mixer ratio (degree of

following) can be set by the user. Coupled aileron / rud-

der (also known as “combi-switch”) is especially useful

for suppressing adverse yaw in conjunction with aileron

differential, and this combination usually makes smooth

turns very easy to ﬂ y. Naturally, the rudder can still be

controlled separately by means of its dedicated stick.

The adjustment range of +/- 150% enables the user to

set up the correct direction of travel according to the

direction of rotation of the ﬂ ap servos. If an (optional)

non-centring switch (SW 2 … 8) is assigned to this func-

tion, the mixer can be turned on and off in ﬂ ight, so that

you can control the ailerons and rudder separately if and

when you so desire.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

This mixer is usually set up in such a way that the rud-

der deﬂ ects automatically to the side of the up-going

aileron; a setting around 50% is likely to be approxi-

mately correct.

For aerobatic ﬂ ying it is necessary to set low absolute

differential values, to ensure that the model rotates

exactly along its longitudinal axis when an aileron

command is given. Moderate values around -50% or

+50% are typical for making thermal turns easier to ﬂ y.

The split setting (-100%, +100%) is popular with slope

ﬂ yers, when ailerons alone are often used for turning the

model.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

Note:

Although it is possible to enter negative values in order

to reverse the direction of servo rotation, this is not usu-

ally necessary if the correct channels are used.

diff ﬂ aps (Camber-changing ﬂ ap differential)

The aileron / ﬂ ap mixer (see below) is designed to

superimpose an aileron function on the ﬂ aps. Flap

differential works like aileron differential, and produces

a reduced ﬂ ap movement in the down-direction when

these surfaces are used as supplementary ailerons.

The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it

possible to set the correct direction of differential re-

gardless of the direction of rotation of the servo. “0%”

corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. the servo travel is

the same up and down. A setting of “-100%” or “+100%”

means that the down-travel of the ﬂ aps is reduced to

zero when an aileron command is given (“split” setting).

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

have to be “designed in” when the model is built, and the

degree of differential cannot be altered subsequently.

In any case signiﬁ cant mechanical differential tends to

cause additional slop in the control system. Electronic

differential offers several important advantages:

0% (normal)

50% (differential)

100% (split)

It is easily possible to vary the degree of differential

without affecting the travel of the up-going aileron. At

one extreme it is possible to suppress the down-aileron

deﬂ ection completely, i. e. only the up-going aileron

moves at all, and this arrangement is sometimes called

the “split” setting. Split ailerons not only tend to suppress

adverse yaw, but can even generate positive yaw, which

means that the model yaws in the direction of the turn

when an aileron command is given. In the case of large

model gliders, smooth turns can then be ﬂ own using

ailerons alone, which with most models of this type is

usually by no means the case.

The adjustment range of -100% to +100% makes it pos-

sible to set the correct direction of differential regardless

of the direction of rotation of the aileron servos. “0%”

corresponds to a normal linkage, i. e. no differential,

while “-100%” or “+100%” represents the “split” function.

Program description: wing mixers – ﬁ xed-wing model

ail ¼ ﬂ a p s (Aileron ¼ ﬂ ap)

This mixer feeds a variable amount of the aileron signal

into the ﬂ ap channel. When an aileron command is

given, the ﬂ aps “follow” the ailerons, although usually

through a smaller angle, i. e. the mixer ratio is gener-

ally less than 100%. The adjustment range of -150%

to +150% allows the user to set up the ﬂ ap direction to

match that of the ailerons.

The ﬂ aps should not deﬂ ect more than about 50% of the

(mechanical) travel of the ailerons.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

Note:

If your model is equipped with only one ﬂ ap servo, you

should still select “2FL” in the “aile/ﬂ ap” line of the “Ba-

sic settings” menu (see page 58) but leave the “Ail ¼

Flap” mixer at 0%. In contrast, all the other wing mixers

can be used in the usual way.

brak ¼ elev (Airbrake ¼ elevator)

Extending any form of airbrakes usually generates an

unwanted change in airspeed; this is especially marked

when a butterﬂ y (crow) braking system is deployed (see

next page).

This mixer feeds a corrective signal to the elevator to

compensate for such an effect. The adjustment range is

-150% to +150%.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

“Usual” values are generally in single to low double

ﬁ gures. It is essential to check and adjust this setting at

a safe height, and it is also important to ensure that the

model does not slow down too much when the airbrakes

are extended. The danger is that you might need to

retract the brakes again on the landing approach when

you realise the model will “land short”; if its airspeed is

too low when you retract the brakes, the model will just

fall to the ground at that point.

brak ¼ ﬂ a p (Airbrake ¼ ﬂ ap)

When you operate the brake function (Ch 1 stick), both

ﬂ ap servos move together for the landing approach; the

mixer ratio can be set to any value in the range -150% to

+150%. Down-ﬂ ap is usually selected.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

At this point you select the value which causes the ﬂ aps

to deﬂ ect down as far as possible when the airbrake

function is deployed. However, please ensure that none

of the servos concerned strikes its mechanical end-

stops (servos stalled). To achieve this, you may need

to limit the servo travel(s) using the “Travel -/+” option,

which is found on the “RX SERVO” display page of the

“Telemetry” menu.

brak ¼ aile (Airbrake ¼ aileron)

When you operate the brake function, both aileron

92 Program description: wing mixers – ﬁ xed-wing model

part of the elevator signal to the ﬂ ap servos. The mixer

direction must be set so that the ﬂ aps move down when

up-elevator is applied, and vice versa.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

The “usual” settings for this mixer are in the low two-digit

range.

elev ¼ aile (Elevator ¼aileron)

This mixer allows the ailerons to reinforce the elevator

response in the same way as the previous mixer.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

The adjustment range is +/- 150%. For this mixer the

“usual” settings are again in the low two-digit range.

ﬂ ap ¼ elev (Flap ¼elevator)

This inter-action between the ﬂ aps, ailerons and elevator

is used to control the glide angle on the landing ap-

proach. Optionally the butterﬂ y setting can also be used

without the airbrakes or spoilers; nowadays this is very

commonly used for sports and competition aircraft.

Note:

If your model features full-span (strip) ailerons which

also double as camber-changing ﬂ aps, the two mix-

ers “Brake ¼ aileron” and “Brake ¼ elevator” can be

combined for glide path control. In this case up-ﬂ ap is

applied, but the ﬂ aps can still be controlled as ailerons.

Elevator pitch trim compensation is generally required.

If you have programmed aileron differential, the re-

sponse of the ailerons will inevitably be adversely

affected by the extreme “up” deﬂ ection of the ailerons

in the butterﬂ y setting, because the differential travel

reduces or entirely suppresses the down-aileron de-

ﬂ ection. However, the “up” travel of the ailerons is also

greatly restricted because they are already at or close to

their “up” end-point. The remedy here is to apply “dif-

ferential reduction”, which is explained in its own section

later.

elev ¼ ﬂ a p (Elevator ¼ ﬂ ap)

The ﬂ aps can be used to enhance the effect of the el-

evator in tight turns and aerobatics, and this mixer feeds

servos move together for the landing approach; the

mixer ratio can be set to any value in the range -150%

to +150%.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

Note:

It can also be useful to deﬂ ect both ailerons up slightly

when the airbrakes are extended; in most cases this

signiﬁ cantly reduces the risk of a tip-stall.

Combination of the “Brake ¼ NN *” mixers:

“Crow” or “Butterﬂ y” setting

If you have set up all three airbrake mixers for your

model, it is then possible to program a special conﬁ gura-

tion known as the “crow” or “butterﬂ y” arrangement for

glide path control. In the butterﬂ y setting both ailerons

are deﬂ ected up by a moderate amount, and both ﬂ aps

down by the maximum possible amount. The third mixer

provides elevator trim to counteract any unwanted pitch

trim change and maintain the model’s airspeed at a

safe level. This is necessary to avoid the danger of the

model slowing up excessively; if the landing approach is

started too soon, and has to be extended by retracting

the airbrakes again, the model could then stall abruptly.

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

Program description: wing mixers – ﬁ xed-wing model

When the camber-changing ﬂ aps are lowered, either

using “Phase trim” or by means of a transmitter control

assigned to input “6”, a pitch trim change (up or down)

may occur. Alternatively it may be desirable for slight

down-elevator to be applied automatically when the

ﬂ aps are raised by a small amount, in order to increase

the model’s basic airspeed. This mixer can be used to

achieve both purposes.

When the ﬂ aps are deployed, this mixer causes the

elevator setting to be corrected automatically in propor-

tion to the ﬂ ap deﬂ ection.

The adjustment range is +/- 150%. For this mixer the

“usual” settings are in the single to low two-digit range.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

ﬂ ap ¼ aile (Flap ¼aileron)

This mixer causes a variable proportion of the ﬂ ap signal

to be mixed in with the aileron channels 2 and 5 so that

the ailerons follow the movement of the ﬂ aps, albeit

normally with a smaller deﬂ ection.

The adjustment range is +/- 150%. For this mixer the

“usual” settings are around 50%.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

Note:

If you assign a transmitter control to inputs 5 and 6 in

the “Transmitter control settings” menu for adjust-

ing the ﬂ ap positions, then you should leave the value

for this mixer at 0%. See the notes on page 89 in this

regard.

diff red (Differential reduction)

The problem of reduced aileron response in the but-

terﬂ y conﬁ guration has been mentioned earlier: if aileron

differential is employed, the aileron response on the

landing approach may be adversely affected through

the extreme “up” deﬂ ection of the ailerons, permitting

virtually no further up-movement; on the other hand

the “down” travel has already been reduced by the

programmed differential setting. The overall result is

signiﬁ cantly reduced aileron response compared with

the normal setting of the control surfaces.

In this case you really should use “differential reduc-

tion” if at all possible. This reduces the degree of aileron

differential when you invoke the butterﬂ y setting using

the airbrake stick. Differential is reduced progressively,

or even eliminated altogether, as the airbrake stick is

moved towards its end-point.

A value of 0% at this point means that the full pro-

grammed aileron differential is retained. A value of 100%

means that the aileron differential is completely elimi-

nated at the maximum butterﬂ y setting, i. e. when the

airbrakes and other glide path control surfaces are fully

extended. If you set a value above 100%, the aileron

differential is eliminated even before full travel of the

airbrake stick is reached.

The adjustment range is 0 to 150%.

Simultaneously pressing the cd or ef buttons of the

right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered value

to 0%.

94 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter

Helicopter mixers

Flight phase-speciﬁ c mixers for collective pitch, throttle and tail rotor

In the “Basic settings” menu a method of switching

ﬂ ight phases can be activated by assigning the appropri-

ate switches to “Phase 2”, “Phase 3” and “Auto-rotation”.

You can then switch between the phases “normal” and

a second and third phase - to which you can assign

more appropriate names yourself, if necessary - using

one of the non-centring switches SW 2 … 8; a further

switch then selects “Auto-rotation”. However, “Phase 2”

always has precedence over the other two phases;

see pages 68 / 69.

If you have not yet assigned switches for the ﬂ ight

phases, you should do so now. Use the arrow buttons

of the left-hand touch-key to move to the right-hand

column, marked by the switch symbol at the bot-

tom of the screen, then touch the central SET button of

the right-hand touch-key. The switches are assigned as

described on page 39:

pitch min rear

timer 10:01 C3

phase 2

phase 3

hover

speed

autorotat. 2

Phase 1 always bears the designation “normal”. Both

the number and name of this phase are permanently

assigned, and cannot be altered. For this reason the

“normal” phase is not stated as Phase 1 in the “Basic

settings” menu; it is simply concealed.

By default “Phase 2” is assigned the phase name

“hover”, and “Phase 3” the name “speed”, but you can

change these at any time if you prefer: touch the central

SET button with the right-hand touch-key, and use the

arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to select one

of the following names:

hover•

acro•

acro 3D•

speed•

test•

Description of the helicopter mixers

Five-point curves are available for setting up the control

characteristics of “collective pitch”, “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” and

“Ch 1 ¼ tail rotor”. Using these curves it is possible to

program non-linear mixer ratios along the travel of the

transmitter stick for these mixers. Move to the display

page for setting 5-point curves by touching the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key (see below).

In contrast, the mixers “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” and “Ch 1 ¼

tail rotor” are not required for the “Auto-rotation” ﬂ ight

phase (described in the section starting on page 104);

instead they are automatically switched to a (user-varia-

ble) pre-deﬁ ned value.

A value must be entered in the “Gyro” and “Input 8” lines:

touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-

key, then enter a value in the highlighted ﬁ eld using the

arrow buttons of the right-hand touch key - in a similar

fashion to changing the transmitter centre position or

the offset position with other radio control systems. This

set-up facility is rounded off with the “Swashplate limit”

option: this restricts the maximum travel of the swash-

plate servos to the value you set, in the form of a limiter.

All these options are required for the basic process of

setting up a model helicopter.

Altered parameters can be reset to the corresponding

default values at any time by simultaneously pressing

the cd or ef buttons of the right-hand touch-key

(CLEAR).

The name of the currently selected ﬂ ight phase is

displayed in the “Helicopter mixers” menu as well as

in the transmitter’s basic display; this is designed to

ensure that any changes you make actually apply to

the appropriate ﬂ ight phase. Note that the servos do not

change from one setting to another abruptly; they move

smoothly with a transition time of around one second.

This does not apply to auto-rotation: when you switch

INTO auto-rotation, the change takes place immediately.

If you operate the switch selected for a particular ﬂ ight

phase, the associated ﬂ ight phase is superimposed at

the left-hand bottom edge of the screen, e. g. “normal”.

ch1

ptch

thro

tail

normal

gyro 0%

inp8 0%

Now you can program the settings for this ﬂ ight phase.

Basic programming procedure

Use the arrow buttons 1. cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the desired option.

Touch the central 2. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key, and the screen switches to the set-up page (

symbol at the bottom edge of the screen), or the

corresponding input ﬁ eld is highlighted (black back-

ground).

Deﬁ ne the mixer values using the arrow buttons of 3.

the right-hand touch-key, moving the throttle / collec-

tive pitch stick at the same time if necessary.

Simultaneously pressing the 4. cd or ef buttons of

Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter

the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets an altered

value to the default value.

Touch the central 5. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to conclude the input process.

ptch (Collective pitch (ch1 ¼ pitch))

Select the “Collective pitch” line using the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch key, then touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key:

input

output

point 3

ptch

normal

The control curve can be based on a maximum of

ﬁ ve nodes, known as “reference points”, which can be

placed along the length of the control travel; separate

curves can be programmed for each ﬂ ight phase.

However, in most cases it is sufﬁ cient to use a smaller

number of reference points when deﬁ ning the collective

pitch curve. As a basic rule we recommend that you

start with the three default reference points offered by

the software. These three points, i. e. the two end-points

“Point 1” (collective pitch minimum) and “Point 5” (collec-

tive pitch maximum), and “Point 3”, exactly in the centre

of the travel, initially describe a linear characteristic

for the collective pitch curve; this is represented in the

picture above.

The programming procedure in detail

The throttle / collective pitch stick can now be used to

move the vertical line in the graph between the two

end-points “Point 1” and “Point 5”; at the same time the

momentary position of the stick is displayed in numeric

form in the “Input” line (-100% to +100%).

The point where the vertical line crosses the curve is

termed the “Output”, and this point can be varied within

the range -125% and +125% at a maximum of ﬁ ve

reference points. The control signal, modiﬁ ed in this way,

affects the collective pitch servos only. In the picture on

the left the stick is exactly at the 0% position at “Point

3”, and also generates an output signal of 0% due to the

linear nature of the graph.

By default only points “1” (collective pitch minimum at

-100%), “3” (hover point at 0%) and “5” (collective pitch

maximum at +100% travel) are active.

To set a point you use the associated stick to move the

vertical line to the point you wish to change. The number

and current curve value of this point are displayed in

the bottom line in the left-hand half of the screen in the

“Point” line. The arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-

key can now be used to change the current curve value

in the highlighted ﬁ eld to any value within the range

-125% to +125%, without affecting the adjacent points.

input

output

point 3

+75%

ptch

normal

In this example we have moved reference point “3” to

+75%.

However, the optional points “2” and “4” can also be

activated. In the next example we activate point “2” at

-50% …

input

output

point 2

–50%

–12%

deact

ptch

normal

… and point “4” at +50% …

input

output

point 4

+50%

+88%

deact

ptch

normal

This is accomplished using the stick to move the vertical

line to the appropriate area. As soon as the message

“inactive” appears in the highlighted value ﬁ eld, you can

activate the associated point with the arrow buttons of

the right-hand touch-key; it can then be adjusted in the

same manner as the other points …

input

output

point 4

+50%

–50%

ptch

normal

… or reset to “inactive” by simultaneously pressing

the cd or ef buttons of the right-hand touch-key

(CLEAR).

96 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter

Points “1” and “5”, however, CANNOT be disabled.

Note:

The following illustration, and all the other pictures on

this page, show a control curve which we prepared for

illustration purposes only. Please note that the curve

characteristics by no means represent real collective

pitch curves!

input

output

point 3

–50%

ptch

normal

Typical collective pitch curves for different ﬂ ight phases:

+100% +100% +100%

100%

Output

234 51234 51234 51

Control travel Control travel Control travel

Hover Aerobatics 3D

ch1 ¼thro (throttle curve)

input

output

point 3

ch1

normal

thro

Helicopter with glow engine or electric motor and

STANDARD SPEED CONTROLLER

This setting only affects the control curve of the throttle

servo or speed controller.

The method of setting up a throttle curve for a model

helicopter ﬁ tted with a speed governor or regulator is

discussed later.

The throttle curve can be deﬁ ned using up to ﬁ ve points,

in a similar way to the collective pitch curve (see previous

page).

In all cases the control curve must be set up in such •

a way that the throttle is fully open, or the speed

controller of an electric helicopter is at full power, at

the end-point of the throttle / collective pitch stick,

(exception: auto-rotation - see page 104).

The hover point is normally located at the centre of •

the stick travel, and the throttle setting should be

adjusted relative to the collective pitch curve in such

a way that the correct system rotational speed is

obtained at this point.

At the minimum position of the throttle / collective •

pitch stick the throttle curve should initially be set up

so that the (glow) motor runs at a distinctly higher

speed compared to the idle setting, with the clutch

reliably engaged.

In all ﬂ ight phases the motor (glow or electric) is

started and stopped using the throttle limiter (see

below).

If you are used to a different radio control system which

uses two separate ﬂ ight phases for this - “with idle-up”

and “without idle-up”; therefore incurring the “loss” of

one complete ﬂ ight phase - please note that the throt-

tle limiter renders this complication superﬂ uous, as the

increased system rotational speed below the hover point

in the mx-16 HoTT program is more ﬂ exible, and can

be ﬁ ne-tuned more accurately, than the “idle-up” system

used with earlier mc radio control systems.

Ensure that the throttle limiter is closed before you start

the glow motor, i. e. the throttle can only be adjusted

within its idle range using the idle trim. Be sure to read

the safety notes on page 102 which refer to this. If the

idle is set too high when you switch the transmitter on,

you will see and hear a clear warning!

stop

STARLET

#02

2:22h

0:00

5.5V

5.2V HoTT

mal »

throttle

too

high !

The following three diagrams show typical 3-point throttle

curves for different ﬂ ight phases, such as hover, aerobat-

ics and 3-D ﬂ ying.

Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter

Typical throttle curves for different ﬂ ight phases:

+100% +100% +100%

100%

Output

234 51234 51234 51

Control travel Control travel Control travel

Hover Aerobatics 3D

Notes on using the “Throttle limit” function:

We strongly recommend that you make use of the •

throttle limit function (“Transmitter control settings”

menu, page 79). When you use this function the throt-

tle servo is completely disconnected from the throt-

tle / collective pitch stick when the proportional throt-

tle limit control is at its left-hand end-point; the motor

runs at idle and only responds to the Ch 1 trim. This

feature enables you to start the motor from within any

ﬂ ight phase.

Once the motor is running, turn the throttle limiter

slowly to the opposite end-point, so that full control

of the throttle servo is returned to the throttle / collec-

tive pitch stick. It is important that the throttle limiter

should not restrict the throttle servo at its upper end-

point; you can avoid this by setting the control travel

to +125% in the “Lim” line of the “Transmitter control

settings” menu.

Since electric motors by their nature require no idle •

setting, the only important point when setting up an

electric-powered model helicopter is that the adjust-

ment range of the throttle limiter should be set signiﬁ -

cantly higher and lower than the adjustment range of

the speed controller, which is usually from -100% to

+100%. It may therefore be necessary to set the “Trav-

el” value of the throttle limiter to an appropriate point

in the “Lim” line of the “Transmitter control settings”

menu. However, the throttle curve itself has to be ﬁ ne-

tuned with the helicopter in ﬂ ight, just like a glow-pow-

ered machine.

Releasing the full throttle range, and imposing the •

throttle limiter again, trips the switching threshold of

the control switch “C3” (i. e. in either direction); this

switch can be used for automatically starting and

stopping the stopwatch to record the ﬂ ight time, or

some similar purpose; see page 39.

When you select auto-rotation, the mixer automati-

cally switches the value to a variable pre-set value;

see the section starting on page 104.

Helicopter with speed GOVERNOR (REGULATOR)

In contrast to speed controllers, which simply adjust pow-

er output in the same way as a carburettor, speed gover-

nors maintain a constant rotational speed in the system

which they regulate; they accomplish this by adjusting the

power output as required. In the case of a glow-powered

helicopter the governor automatically controls the throttle

servo; in an electric-powered machine the governor does

the same with the speed controller. For this reason speed

governors do not require a classic throttle curve; they

just need a pre-set rotational speed. Once this is set, the

system rotational speed does not alter unless the system

calls for more power from the motor than is available.

In most cases a speed governor is connected to receiver

output 8; see the receiver socket sequence on page 47. If

this socket is already in use, then the throttle limiter func-

tion is not used, since this only affects output 6 - which is

now not occupied - via the “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” mixer.

However, if you wish to be able to exploit the conven-

ience and safety features of the throttle limiter, the speed

governor should be connected to receiver output 6 - in

contrast to the usual socket sequence - and the throttle

curve adjusted so that it can simply assume the role of

the “usual” transmitter control.

In this case the “throttle curve” only determines the

nominal rotational speed of the speed controller, and this

nominal value is required to remain constant over the full

range of collective pitch; for this reason a horizontal line

should be set in the “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” mixer, i. e. every

(collective pitch) input value results in the same (“throt-

tle”) output value. The “height” of the line in the graph

determines the nominal system rotational speed.

Initially, then, reference point “3” should be erased, and

reference points “1” (input = -100%) and “5” (input =

+100%) set to the same value; for example:

input

output

point 1

–100%

+30%

ch1

normal

thro

The value to be set varies according to the speed gov-

ernor you are using, and also to the desired nominal

rotational speed; you may wish to vary it, of course, in the

various ﬂ ight phases.

When you select auto-rotation, the mixer automati-

cally switches the value to a variable pre-set value;

see the section starting on page 104.

98 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter

tems.

We recommend that you set up switchable ﬂ ight phases

for this, and set different gain settings for each phase in

the “Gyro” line; values between -125% and +125% are

possible.

ch1

ptch

thro

tail

normal

gyro 0%

inp8 0%

Based on the offset values determined for each ﬂ ight

phase, gyro gain can be varied proportionally by means

of a transmitter control assigned in the “Gyro” line of the

“Transmitter control settings” menu (see page 78).

This could be CTRL 8, which would provide inﬁ nitely

variable gyro gain control:

At the centre position of this transmitter control •

the gyro effect always corresponds to the settings

selected here.

If you turn the rotary proportional control CTRL 8, •

which we are using in our example, in the direction of

full travel (away from centre), the gyro gain increases

accordingly …

… and diminishes again if you turn it in the direction •

of the opposite end-point.

Important Note:

It is absolutely essential to read and observe the

set-up instructions supplied with your gyro before

entering any settings at this point, as a mistake here

could render your helicopter uncontrollable.

Ch1 ¼ tail rotor (static torque compensation)

input

output

point 3

Ch1

normal

tail

The default setting is a torque compensation curve with a

uniform linear mixer input of 0%, as is required for a gyro

sensor operating in “heading lock mode”; see illustration

above.

Important Note:

It is absolutely essential to read and observe the

set-up instructions supplied with your gyro before

entering any settings at this point, as a mistake here

could render your helicopter uncontrollable.

If you use your gyro sensor in “normal” operating mode,

or if the gyro only offers “normal mode”, then you should

set up the mixer as follows:

The tail rotor control curve can be deﬁ ned using up to

ﬁ ve points, in a similar way to the collective pitch curve

(see previous page). You can therefore modify the mixer

at any time when required, and enter symmetrical or

asymmetrical mixer inputs both above and below the

hover point. However, please ensure at the outset that

you have entered the correct direction of main rotor rota-

tion in the “Basic settings” menu.

input

output

point 3

CH1

normal

tail

Starting from -30% at Point 1 and +30% at Point 5, this

mixer should be set up in such a way that the helicopter

does not rotate around the vertical (yaw) axis (i. e. does

not deviate from the hover heading) during a long vertical

climb or descent, due to the change in torque of the main

rotor. At the hover the yaw trim should be set using the

(digital) tail rotor trim lever only.

For a reliable torque compensation setting it is essential

that the collective pitch and throttle curves have been set

up correctly, i. e. that main rotor speed remains constant

over the full range of collective pitch.

When you select auto-rotation, this mixer is auto-

matically switched off.

Gyro (adjusting gyro gain)

Most modern gyro systems feature proportional, inﬁ nite-

ly variable adjustment of gyro gain as well as a means

of selecting either of two different methods of working

from the transmitter.

If the gyro you wish to use features at least one of these

options, then it offers you the possibility of pre-setting

both “normal” gyro effect and - if available - “heading

lock mode”, and also of ﬂ ying normal, slow circuits with

maximum gyro stabilisation, but reducing the gyro effect

for high-speed circuits and aerobatics. This is generally

similar to the transmitter control centre adjustment or

offset adjustment provided by other radio control sys-

Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter

Adjusting the gyro sensor

If you wish to set up a gyro to achieve maximum pos-

sible stabilisation of the helicopter around the vertical

axis, please note the following points:

The mechanical control system should be as free-•

moving and accurate (slop-free) as possible.

There should be no “spring” or “give” in the tail rotor •

linkage.

You must use a powerful and - above all - fast servo •

for the tail rotor.

When the gyro sensor detects a deviation in yaw, the

faster it adjusts the thrust of the tail rotor, the further the

gyro gain adjuster can be advanced without the tail of

the model starting to oscillate, and the better the ma-

chine’s stability around the vertical axis. If the corrective

system is not fast enough, there is a danger that the

model’s tail will start to oscillate even at low gyro gain

settings, and you then have to reduce gyro gain further

using the rotary proportional control CTRL 8, as used

in our example, to adjust the pre-set “Gyro” value to

eliminate the oscillation.

If the model is ﬂ ying forward at high speed, or hovering

in a powerful headwind, the net result of the stabilising

effect of the vertical ﬁ n combined with the gyro’s stabilis-

ing effect may be an over-reaction which manifests itself

as tail oscillation. In order to obtain optimum stabilisation

from a gyro in all ﬂ ight situations, you should make use

of the facility to adjust gyro gain from the transmitter.

inp8 (Input 8)

Ch1

ptch

thro

tail

normal

gyro 0%

inp8 0%

The adjustment facilities in this line of the menu are only

relevant if your model helicopter is ﬁ tted with a speed

governor (regulator) which maintains a constant system

rotational speed, and you wish to control it using the

“classic” method. The settings should then be entered

in accordance with the instructions supplied with the

governor you intend to use.

However, it is more convenient - and also safer - to

adopt the method described on the preceding double-

page, using the “Ch1 ¼ thro” mixer.

Swashplate limiter

Ch1

thro

tail

normal

gyro 0%

inp8 0%

swash lim. off

This function acts like a circular mechanical gate acting

upon the swashplate control stick, restricting its range

of travel - which is usually rectangular - to a circular

pattern. This is designed to solve the following problem:

if the helicopter is set up in such a way that the roll and

pitch-axis travels extend to the maximum possible in

mechanical terms, e. g. for 3-D helicopter ﬂ ying, then at

simultaneous full travel of roll and pitch-axis the actual

movement of the swashplate is higher (theoretically

141%). In this situation the mechanical swashplate sys-

tem may strike its end-stops, and in the extreme case

the ball-links may even be forced off the linkage balls.

In the mx-16 HoTT transmitter a software function has

the effect of limiting the overall swashplate travel, i. e. the

tilt angle of the swashplate between 100% (the travel

is limited to the value which can be reached by one

function - roll or pitch-axis - alone) and 149% (no limiting

in force) is switched “off” (the function is completely

disabled). Swashplate limiting can also be adjusted to

suit individual models and ﬂ ight phases.

This software solution is far more ﬂ exible than a physical

limiter disc attached to the stick unit, and such a disc

can only be used in any case if the roll and pitch-axis

functions are controlled by one of the two primary sticks.

The sketch alongside shows the effect of the limiter at a

setting of 100%: the dotted

area of travel is cut off, and

appears as a dead zone. If

this function is used, you

should leave “Dual Rate”

at 100%, and you should

not set Dual Rate values

greater than 100%, other-

wise travel will be limited on

the roll or pitch-axis individually if the swashplate limiter

is set to 100%.

Adjustment range: 100 ... 149% and “off”.

100 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter

Adjusting the throttle and collective pitch curves

A practical procedure

Although the throttle and collective pitch control systems

are based on separate servos, they are always operated

in parallel by the throttle / collective pitch stick (except

when auto-rotation is invoked). The Helicopter program

automatically couples the functions in the required way.

In the mx-16 HoTT program the trim lever of control

function 1 only affects the throttle servo, i. e. it acts as

idle trim (see “Digital trims” on page 40).

The process of adjusting “throttle” and collective pitch

correctly, i. e. setting the motor’s power curve to match

the collective pitch setting of the main rotor blades,

is the most important aspect of setting up any model

helicopter. The program of the mx-16 HoTT provides

independent adjustment facilities for the throttle, collec-

tive pitch and torque compensation curves.

These curves can be deﬁ ned using a maximum of ﬁ ve

reference points. To deﬁ ne the control curves all you

have to do is set individual values for these ﬁ ve points in

order to determine each control curve.

However, before you set up the throttle / collective pitch

function it is important to adjust the mechanical linkages

to all the servos accurately, in accordance with the set-

up notes provided by the helicopter manufacturer.

Note:

The hover point should always be set to the centre

position of the throttle / collective pitch stick.

Idle setting and throttle curve

Note:

Since electric power systems by their nature require no

idle setting, it is not necessary to adjust the idle value.

However, the matching of the throttle and collective pitch

curve(s) must still be carried out as described here, in a

similar way to a glow-powered helicopter.

The idle setting is adjusted solely using the trim lever

of the Ch 1 function, with the throttle limiter closed, as

described in detail on pages 79 to 80.

Reference point 1 of the throttle curve deﬁ nes the throttle

setting when the helicopter is in a descent, but without

affecting the hover setting.

This is a case where you can exploit ﬂ ight phase pro-

gramming to use different throttle curves. An increased

system rotational speed below the hover point proves to

be useful in certain circumstances; for example, for fast,

steep landing approaches with greatly reduced collective

pitch, and for aerobatics.

The diagram shows a curve with

a slightly altered throttle setting

below the hover point at the cen-

tre of stick travel.

+100%

100%

OUTPUT

234 51

Control travel

Different throttle curves are programmed for each ﬂ ight

phase, so that you can use the optimum set-up both for

hovering and aerobatics:

Low system rotational speed with smooth, gentle •

control response and low noise at the hover.

Higher speed for aerobatics with motor power settings •

close to maximum. In this case the throttle curve also

has to be adjusted in the hover range.

The basic set-up procedure

Although the mx-16 HoTT transmitter provides a

broad range of adjustment for the collective pitch and

throttle curves, it is essential that you ﬁ rst adjust all

the mechanical linkages in the model according to the

information supplied by the helicopter manufacturer, i. e.

all the system linkages should already be approximately

correct in mechanical terms. If you are not sure of how

to do this, any experienced helicopter pilot will be glad to

help you with the basic set-up.

The throttle linkage must be adjusted in such a way

that the throttle is just at the “fully open” position at the

full-throttle setting, or the speed controller of an electric

helicopter is set to full-power. When the throttle limiter

is at the idle position, the Ch 1 trim lever should just be

able to close the throttle completely, without the servo

striking its mechanical end-stop (quick throttle adjust-

ment using the “digital trim”: see page 40). With an

electric helicopter the motor should stop reliably when

the throttle limiter is closed.

Take your time, and carry out these adjustments very

carefully by adjusting the mechanical linkage and / or

changing the linkage point on the servo output arm or

the throttle lever. Only when you are conﬁ dent that all is

well should you think about ﬁ ne-tuning the throttle servo

using the transmitter’s electronic facilities.

Caution:

Read all you can about motors and helicopters, so

that you are aware of the inherent dangers and the

cautionary measures required before you attempt to

start the motor for the ﬁ rst time!

With the basic set-up completed, it should be possible to

start the motor in accordance with the operating instruc-

tions supplied with it, and adjust the idle setting using

the trim lever of the throttle / collective pitch stick. The

idle position which you set is indicated in the transmit-

ter’s basic screen display by a horizontal bar in the

display of the Ch 1 trim lever’s position. Refer to page 40

101

Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter

already fully open and no further power increase is pos-

sible (this assumes that the motor is correctly adjusted),

then you should reduce the maximum blade pitch angle

at full deﬂ ection of the collective pitch stick, i. e. the value

at Point 5. Conversely, if motor speed rises during the

vertical climb, you should increase the pitch angle. This

is done on the “Collective pitch” graphic page by moving

the vertical line to Point 5 using the collective pitch stick,

and changing its value accordingly using the arrow but-

tons cd of the right-hand touch-button.

This diagram shows the changes

to the collective pitch maximum

value only.

+100%

100%

OUTPUT

234 51

Control travel

Hover

point

Now bring the model back to the hover, which again

should coincide with the mid-point of the Ch 1 stick.

If you ﬁ nd that the collective pitch stick now has to be

moved from the mid-point in the direction of “higher”,

then you should correct this deviation by slightly increas-

ing the collective pitch angle at the hover - i. e. Point

3 - until the model again hovers at the stick centre point.

Conversely, if the model hovers below the mid-point, cor-

rect this by reducing the pitch angle once more.

You may ﬁ nd that it is also necessary to correct the

throttle opening at the hover point (Point 3) in the “Ch 1

¼ throttle” menu.

of this manual for a full explanation of the digital trims.

Around the mid-point of the collective pitch stick the

model should lift off the ground and hover at approxi-

mately the rotational speed you wish to use. If this is not

the case, correct the settings as follows:

1. The model does not lift off until the collective

pitch stick is above the centre point.

a) Rotational speed too low

Remedy: on the “Ch 1

¼ throttle” graphic page,

increase the value at Point

+100%

100%

OUTPUT

234 51

Control travel

Hover

point

b) Rotational speed too high

Remedy: on the “Collec-

tive pitch” graphic page,

increase the blade pitch

angle for collective pitch

by increasing the value at

Point 3.

+100%

100%

OUTPUT

234 51

Control travel

Hover

point

2. The model lifts off below the centre point.

a) Rotational speed too high

Remedy: on the “Ch 1

¼ throttle” graphic page,

reduce the throttle opening

by reducing the value at

Point 3.

+100%

100%

OUTPUT

234 51

Control travel

Hover

point

b) Rotational speed too low

Remedy: on the “Collective

pitch” graphic page, re-

duce the blade pitch angle

by reducing the value at

Point 3.

+100%

100%

OUTPUT

234 51

Control travel

Hover

point

Important:

It is important to persevere with this adjustment pro-

cedure until the model hovers at the correct rotational

speed at the centre point of the throttle / collective pitch

stick. All the other model settings depend upon the cor-

rect setting of these parameters!

The standard set-up

The remainder of the standard adjustment procedure

is completed on the basis of the fundamental set-up

which you have just carried out, i. e. we now assume that

the model hovers in normal ﬂ ight at the centre point of

the throttle / collective pitch stick, with the correct rotor

speed. This means that your model helicopter is capable

of hovering and also ﬂ ying circuits in all phases whilst

maintaining a constant system rotational speed.

The climb setting

The combination of throttle hover setting, collective pitch

setting for the hover and the maximum collective pitch

setting (Point 5) now provides you with a simple method

of achieving constant system rotational speed from the

hover right to maximum climb.

Start by placing the model in an extended vertical climb,

holding the collective pitch stick at its end-point: motor

speed should not alter compared with the hover setting.

If motor speed falls off in the climb, when the throttle is

102 Program description: helicopter mixers – model helicopter

in premature wear of the clutch and gear train. The main

rotor blades are generally free to swivel, and they may

be unable to keep pace with such swift acceleration, in

which case they might respond by swinging far out of

their normal position, perhaps resulting in a boom strike.

Once the motor is running, you should slowly in-

crease system rotational speed using the throttle limiter.

Important ﬁ nal notes

Before you start the motor, check carefully that the throt-

tle limiter is completely closed, so that the throttle can

be controlled by the Ch 1 trim lever alone. If the throttle

is too far open when you switch the transmitter on, you

will see and hear a warning. If you ignore this and start

the motor with the throttle too far advanced, there is a

danger that the motor will immediately run up to speed

after starting, and the centrifugal clutch will at once

engage.

For this reason you should:

always grasp the rotor head ﬁ rmly

when starting the motor.

However, if you accidentally start the motor with the

throttle open, the rule is this:

Don’t panic!

Hang on to the rotor head regardless!

Don’t let go!

Immediately reduce the throttle limiter, even though

there may be a risk of damaging the helicopter’s drive

train, because:

it is vital that YOU ensure

that the helicopter cannot possibly

move off by itself in an uncontrolled manner.

The cost of repairing a clutch, a gearbox or even the

motor itself is negligible compared with the damage

which a model helicopter can cause if its spinning rotor

blades are allowed to wreak havoc.

Make sure that nobody else is standing

in the primary hazard zone around the helicopter.

You must never switch abruptly from idle to the ﬂ ight set-

ting by suddenly increasing system rotational speed, as

this would cause the rotor to accelerate quickly, resulting

This diagram only shows the

change in the hover point, i. e. col-

lective pitch minimum and maxi-

mum have been left at -100% and

+100% respectively.

+100%

100%

OUTPUT

234 51

Control travel

Continue adjusting these settings until you really do

achieve constant main rotor speed over the full control

range between hover and climb.

The descent adjustment should now be carried out from

a safe height by fully reducing collective pitch to place

the model in a descent from forward ﬂ ight; adjust the col-

lective pitch minimum value (Point 1) so that the model

descends at an angle of 60 … 80°. This is done on the

“Collective pitch” graphic page by moving the vertical

line to Point 1 using the collective pitch stick, and adjust-

ing the value accordingly using the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key.

As an example, this diagram

shows the changes in the collec-

tive pitch minimum value only.

+100%

100%

OUTPUT

234 51

Control travel

Hover

point

Once the model descends reliably as described, adjust

the value for “Throttle minimum” - the value of Point 1 on

the graph of the “Ch 1 ¼ throttle” mixer - so that system

rotational speed neither increases nor declines. This

completes the set-up procedure for throttle and collec-

tive pitch.

103

For your notes

104 Program description: helicopter mixers / auto-rotation settings

Helicopter mixers

Auto-rotation settings

Auto-rotation allows full-size and model helicopters to

land safely in a crisis, i. e. if the power plant should fail.

It can also be used if the tail rotor should fail, in which

case cutting the motor and carrying out an auto-rotation

landing is the only possible way of avoiding a high-

speed uncontrollable rotation around the vertical axis,

invariably terminating in a catastrophic crash. And that is

the reason why switching INTO auto-rotation occurs with

zero delay.

When you switch to the auto-rotation phase the helicop-

ter mixers change as shown in this screen shot:

tail

ptch

thro

Autorot

gyro 0%

inp8 0%

–90%

During an auto-rotation descent the main rotor is not

driven by the motor; it is kept spinning only by the

airﬂ ow through the rotor disc caused by the speed of the

descent. The rotational energy stored in the still spinning

rotor can be consumed to allow the machine to ﬂ are out,

but this can only be done once. For this reason “autos”

are only likely to be successful if the pilot has plenty of

experience in handling model helicopters, and has also

set up the appropriate functions with great care.

Once you have sufﬁ cient experience you should practise

auto-rotation landings at regular intervals, not only so

that you can demonstrate your all-round ﬂ ying skill by

ﬂ ying the manoeuvre in competitions, but also so that

you are in a position to land the helicopter undamaged

from a great height if the motor should fail. For this

purpose the program provides a range of adjustment fa-

cilities which are designed to help you ﬂ y your helicopter

in its unpowered state. Please note that the auto-rotation

setting takes the form of a complete fourth ﬂ ight phase,

for which all the adjustment facilities are available which

can be varied separately for all ﬂ ight phases, especially

trims, collective pitch curve settings etc.

ptch (Collective pitch curve (Ch1 ¼ pitch))

In powered ﬂ ight the maximum blade pitch angle is

limited by the motor power which is available; however,

in auto-rotation the angle is only limited by the point

at which the airﬂ ow over the main rotor blades breaks

away. Nevertheless, to provide sufﬁ cient upthrust even

when rotational speed is falling off, it is necessary to

set a greater maximum collective pitch value. Touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to select

the graph page of “Collective pitch”, and then move the

vertical line to Point 5 using the transmitter stick. Start

by setting a value which is about 10 to 20% higher

than your normal collective pitch maximum. Do NOT

set a much higher value compared with normal ﬂ ight

initially, because collective pitch control will then differ

too greatly from the machine’s usual response after

you have thrown the switch. The danger is that you will

over-control the helicopter, and it may balloon up again

during the ﬂ are following the auto-rotation descent. If

this happens, the rotational speed of the main rotor will

quickly decline to the point where it collapses, and the

helicopter ends up crashing to the ground from a consid-

erable height. Later, after a few trial autos, you may wish

to adjust the value again.

Under certain circumstances the collective pitch mini-

mum setting may also differ from the normal ﬂ ight set-

ting; this depends on your piloting style for normal ﬂ ying.

In any case you must set a sufﬁ ciently generous collec-

tive pitch minimum value at Point 1 to ensure that your

model can be brought from forward ﬂ ight at moderate

speed into a descent of around 60 ... 70° when collec-

tive pitch is reduced to minimum. Most helicopter pilots

already use such a setting for normal ﬂ ying, and if this

applies to you, you can simply adopt the same value.

If you normally allow your model to “fall” at a shallower

angle, increase the value for “Point 1”, and vice versa.

Approach angle

under varying wind

conditions.

Approach angle

in moderate

wind

no wind

45°

60°

75°

in strong

wind

For auto-rotation the collective pitch stick itself may not

be positioned right at the bottom of its travel; typically it

will be between the hover position and the bottom end-

point, giving the pilot scope for correction if necessary,

i. e. the chance to adjust the model’s pitch inclination

using the pitch-axis control.

You can shorten the approach by pulling back slightly on

the pitch-axis stick and gently reducing collective pitch,

or alternatively extend the approach by pushing forward

on the pitch-axis stick and gently increasing collective

pitch.

Throttle (throttle curve)

In a competition the pilot is expected to cut the motor

completely, but for practice purposes this is certainly

inconvenient, as after every practice “auto” landing you

would have to start the motor again.

105

Program description: helicopter mixers / auto-rotation settings

For practice, then, you should set the value in this line

so that the motor runs at a reliable idle during auto-

rotation, but without the clutch engaging, so that you

can open the throttle immediately to recover from an

emergency; for an electric helicopter the motor should

be reliably “off”.

Tail rotor (static torque compensation)

For normal ﬂ ying the tail rotor is set up in such a way

that it compensates for motor torque when the helicop-

ter is hovering. This means that it already generates

a certain amount of thrust even in its neutral position.

The level of thrust is then varied by the tail rotor control

system, and also by the various mixers which provide all

manner of torque compensation, while the tail rotor trim

is also used to compensate for varying weather condi-

tions, ﬂ uctuations in system rotational speed and other

inﬂ uences.

However, in an auto-rotation descent the main rotor

spins according to the windmill principle, i. e. it is not

driven by the motor, and therefore there is no torque

effect for which compensation is required, i. e. which

the tail rotor would have to correct. For this reason all

the appropriate mixers are automatically switched off in

auto-rotation mode.

However, the basic tail rotor setting therefore has to be

different for auto-rotation, as the compensatory thrust

described above is no longer required:

Stop the motor and place the helicopter horizontal on

the ground. With the transmitter and receiving system

switched on, select the “Auto-rotation” ﬂ ight phase.

Fold both tail rotor blades down and change the blade

pitch angle to zero degrees in the “Tail rotor” line. Viewed

from the rear, the tail rotor blades should now lie parallel

to each other.

Depending on the friction and running resistance of the

gearbox, you may ﬁ nd that the fuselage still yaws slightly

in an auto-rotation descent. If necessary, the relatively

slight torque which causes this effect must then be

corrected by adjusting the tail rotor blade pitch angle.

This value will always be a small ﬁ gure between zero

degrees and a pitch angle opposed to the direction of

tail rotor pitch required for normal ﬂ ight.

106 Program description: free mixers

General notes regarding freely programmable mixers

The two menus “Fixed-wing mixers” and “Helicopter

mixers”, as described on the preceding pages, contain

a wide range of ready-programmed coupling functions.

The basic meaning of mixers has already been ex-

plained on page 88, together with the principle on which

they work. In the following section you will ﬁ nd informa-

tion relating to “free mixers”:

In addition to the pre-programmed mixers mentioned

above, the mx-16 HoTT offers three freely program-

mable linear mixers which can be used in every model

memory; their inputs and outputs can be selected to suit

your exact requirements.

Any control function (1 to 8), or what is known as a

“switch channel” (see below), can be assigned as the

input signal of a “free mixer”. The signal present at the

control channel, and passed to the mixer input, is deter-

mined by the transmitter control and any control charac-

teristics as deﬁ ned, for example, in the “D/R Expo” and

“Transmitter control settings” menus.

The mixer output acts upon a freely selectable control

channel (1 to max. 8 - depending on receiver type).

Before the signal is passed to the associated servo, the

only inﬂ uences which can act upon it are those deﬁ ned

in the “Servo settings” menu, i. e. the servo reverse,

centre and travel functions.

One control function can be set up to affect several

mixer inputs simultaneously, if, for example, you wish to

arrange several mixers to operate in parallel.

Conversely it is possible for several mixer outputs to

affect one and the same control channel.

The following description of the free mixers includes

examples of such arrangements.

In software terms the default setting for any “free mixer”

is that it is constantly switched on, but it is also possible

to assign an optional ON / OFF switch to it. However,

since there are so many functions to which switches can

potentially be assigned, you should take care not to as-

sign dual functions to particular switches accidentally.

The two important mixer parameters are as follows:

… the • mixer ratio, which deﬁ nes the extent to which

the input signal acts on the output of the control

channel which is programmed as the mixer output.

… the • neutral point, which is also termed the

“offset”. The offset is that point on the travel of a

transmitter control (stick, rotary proportional knob

CTRL 6 … 8 and SW 1 … 9) at which the mixer has

no inﬂ uence on the control channel connected to its

output. Normally this is the centre point of the trans-

mitter control, but the offset can be placed at any

point on the control’s travel.

Switch channel “S” as mixer input

In some cases a constant control signal is all that is

required as the mixer output; a typical application would

be for slight up-elevator trim when an aero-tow coupling

is closed - completely independently of the normal

elevator trim.

If you then assign a switch, you can switch to and fro

between the two mixer end-points, and adjust the sup-

plementary elevator trim deﬂ ection by altering the mixer

ratio.

To identify this special arrangement, this mixer input

control function is designated “S” for “switch channel”

in the software. If you do not want the “target channel”

to be affected by the “normal” transmitter control, the

control can be de-coupled from the function input of

the associated control channel by entering “free” in the

“Transmitter control settings” menu; see pages 74

and 76. The following menu description again includes

an example which makes this function clear.

Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand

touch-key to leaf through to the “Free mixers” menu

point of the multi-function menu:

mod. mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

base sett.

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

mod. mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

free mixer

base sett.

contr set.

heli mixer

swashp.mix

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to open this menu point.

107

Program description: free mixers

control functions 5 … 8 for a ﬁ xed-wing model, or 5, 7

and 8 for a model helicopter, in the “Transmitter control

settings” menu.

“S” for switch channel

The letter “S” (switch channel) in the “from” column has

the effect of passing a constant input signal to the mixer

input, e. g. in order to apply a little extra up-elevator trim

when an aero-tow coupling is closed, as mentioned

earlier.

Once you have assigned a control function or the letter

“S” in the “from” column, an additional …

“to”

… appears at the bottom edge of the screen.

In the input ﬁ eld of this column you can deﬁ ne the

control channel as the mixer destination, i. e. the mixer

output. At the same time additional ﬁ elds appear at the

bottom line of the screen:

typ fro to

c1 el G1

In this example three mixers have already been deﬁ ned.

The second mixer (“Brake ¼ el”) is already familiar to

us from the “Fixed-wing mixers” menu. As a general

rule you should always start by using these pre-pro-

grammed mixers if possible.

However, if you need asymmetrical mixer ratios on both

sides of centre, or have to offset the mixer neutral point,

then you should set or leave the pre-set mixers at “0”,

and program one of the free mixers instead.

Regardless of the selected model type, three linear mix-

ers are available for each of the twenty model memories,

with the additional possibility of setting up non-linear

characteristic curves.

In this ﬁ rst section we will concentrate on the program-

ming procedure for the ﬁ rst screen page. We will then

move on to the method of programming mixer ratios, as

found on the second screen page of this menu.

The basic programming procedure

Use the arrow buttons 1. cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the desired mixer.

Brieﬂ y press the central 2. SET button of the right-

hand touch-key: the input ﬁ eld in the column marked

“fro(m)” at the bottom edge of the screen is now high-

lighted (black background).

Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to 3.

deﬁ ne the mixer input “fro(m)”.

Touch the central 4. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key; switch to the “to” column using the f button of

the left or right-hand touch-key, then touch the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key once more:

the input ﬁ eld “to” is now highlighted.

Use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key to 5.

deﬁ ne the mixer input “to”.

Touch the central 6. SET button of the right-hand touch-

key, and (optionally) use the e button of the left or

right-hand touch-key to move to the column marked

“Type” at the bottom edge of the screen; you can now

include the Ch1 … Ch 4 trim lever for the mixer input

signal (“Tr” for trim) …

… and / or use the 7. f arrow button of the left or right-

hand touch-key to move to the column marked with

the switch symbol at the bottom edge of the

Free mixers

Linear mixers

screen, touch the central SET button of the right-

hand touch-key again, and assign a switch if desired,

as described on page 39.

Use the arrow button8. f of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move to the => column, then touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key.

Deﬁ ne the mixer ratios on the second screen page.9.

Press the central 10. ESC button of the left-hand touch-

key to switch back to the ﬁ rst page.

“fro(m)”

After brieﬂ y pressing the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key, select the highlighted ﬁ eld of the

selected mixer line using the arrow buttons of the same

touch-key, and select one of the control functions 1 …

8 or S.

In the interests of clarity, the control functions 1 … 4 are

abbreviated as follows when dealing with the ﬁ xed-wing

mixers:

c1 Throttle / airbrake stick

ar Aileron stick

el Elevator stick

rd Rudder stick

… and in the Heli program:

1 Throttle / collective pitch stick

2 Roll stick

3 Pitch-axis stick

4 Tail rotor stick

Note:

Don’t forget to assign transmitter controls to the selected

108 Program description: free mixers

Additional special features of free mixers

If you set up a mixer whose input is the same as its

output, e. g. “c1 ¼ c1”, exotic results can be obtained

in conjunction with the option of switching a free mixer

on and off. You will ﬁ nd one typical example of this on

pages 150 … 152.

Before we come to setting mixer ratios, we have to

consider what happens if a mixer input is allowed to act

on the pre-set coupling of aileron servos, ﬂ ap servos or

collective pitch servos:

Fixed-wing models:•

Depending on the number of wing servos set in the

“Aileron / Flap” line of the “Basic settings” menu,

receiver outputs 2 and 5 are reserved for the aileron

servos, and outputs 6 and 7 for the two ﬂ ap servos,

as special mixers are assigned to these functions.

If mixer outputs are programmed to this type of cou-

pled function, you have to consider their effect on the

associated pair of wing ﬂ aps, according to the “re-

ceiving” control channel:

Mixer Wirkung

NN * ¼ 2 Servo pair 2 + 5 responds with aileron

function

NN * ¼ 5 Servo pair 2 + 5 responds with ﬂ ap

function

NN * ¼ 6 Servo pair 6 + 7 responds with ﬂ ap

function

NN * ¼ 7 Servo pair 6 + 7 responds with aileron

function

Model helicopters:•

Depending on the type of helicopter, up to four ser-

vos may be employed for collective pitch control;

these will be connected to receiver outputs 1, 2, 3

and 5. The transmitter software links them together to

provide the functions collective pitch, roll and pitch-

axis.

It is not advisable to mix one of the transmitter con-

trols into these occupied channels using the free mix-

ers available outside the “Heli mixers” menu, as you

may inadvertently generate some extremely complex

and unwanted interactions. “Collective pitch trim via a

separate transmitter control” counts as one of the few

exceptions to this rule; see example 2 at page 111.

Important note:

When dealing with the interaction of multiple mixers

on one control channel, it is essential to remember

that the mixed travels of the individual mixers are

cumulative when multiple stick commands are made

simultaneously, and this brings a danger that the

servo concerned may strike its mechanical end-

stops. If you encounter this problem, simply reduce

the servo travel in the “Servo settings” menu, and /

or reduce the mixer values. However, if you do not

wish to reduce the travels in this way, because this

method would unnecessarily reduce the control

travels you normally use, then you may prefer an

alternative method of preventing the servos striking

their end-stops: set a suitable travel limit in the

“TRAVEL -/+” lines of the “RX SERVO” display page

of the “Telemetry” menu.

Erasing mixers

If you need to erase a mixer that you have already

deﬁ ned, use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-

hand touch-key to select its line, then use the arrow but-

tons ef to move to the “from” column before touching

the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. The

ﬁ eld in the “from” column of the mixer to be erased is

now highlighted: simultaneously touch the two arrow but-

tons cd or ef of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR).

Mixer switches

In our example above, a physical switch “2” and the

control switch “C1” have been assigned to the two linear

mixers 1 and 2, and switch “3” to mixer 3.

The switch symbol to the right of the switch number

shows the current status of that switch.

Any mixer to which no switch has been assigned in

the column marked by the switch symbol at the

bottom of the screen is permanently switched on.

“Type” (including the trim)

If you wish, and if you are using one of the primary

control functions 1 … 4, you can set the trim value of

the digital trim lever for the associated stick to affect the

mixer input. This is accomplished by touching the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key, then using its

arrow buttons to select “Tr” in the highlighted ﬁ eld.

Note:

The effect of the Ch 1 trim lever on the mixer output var-

ies according to the function which has been assigned

to it in the “Basic settings” menu (pages 56 and 64) in

the “Motor at Ch 1” column for ﬁ xed-wing models.

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

109

Program description: free mixers

“Transmitter control settings” menu

trv

ctrl 7

free

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

free

Note:

If you assign a transmitter control to input 7 and select

two ﬂ ap servos, input 7 is automatically de-coupled to

avoid possible ﬂ ap malfunctions.

Start by rotating the transmitter control to its left-hand

end-point, and adjust the landing ﬂ ap linkages so that

they are in the neutral position at this setting. If you now

turn the knob to the right, the ﬂ aps should deﬂ ect down;

if they move up, you must reverse the direction of servo

rotation.

Now we turn to the ﬁ rst mixer on the screen on page

107; this is the mixer “6 ¼ el”, to which switch 2 has

been assigned:

typ fro to

c1 el C1

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to open the second screen page:

Mixer ratios and mixer neutral point

Now that we have explained the wide-ranging nature of

the mixer functions, we can move on to the method of

programming linear and non-linear mixer curves.

For each of the three available mixers the mixer curves

are programmed on a second page of the screen dis-

play. Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the desired mixer line, use its arrow

buttons to move to the right-hand column (=>), then

touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to switch to the graphic page.

Setting up linear mixer values

In the next section we will describe a typical practical

application, by deﬁ ning a linear mixer curve intended to

solve the following problem:

We have a powered model with two ﬂ ap servos connect-

ed to receiver outputs 6 and 7, which were programmed

as “… 2FL” in the “Ail / Flap” line of the “Basic settings”

menu. These control surfaces are to be employed as

landing ﬂ aps, i. e. when the associated transmitter

control is operated, they deﬂ ect down only. However, this

ﬂ ap movement requires an elevator trim correction to

counteract the resultant pitch trim change.

In the “Transmitter control settings” menu, assign

the rotary proportional control CTRL 7 to input 6. The

control assigned to input 6 now operates the two servos

connected to receiver outputs 6 and 7 in the standard

way, operating as simple wing ﬂ aps.

MIX1 6 el off

If this display appears, you have not activated the mixer

by operating the assigned external switch - in this case

“2”. To correct this, operate the switch:

MIX1 6 el

trv 0% 0%

0%offs

ASYSYM

The full-height vertical line in the graph represents the

current position of the transmitter control assigned to

input 6. (In the above graph this is located at the left-

hand edge because CTRL 7 is at its left-hand end-point,

as already mentioned.) The full-length horizontal line

shows the mixer ratio, which currently has the value of

zero over the whole of stick travel; this means that the

elevator will not “follow” when the ﬂ aps are operated.

The ﬁ rst step is to deﬁ ne the offset (mixer neutral point).

To do this press the arrow button d of the left or right-

hand touch-key and move to the “Offs” line:

110 Program description: free mixers

MIX1 6 el

trv 0% 0%

0%offs

SELSTO

The dotted vertical line indicates the position of the

mixer neutral point (“offset”), i. e. that point along the

control travel at which the mixer has NO inﬂ uence on the

channel connected to its output. By default this point is

set to the centre position.

However, in our example the neutral (retracted) position

of the ﬂ aps is located at the left-hand end-stop of the

rotary proportional control, and in this position the eleva-

tor must not be affected. We therefore have to shift the

mixer neutral point exactly to that position. If you have

not already done so, turn the control - in our example

this is CTRL 7 - to the left-hand end-stop and touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. The dot-

ted vertical line now moves to this point - the new mixer

neutral point - which always retains the “OUTPUT” value

of zero in accordance with the mixer deﬁ nition.

As it happens, this setting is difﬁ cult to show in a

screen shot, so we will change the “offset” value to

only -75%.

MIX1 6 el

trv 0% 0%

–75%offs

SELSTO

Notes:

If you wish, you can move the offset value back to •

centre or otherwise adjust it as follows: select SEL

using the arrow button f of the left or right-hand

touch-key, followed by brieﬂ y pressing the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key; you can now

use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-

key to move the offset value.

You can also return the mixer neutral point to cen-•

tre automatically as follows: select SEL using the ar-

row button f of the left or right-hand touch-key, then

simultaneously press the two arrow buttons cd or

ef of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR).

Symmetrical mixer ratios

The next step is to deﬁ ne the mixer values above and

below the mixer neutral point, starting from its current

position. Use the arrow button c of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move to the “Travel” line: if necessary, use

the arrow buttons ef of the left or right-hand touch-

key to select the SYM ﬁ eld, so that you can set the

mixer value symmetrically relative to the offset point you

have just programmed. Touch the central SET button

of the right-hand touch-key, then set the values in the

two highlighted ﬁ elds within the range -150% to +150%

using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key.

Remember that the set mixer value always refers to

the input signal from the associated transmitter control

(control signal)! Setting a negative mixer value reverses

the direction of the mixer.

Simultaneously pressing the two arrow buttons cd or

ef of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) erases the

mixer ratio in the highlighted ﬁ eld.

The “optimum” value for our purposes will inevitably

need to be established through a ﬂ ight testing pro-

gramme.

MIX1 6 el

trv +20% +20%

–75%offs

ASYSYM

Since we previously set the mixer neutral point to -75%

of control travel, the elevator (“el”) will already exhibit a

(slight) “down-elevator effect” at the neutral point of the

landing ﬂ aps, and this, of course, is not wanted. To cor-

rect this we shift the mixer neutral point back to -100%

of control travel, as described earlier.

MIX1 6 el

trv +20% +20%

–100%offs

SEL

STO

If you were now to reset the offset from -75% to, say, 0%

control travel, by selecting the SEL ﬁ eld using the arrow

buttons f of the left or right-hand touch-key, and then

brieﬂ y pressing the two arrow buttons cd or ef of

the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) simultaneously, the

screen would look like this:

111

Program description: free mixers

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

MIX1 6 el

trv +20% +20%

0%offs

STO SEL

Asymmetrical mixer ratios

For many applications it is necessary to set up different

mixer values on either side of the mixer neutral point.

Start by resetting the offset of the mixer used in our

example (“6 ¼ el”) to 0%, as shown in the picture

above. Now use the arrow button f of the left or right-

hand touch-key to select the ASY ﬁ eld, and then touch

the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. If

you now turn the rotary proportional control CTRL 7 -

assigned in our example to input 6 - in the appropriate

direction, the mixer ratio for each direction of control can

be set separately, i. e. to left and right of the selected

offset point using the arrow buttons of the right-hand

touch-key:

MIX1 6 el

trv +20%

0%offs

SYM ASY

+55%

Note:

If you are setting up a switch channel mixer of the “S

¼ NN *” type, you must operate the assigned switch to

achieve this effect. The vertical line then jumps between

the left and right sides.

Examples:

The switch SW3 has already been assigned to con-1.

trol channel 8 in the “Transmitter control settings”

menu, in order to open and close the aero-tow re-

lease.

trv

100% 100%

I8 100% 100%

ctrl 7

free

In the meantime you have carried out a few aero-tow

ﬂ ights, which showed that you always needed to hold

in slight up-elevator during the tow. You now wish to

set the elevator servo (connected to receiver output

3) to slight “up” trim when the tow release is closed.

In the screen display familiar from page 107 we have

set up the third linear mixer to accomplish this, using

the switch channel “S” as the mixer input. Now move

the selected switch to the OFF position, and move to

the …

typ fro to

c1 el C1

… mixer set-up page.

Use the arrow button d of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the “Offs” line, then touch the cen-

tral SET button of the right-hand touch-key.

According to the travel setting selected in the “Trans-

mitter control settings” menu and the switch posi-

tion, the offset value now jumps to +X% or -X%, e. g.:

MIX3 S el

trv 0% 0%

+100%offs

SET

STO

Use the arrow button c of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move to the “Travel” line, then touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. After

moving the selected switch to the mixer ON position,

set the required mixer ratio in the now highlighted

value ﬁ elds using the arrow buttons of the right-hand

touch-key.

MIX3 S el

trv

+100%offs

ASY

SYM

+10% +10%

The following example applies to model helicopters:2.

In the Helicopter program you may wish to assign

one of the rotary proportional controls (CTRL 6 … 8)

to the collective pitch trim function. This is the pro-

cedure: in the “Transmitter control settings” menu

assign one of these two transmitter controls to input

“E8”. Now simply deﬁ ne a free mixer “8 ¼ 1” with a

symmetrical mixer ratio of, say, 25%. Due to the inter-

nal coupling, this transmitter control now acts equally

112 Program description: Swashplate mixers - model helicopter

SP – MIXER

ptch

roll

nick

+61%

In the “Swashplate” line of the “Basic settings” menu

you have already deﬁ ned the number of servos which

are installed in your helicopter to provide collective pitch

control; see page 67. With this information the transmit-

ter software automatically superimposes the functions

for roll, pitch-axis and collective pitch as required, i. e.

you do not need to deﬁ ne any additional mixers yourself.

If you have a model helicopter which only has a single

collective pitch servo, the “Swashplate mixer” menu

point is - of course - superﬂ uous, since the three swash-

plate servos for collective pitch, pitch-axis and roll are

controlled independently of each other, i. e. no mixers

are used. In this case the swashplate mixer menu does

not appear in the multi-function list. With all other swash-

plate linkages employing 2 … 4 collective pitch servos,

the mixer ratios and directions are set up by default, as

can be seen in the screen shot above. The pre-set value

is +61% in each case, but the value can be varied within

the range -100% to +100% using the arrow buttons of

the right-hand touch-key, after touching the central SET

button of the same touch-key.

Simultaneously pressing the two arrow buttons cd or

ef of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the

mixer input in the highlighted ﬁ eld to the default value of

+61%.

If the swashplate control system (collective pitch, roll

and pitch-axis) does not follow the transmitter sticks in

Swashplate mixers

Collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis mixers

the proper manner, then the ﬁ rst step is to change the

mixer directions (“+” or “-”), before you attempt to correct

the directions of servo rotation.

Note:

Ensure that the servos do not strike their mechanical

end-stops if you change the mixer values.

on all the collective pitch servos you are using, with-

out affecting the throttle servo.

MIX1 8 1

trv +25% +25%

0%offs

ASYSYM

113

Program description: servo position

Servo display

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key

to leaf through to the “Servo display” menu point of the

multi-function menu:

mod.mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

base sett.

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

servo disp

Open the menu point by touching the central SET button

of the right-hand touch-key.

However, this visual display of the current servo posi-

tions can be called up not only by selecting this menu,

but also directly by simultaneously pressing the buttons

ef of the left-hand touch-key from the transmitter’s

basic display, and also from almost any menu position.

Touching the central ESC button of the left-hand touch-

key returns you to your starting point again.

–100%

+100%

The current position of any servo is displayed in bar-

chart form, which takes into account the transmitter con-

trol and servo settings, the Dual-Rate / Expo functions,

the interaction of all active mixers etc., within the range

-150% to +150% of normal travel. 0% corresponds

exactly to the servo centre position. The servo display

provides a quick method of checking your settings, with-

out having to switch on the receiving system. However,

this does not relieve you of the need to check all your

programming steps carefully on the model before oper-

ating it for the ﬁ rst time, as this is the only safe method

of excluding possible programming errors.

The display is based on the following scheme for

ﬁ xed-wing models:

Bar 1 = throttle / brake servo

Bar 2 = aileron or left aileron

Bar 3 = elevator

Bar 4 = rudder

Bar 5 = right aileron

Bar 6 = (left) ﬂ ap / free channel

Bar 7 = right ﬂ ap / free channel

Bar 8 = free channel / second elevator servo

and for model helicopters:

Bar 1 = collective pitch or roll (2) or pitch-axis (2) ser-

Bar 2 = roll (1) servo

Bar 3 = pitch-axis (1) servo

Bar 4 = tail rotor servo (gyro)

Bar 5 = pitch-axis (2) servo / free channel

Bar 6 = throttle servo or speed controller

Bar 7 = gyro gain / free channel

Bar 8 = speed governor / free channel

Note:

Please bear in mind that the servo display refers exclu-

sively to the original servo sequence, i. e. it does NOT

take into account any output swapping, as can be car-

ried out in the “Receiver output” sub-menu in the “Basic

settings” menu, page 60 / 69.

114 Program description: basic settings

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key

to leaf through to the “basic settings” menu point of the

multi-function menu:

mod. mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

base sett.

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to open the menu point:

Batt type

Batt warning

Touch Sense

Contrast

Ni-MH

Display light

RF Country

Voice volume

4.7V

Euro

unlim

Beep volume 3

In this menu you can enter basic settings which are

speciﬁ c to the transmitter.

Note:

Settings in this menu only need to be entered once, and

apply to the whole transmitter. This means that the last

valid settings always appear when you call up this menu

from another model memory.

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the appropriate line, then touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. The

value ﬁ eld is now highlighted (black background), and

you can use the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-

key to alter the default value. Pressing the central SET

button once more concludes the entry process.

Battery type

Batt type

Batt warning

Contrast

Touch Sense

4.7v

Ni-MH

Display light unlim

In this line you inform the transmitter whether its power

is to be drawn from a four-cell NiMH battery or a single-

cell LiPo battery. The voltage range offered in the (next)

line “Battery warning threshold” will vary according to

this setting.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to NiMH.

Battery warning threshold

Batt type

Batt warning

Contrast

Touch Sense

4.7v

Ni-MH

Display light unlim

In this line you can enter any voltage you like …

battery

needs

charging

… within the range 4.5 to 5.5 V (NiMH battery) or 3.4 to

4.2 V (LiPo battery) - according to your choice of bat-

tery type - in increments of 0.1 Volt. However, never be

tempted to enter too low a value here, to ensure that you

always have ample time to land your model safely if a

battery warning should be triggered.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to 4.7 V or 3.4 V respectively.

Touch sensitivity

Batt type

Batt warning

Contrast

Touch Sense

4.7v

Ni-MH

Display light unlim

In this line you can select the touch sensitivity of the

touch-keys within the range 1 to 10.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to “2”.

Contrast

You can adjust the contrast of the mx-16 HoTT’s in-

tegral screen to optimise its legibility in varying weather

and temperatures:

#01

3:33h

stop

flt

0:00

5.5V

50%

5.2V HoTT

Basic settings

115

Program description: basic settings

#01

3:33h

stop

flt

0:00

5.5V

50%

5.2V HoTT

This is accomplished by selecting the “Contrast” line

using the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key:

Batt type

Batt warning

Contrast

Touch Sense

4.7v

Ni-MH

Display light unlim

Now brieﬂ y touch the central SET button of the right-

hand touch-key: the value ﬁ eld is now highlighted, and

you can adjust the screen contrast within the range +/-

20 using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key:

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to “0”.

Screen backlight

Batt type

Batt warning

Contrast

Touch Sense

4.7v

Ni-MH

Display light unlim

This line determines how long the screen backlighting

remains on when you switch the transmitter on, and

after the last button-press.

The available values are “unlimited” “30 s”, 60 s” and

“120 s”.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to “unlimited”.

Country setting

Batt warning

Contrast

Touch Sense

4.7v

Display light unlim

RF Country Euro

The purpose of the country setting is to fulﬁ l the require-

ments of various directives (FCC, ETSI, IC, etc.). For

example, radio control systems operated in France must

be set to a restricted frequency band. For this reason

the transmitter’s country setting MUST be set to

“France” mode before the system is used in that

country. It is prohibited to use the Universal / EURO

mode in France.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to “Euro”.

Voice volume

Contrast

Touch Sense

Display light unlim

RF Country Euro

Voice volume 3

In this line you can deﬁ ne the volume of the speech out-

put which is generated through earphones; the available

range is “0” to “10”.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to “3”.

Beep volume

Contrast 0

Display light unlim

RF Country Euro

Voice volume 3

Beep volume 3

This line determines the volume of the transmitter’s

internal sounder within the range “0” to “6”.

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the value in

the highlighted ﬁ eld to “4”.

116 Program description: Fail-Safe

FAIL SAFE

Pos

hold

12345678

Delay 0.25s STO

The inherently higher operational security of the HoTT

system compared with classic PPM technology is due

to the ability of the HoTT receiver’s integral micro-proc-

essor to process the signals from “its” transmitter ex-

clusively, and also to process any “dirty” control signals

which it picks up. The receiver constantly stores the

latest valid signals, and invalid signals are automatically

replaced by the stored signals - but only if the control

signal is seriously inaccurate or even damaged, e. g. due

to interference from an outside source. This process is

dependent upon various settings which are described

later in this section. For example, the receiver sup-

presses brief interference such as ﬁ eld strength “holes”

and similar effects which would otherwise result in the

familiar “glitches”. When this happens, the red LED on

the receiver lights up.

If you have not yet programmed any Fail-Safe settings

in the currently active model memory, the following

warning display will appear in the basic display for a few

seconds when you switch the transmitter on:

fail safe

setup

t.b.d

Programming

The “Fail-Safe” function determines the receiver’s beha-

viour when interference occurs in the transmission from

transmitter to receiver. The receiver outputs 1 … 8 can

optionally …

maintain (“hold”) their current position:1.

If interference should occur, all servos programmed

to “hold” mode remain at the position last assessed

by the receiver as correct until such time as a new,

correct control signal arrives at the receiver, or

move to a user-selectable position (“Pos”) if interfer-2.

ence occurs, after a “delay” time has elapsed.

Use the arrow buttons ef of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the desired servo socket 1 to 8 (z),

then touch the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key to switch between “hold” ( ) and “position” ( )

mode:

FAIL SAFE

Pos

12345678

STO

hold

Delay 0.25s

Now select the “Delay” option at bottom left of the

screen using the arrow buttons ef of the left or right-

hand touch-key …

FAIL SAFE

Pos

12345678

STO

hold

Delay 0.25s

… touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-

key, and use its arrow buttons to select your preferred

delay period from the four on offer (0.25 s, 0.5 s, 0.75 s

and 1 s).

Simultaneously pressing the arrow buttons cd or ef

of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) resets the high-

lighted ﬁ eld to the default value of 0.75 s.

Now use the arrow buttons ef of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the STO ﬁ eld at bottom right of the

screen; SIMULTANEOUSLY move the servos for which

you have selected Position mode to the desired posi-

tions using the associated transmitter controls.

A touch of the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key stores these positions in the receiver as the

Fail-Safe settings, so that it can revert to these if interfer-

ence should strike.

The transmitter informs you of the stored data by brieﬂ y

displaying:

FAIL SAFE

Pos

12345678

STO

Position

stored

hold

Delay 0.25s

Caution:

We strongly recommend that you make use of the

safety potential of this option by at least setting the

throttle position (glow-powered models) to idle, or

the electric motor to stop, if a fail-safe event should

be triggered. Model helicopters should be pro-

grammed to “hold”. This simple precaution ensures

that the model is much less likely to cause havoc

and cause property damage or personal injury.

Fail-Safe

117

Program description: Telemetry menu

Telemetry

The “Telemetry” menu is used to call up and program

transmitter and receiver data, and data generated by

optional telemetry sensors (see Appendix), in real time.

Note:

If you register your product under http://www.graupner.

de/en/service/product_registration you will automatically

be informed about new updates by e-mail.

Receiver data are transmitted to the transmitter via the

HoTT receiver’s integral downlink channel. Please note

the following important points in this regard:

Important information:

These instructions cover the functions available at •

the time of going to press.

As mentioned in the sections entitled “Binding mul-•

tiple receivers” on pages 61 and 70, it is possible to

bind more than one receiver per model. However, in

subsequent operations only the receiver which

was bound last is able to make a telemetry con-

nection to the transmitter. On the other hand, this

also means that only the last bound receiver can be

addressed using the Telemetry menu. You may there-

fore need to change the binding sequence before you

can enter settings which relate to a particular receiv-

er.

When setting up the radio control system, please •

ensure at all times that the transmitter aerial is

an adequate distance from the receiver aerials.

A safe distance is about one metre. If you ne-

glect this, you risk interference with the downlink

channel, and consequent malfunctions.

Since the transmitter and receiver only exchange te-•

lemetry data after each fourth data packet, data

transmission inevitably requires a certain amount of

time, which means that there will be some delay in

responding to button-presses and set-up changes.

This does not constitute an error.

Changes to model and sensor programming must •

only be carried out when the model is on the ground.

Do not make any alterations unless the motor is

switched off and the ﬂ ight battery is disconnected.

If you ignore this, unwanted effects of programming

changes cannot be excluded.

For example, if you accidentally initiate an active ser-

vo test at the receiver, the model could crash and

cause personal injury or property damage. Please

see the Safety Notes on pages 3 … 6 of this manual

and the various individual instructions.

All settings which you enter using the “• Telemetry”

menu, such as Fail-Safe, servo direction, servo trav-

el, mixer and curve settings etc., are stored exclu-

sively in the receiver, and are therefore carried over

if you install the receiver in a different model. For this

reason we strongly recommend that you re-initial-

ise your HoTT receiver if you wish to use it in another

model; see “Reset” on page 32 and 33.

We therefore recommend that you program directions •

of servo rotation, servo travel, mixer and curve set-

tings using only the mx-16-speciﬁ c standard men-

us “Servo settings” (page 72), “Free mixers” (page

107) and “D/R Expo” (pages 82 and 84). If you ignore

this, the settings may overlap and interfere with each

other; in the most favourable case this can result in

confusion when operating the model, and in the least

favourable case it could cause problems.

The channel-mapping function of the •mx-16

HoTT’s integral “Telemetry” menu can be used to

share out control functions between multiple receiv-

ers in any way, or even to assign the same control

function to several receiver outputs; for example, you

may wish to operate each aileron with two servos in-

stead of just one, etc. Once again we strongly re-

commend that you act as cautiously as possible

when carrying out the programming.

One telemetry sensor can be connected to the Tele-

metry input of the following receivers: GR-12S HoTT

(Order No. 33505), GR-12 HoTT (Order No. 33506) and

GR-16 (Order No. 33508). Two telemetry sensors can

be connected to the HoTT GR-24 HoTT receiver (Order

No. 33512).

Since the system can be updated by the user, the as-

sociated “Telemetry” menus can constantly be kept up-

to-date, and expanded with the introduction of additional

functions or languages in future.

Before updating the transmitter software you should

always back up all occupied model memories to a

compatible laptop or PC using a standard commercially

available ﬁ ve-pole mini-USB lead, in order to avoid a

possible loss of data.

In addition to the back-ups mentioned above, ﬁ rmware

updates are transferred using the mini-USB port located

on the back of the transmitter, in conjunction with a PC

running the Windows XP, Vista or 7 operating system.

The programs required for this and related information

can be found in the Download area for the correspond-

ing products at the website www.graupner.de. We

always recommend that you load the latest ﬁ rmware into

your equipment, to ensure that your system is constantly

kept up-to-date.

118 Program description: Telemetry menu

Telemetry

The menus grouped together under the overall heading

“Telemetry” are called up from the basic display of the

mx-16 HoTT transmitter by holding the central ESC

button of the left-hand touch-key pressed in for about

three seconds. An alternative method of calling up this

menu, which also applies to the transmitter’s other

menus, is to brieﬂ y press the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key in the multi-function list:

mod. mem.

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

base sett.

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

Basic menu operation

In general terms the “Telemetry” menu is operated just

like the other menus of the mx-16 HoTT transmitter.

The few differences are described below:

You can switch between the individual pages of the

Telemetry menu using the arrow buttons ef of the

left or right-hand touch-key: you will ﬁ nd corresponding

direction indicators at top right of every screen page in

the form of angle brackets (< >); see illustrations. If only

one angle bracket is visible, then you are currently at the

ﬁ rst or last page. In this case it is only possible to switch

pages in the direction indicated by the angle bracket.

Menu lines in which parameters can be altered are

marked with an angle bracket preﬁ x (>). Pressing the

arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key

causes the “>” pointer to jump forward or back by one

line. Lines to which you cannot jump contain no user-

variable values.

If you wish to change a parameter, touch the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key to highlight the

parameter (black background)). Change the value within

the possible range using the arrow buttons of the right-

hand touch-key, and then press the SET button again

brieﬂ y to accept the value.

The method of returning to the basic display varies

depending on whether you called up the menu from

the multi-function list or from the basic display: you can

return to the basic display either by brieﬂ y pressing the

ESC button again, or by holding ESC pressed in for

about three seconds.

At this point you can use the arrow buttons cd of the

left or right touch-key to select the desired sub-menu.

However, if the message …

CAN‘T

RECEIVE

DATA

… appears instead of the desired sub-menu when you

touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key,

then the transmitter has no connection to a receiver. In

this case, switch your receiving system on, or re-bind

the receiver you wish to address, if this should not be

the last bound one; see “Important information” on the

previous page.

SETTING & DATA VIEW

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW

SIMPLE DATA VIEW

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

On the ﬁ rst screen page of the sub-menu “Setting &

Data View”, headed …

RX DATAVIEW

… you cannot enter any settings. This page is for infor-

mation purposes only:

RX DATAVIEW

S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C

L PACK TIME 00010msec

R-VOLT :05.0V

L.R-VOLT:04.5V

S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C

SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C

Value Explanation

S-QUA Signal quality in %

S-dBm Receive performance in dBm

S-STR Signal strength in %

R-TEM. Receiver temperature in °C

L PACK TIME Indicates the time in ms for which

the longest data packet was lost in

transmission between transmitter and

receiver

R-VOLT Current receiver operating voltage, in

Volt

SETTING & DATA VIEW

119

Program description: Telemetry menu

L.R-VOLT Lowest receiver operating voltage

since the last power-on, in Volt

SENSOR1 Shows the values of the optional

telemetry sensor 1 in Volt and °C

SENSOR2 Shows the values of the optional

telemetry sensor 2 in Volt and °C

Signal quality (S-QUA)

The signal quality (S-QUA) is sent “live” to the transmit-

ter via the receiver’s downlink channel, and shows the

signal strength in %.

Receive performance (S-dBm)

The receive performance (S-dBm) is displayed as a

negative value, i. e. a value approaching zero is the

highest value (= best reception). The lower the value

falls, the worse is the receive performance. This is an

important item of information, particularly when you are

carrying out a range-check before operating the model.

Note:

In the case of negative numbers the value is reversed:

the higher the number following the minus sign, the

lower the value.

Carry out a range-check as described on pages 62 and

70 before every ﬂ ight, and remember to simulate all the

servo movements which are likely to occur in the air.

In active range-check mode the range must be at least

ﬁ fty metres on the ground. To guarantee safe operation

of your model, a value no higher than -80 dBm must be

displayed in the “RX DATA” display under “S-dBm” at this

distance. If the value falls below this (e. g. -85 dBm), you

should under no circumstances ﬂ y your model. Instead

check the receiving system installation and the aerial

positions.

When operating a model this value should not fall below

-90 dBm; if it does, reduce the distance between the

pilot and the model. However, the audible range warn-

ing (beeping at one-second intervals) will normally be

triggered before this value is reached, in order to ensure

safe operation.

Signal strength (S-STR)

The value for signal strength (S-STR) is displayed in %.

An audible range warning (beeping at one-second inter-

vals) will always be generated as soon as the receiver

signal in the downlink channel is too weak. However,

since the transmitter has a much higher transmitting

power than the receiver, the model can still be operated

safely at this point. Nevertheless, in the interests of

safety the distance to the model should be reduced until

the audible warning ceases.

Receiver temperature (R-TEM.)

Ensure under all ﬂ ight conditions that the receiver stays

within its speciﬁ ed temperature range (ideally between

-10 and +55°C).

The limit values for receiver temperature after which

a warning occurs can be set in the “SERVO TEST”

sub-menu under “ALARM TEMP+” (50 … 80°C) and

“ALARM TEMP-” (-20 … +10°C). If the temperature

exceeds or falls below the set limit, an audible signal

(continuous beeping) is triggered, and “TEMP.E” is

displayed at top right in all the “RX” receiver sub-menus.

At the same time the R-TEM parameter is highlighted on

the “RX DATAVIEW” screen page.

Data packets (L PACK TIME)

This displays the longest period in ms in which data

packets were lost in transmission from the transmitter to

the receiver. In practice this means the longest time in

which the radio control system went into Fail-Safe mode.

Operating voltage (R-VOLT)

Check the receiver’s operating voltage constantly. If it is

too low, you must under no circumstances continue to

operate your model, and certainly not launch it.

The low receiver voltage warning can be adjusted within

the range 3.0 to 6.0 Volt in the “SERVO TEST” sub-menu

under “ALARM VOLT”. If the voltage falls below the

threshold, an audible signal (repeated double beep, long

/ short) is generated, and in all the receiver sub-menus

“RX …” you will see “VOLT.E” at top right. At the same

time the parameter “R-VOLT” is highlighted in the “RX

DATAVIEW” sub-menu.

The current receiver battery voltage is also shown in the

basic display; see page 24.

Minimum operating voltage (L.R-VOLT)

“L.R-VOLT” shows the receiver’s minimum operating

voltage since the last time it was switched on.

If this voltage differs signiﬁ cantly from the current

operating voltage “R-VOLT”, this could mean that the

receiver battery is being overstressed by the servos,

causing collapses in battery voltage. If this should occur,

we recommend installing a higher-performance receiver

battery to ensure maximum operating safety.

Sensor 1 + 2

Shows the values of the optional telemetry sensor 1

and, if present, sensor 2 in Volt and °C. You will ﬁ nd a

description of these sensors in the Appendix.

120 Program description: Telemetry menu

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF

CENTER : 1500sec

TRIM : –000sec

TRAVEL– : 150%

OUTPUT CH: 01

TRAVEL+ : 150%

PERIOD : 20msec

Before you carry out any programming at this screen

display be sure to read the information on page 117.

Value Explanation Possible settings

OUTPUT CH Channel select 1 … according to

receiver

REVERSE Servo reverse OFF / ON

CENTER Servo centre in μs If active (high-

lighted), according

to transmitter

control position

TRIM Trim position in μs

deviating from the

CENTRE position

-120 … +120 μs

TRAVEL– Travel limitation at

% servo travel

30 … 150%

TRAVEL+ Travel limitation at

% servo travel

30 … 150%

PERIOD Cycle time in ms 10 or 20 ms

OUTPUT CH (Channel select)

Select the “Channel” line if necessary using the ar-

row buttons. Touch the SET button of the right-hand

touch-key to highlight the value ﬁ eld. Now use the arrow

buttons of the right-hand touch-key to set the desired

channel (e. g. 01). The following parameters always

refer to the channel which you set at this point:

REVERSE (servo reverse)

Sets the direction of rotation of the servo connected to

the selected control channel: ON / OFF

CENTER (servo centre)

The “CENTRE” line displays the current pulse width in

μs of the control channel selected in the “OUTPUT CH”

line.

The displayed value varies according to the current posi-

tion of the transmitter control which affects this control

channel, and also its trim position.

A pulse width of 1500 μs corresponds to the standard

centre position, and therefore the usual servo centre

setting.

To change this value, select the “CENTRE” line and

touch the SET button. Move the corresponding transmit-

ter control to the desired position, and touch the SET

button again to store the current transmitter control

position. This position is now stored as the new neutral

position.

TRIM (trim position)

The purpose of the “TRIM” line is to provide ﬁ ne adjust-

ment of the neutral position of a servo connected to

the control channel selected in the “OUTPUT CH” line.

Adjustments are made in 1 μs increments using the

arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key. The value

in the “CENTRE” line can be adjusted over the range

+/- 120 μs around the TRIM value set here.

Default setting: 0 μs

TRAVEL–/+ (servo travel –/+)

This option can be used to place a limit on servo travel

(control surface travel) for the servo connected to the

control channel selected in the “OUTPUT CH” line. The

value is set separately for each side of centre.

The setting can be altered separately for both directions

within the range 30 ... 150%.

Default setting: 150% on both sides.

PERIOD (cycle time)

In this line you can determine the frame time for the

individual channel signals. This setting applies to all

control channels.

If you use digital servos exclusively, it is safe to set a

cycle time of 10 ms.

If you are using a mixture of servo types, or exclusively

analogue servos, it is essential to set 20 ms, otherwise

the servos will be “over-stressed” and may response by

jittering or making rumbling noises.

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : HOLD

F.S.Pos. : 1500sec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 01

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

POSITION : 1500sec

Before we describe this menu a few words as a re-

minder:

“Doing nothing” is the worst thing you can do in this

regard. The default setting for the HoTT receiver is

“HOLD” mode.

If interference should occur with hold-mode in force, and

if you are very lucky, the model aircraft will ﬂ y straight

ahead for an indeﬁ nite period and then “land” some-

121

Program description: Telemetry menu

where or other without causing major damage. However,

if the interference strikes in the wrong place and at the

wrong time, then a power model could become uncon-

trollable and tear wildly across the ﬂ ying ﬁ eld, endanger-

ing pilots and spectators.

For this reason you really must consider whether you

should at least program the throttle to “motor stopped”,

to avoid the worst of these risks.

After that warning we present a brief description of the

three possible Fail-Safe variants offered by the mx-16

HoTT transmitter:

The simplest way of setting Fail-Safe - and the one we

recommend - is to use the “Fail-Safe” menu, which is

accessed from the multi-function list; see page 116.

A similar alternative, albeit slightly more difﬁ cult to ac-

cess, is to use the “FAIL-SAFE ALL” option described on

the next double-page.

And ﬁ nally there is the relatively complex method of

entering individual settings using the “MODE”, “F.S.Pos.”

and “DELAY” options. The description of this variant

starts below with the “MODE” option.

Value Explanation Possible settings

OUTPUT CH Output channel

(receiver servo

socket)

1 … according to

receiver

INPUT CH Input channel

(control channel

coming from

transmitter)

1 … 16

MODE Fail-Safe mode HOLD

FAIL SAFE

OFF

F.S.Pos. Fail-Safe position 1000 … 2000 μs

DELAY Response time

(delay)

0,25, 0,50, 0,75

and 1,00 s

FAIL SAFE

ALL

Stores fail-safe

positions for all

control channels

NO / SAVE

POSITION Displays stored

Fail-Safe position

between approx.

1000 and 2000 μs

OUTPUT CH (servo socket)

In this line you select the OUTPUT CH (receiver servo

socket) which is to be adjusted.

INPUT CH (input channel select)

As already mentioned on page 117, the eight control

functions of the mx-16 HoTT transmitter can be

shared out between several receivers if necessary, or

alternatively several receiver outputs can be assigned

to the same control function; for example, you may wish

to be able to operate each aileron with two servos, or to

control an oversized rudder using two coupled servos

instead of a single one.

Sharing control functions amongst multiple HoTT receiv-

ers is a useful idea for large-scale models, for example,

to avoid long servo leads. In this case bear in mind that

only the last bound receiver can be addressed using the

“Telemetry” menu.

The eight control channels (INPUT CH) of the mx-16

HoTT can be managed in the appropriate manner using

the facility known as “channel mapping”, i. e. by assign-

ing a different control channel in the INPUT CH line to

the receiver servo socket selected in the OUTPUT CH

line. BUT CAUTION: if, for example, you have entered

“2AIL” in the “Aileron/ﬂ ap” line of the “Basic settings”

menu at the transmitter, then control function 2 (aileron)

is already divided to control channels 2 + 5 for the left

and right ailerons. The corresponding receiver INPUT

CH, i. e. those to be mapped, would in this case be

channels 02 + 05.

Examples:

You wish to assign two or more servos to each ailer-•

on of a large-scale model aircraft:

Assign one and the same INPUT CH (control chan-

nel) to each of the appropriate OUTPUT CH (servo

sockets). The appropriate servo sockets are selected

for the left or right wing, while the INPUT CH will be

one of the two default aileron control channels 2 + 5.

You wish to control the rudder of a large-scale model •

aircraft using two or more servos:

Assign one and the same INPUT CH (control chan-

nel) to each of the appropriate OUTPUT CH (servo

sockets); in this case the default rudder channel 4.

MODE

The settings you enter for the options “MODE”, “F.S.Pos.”

and “DELAY” determine the receiver’s behaviour if inter-

ference should affect the transmission from transmitter

to receiver.

The setting programmed under “MODE” always refers to

the channel you have set in the OUTPUT CH line.

The default setting for all servos is “HOLD”.

For each selected OUTPUT CH (receiver servo socket)

you can choose between:

FAI(L) SAFE•

If interference occurs, the corresponding servo

moves to the position displayed in the “POSITION”

line for the duration of the interference, after the “de-

122 Program description: Telemetry menu

lay time” set in the “DELAY” line.

HOLD•

If interference occurs, a servo set to “HOLD” main-

tains the position last assessed as correct for the du-

ration of the interference.

OFF•

If set to “OFF” when interference occurs, the receiv-

er continues to send the last correct control signals

(which it has stored) to the corresponding servo out-

put for the duration of the interference. This can be

imagined as the receiver switching the signal wire

“off”.

But CAUTION: if the control signal is absent, ana-

logue servos and many digital servos offer no resist-

ance to the forces acting on the control surfaces, with

the result that the model’s control surface positions

are more or less quickly lost.

F.S.Pos. (Fail-Safe position)

For each OUTPUT CH (receiver servo socket) activate

(highlight) the value ﬁ eld by brieﬂ y pressing the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key, then use the ar-

row buttons of the right-hand touch-key in the “F.S.POS.”

line to set the servo position which the servo is to take

up in “FAIL-SAFE” mode if interference should occur.

The setting can be entered in increments of 10 μs.

Default setting: 1500 μs (servo centre)

Important note:

The “F.S.POS.” function is also signiﬁ cant if the receiver

is switched on, but is (not yet) receiving a valid signal;

this applies to all three modes “OFF”, “HOLD” and “FAIL-

SAFE”:

The servo immediately runs to the Fail-Safe position pre-

viously set in the “Position” line. This can be exploited,

for example, to prevent the operation of a retractable un-

dercarriage or similar function if the receiver is switched

on accidentally. However, during normal model opera-

tions the corresponding servo behaves in accordance

with the set “MODE” if interference should strike.

DELAY (fail-safe response time or delay)

At this point you can set the delay time after which the

servos are to run to their previously selected positions if

the signal should be interrupted. This setting applies to

all channels, but only affects the servos programmed to

“FAIL-SAFE” mode.

Default setting: 0.75 s

FAIL SAFE ALL (global fail-safe setting)

This sub-menu can be used to deﬁ ne the Fail-Safe

position of the servos simply by “pressing a button”; it

operates in a similar manner to the “Fail-Safe” menu

described on page 116, and is simple to use:

Move to the “FAIL-SAFE ALL” line and press the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key to activate the

value ﬁ eld; “NO” is highlighted (black background). Now

set the parameter to “SAVE” using one of the arrow

buttons of the right-hand touch-key. Use the transmitter

controls to move all the servos which you have assigned

- or intend to assign later - in the “MODE - FAIL-SAFE”

line, to the desired fail-safe positions. In the extreme

bottom line “Position” displays the current position of the

transmitter control for the channel you have just set:

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.Pos. : 1500sec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670sec

FAIL SAFE ALL: SAVE

After touching the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key once more, the display reverts from “SAVE”

to “NO”. This indicates that the position of all the servos

affected by the procedure have now been stored, and

have also been adopted in the “F.S.Pos.” line. At the

same time the position for the current OUTPUT CH

(servo socket) is immediately displayed on the screen.

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.Pos. : 1670sec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 01

POSITION : 1670sec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

Switch the transmitter off, and check the Fail-Safe posi-

tions by observing the servo movements.

“Fail-Safe” in combination with “channel mapping”

It is clearly desirable that mapped servos - i. e. servos

which are controlled by a common control channel

(INPUT CH) - should respond in the same way when

interference occurs, so the corresponding settings of the

INPUT CH determine the behaviour of mapped servos.

For example, if receiver servo sockets 6, 7 and 8 are

mapped together, i. e. if the same control channel “04”

is assigned to OUTPUT CH (servo sockets) 06, 07 and

08 …

123

Program description: Telemetry menu

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : OFF

F.S.Pos. : 1670sec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 06

POSITION : 1670sec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : OFF

F.S.Pos. : 1230sec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 07

POSITION : 1670sec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : HOLD

F.S.Pos. : 1770sec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 08

POSITION : 1670sec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

… then INPUT CH 04 determines the Fail-Safe behav-

iour of the three servos connected to control channel 4,

regardless of the individual settings of the OUTPUT CH

for INPUT CH 04:

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 04

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.Pos. : 1500sec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1500sec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

This also applies, for example, if it is mapped in turn to

INPUT CH 01:

RX FAIL SAFE

INPUT CH: 01

MODE : FAI-SAFE

F.S.Pos. : 1500sec

DELAY : 0.75sec

OUTPUT CH: 04

POSITION : 1500sec

FAIL SAFE ALL: NO

In this case servo socket 04 would respond in accord-

ance with the Fail-Safe settings for CH 01.

In contrast, the response or delay time set in the “DE-

LAY” line always applies uniformly to all channels which

are set to “FAIL-SAFE”.

RX FREE MIXER

MASTER CH: 00

SLAVE CH : 00

S–TRAVEL–: 100

S–TRAVEL+: 100

MIXER : 1

RX WING MIXER

TAIL TYPE: NORMAL

Value Explanation Possible settings

MIXER Mixer select 1, 2 or 3

MASTER CH Primary channel 0, 1 … 8

SLAVE CH Secondary

channel

0, 1 … according

to receiver

S-TRAVEL– Negative mix

value

0 … 100%

S-TRAVEL+ Positive mix value 0 … 100%

RX WING

MIXER

Tail type NORMAL, V-TAIL

ELEVON

(aileron / elevator

mixer for deltas

and ﬂ ying wings)

MIXER

Up to three mixers can be programmed simultaneously.

You can switch between mixer 1, mixer 2 and mixer 3

using “MIXER”.

The following settings on this screen always apply to the

mixer selected in the MIXER line.

Important note:

If you have already programmed mixer functions in

the “Wing mixers” or “Free mixers” menus, check

very carefully that those mixers do not overlap with

those of the “RX FREE MIXER” menu.

MASTER CH (“from”)

The signal present at the MASTER CH (master chan-

nel) is mixed into the SLAVE CH (slave channel) to a

user-variable extent, following the same principles as

described in detail in the section entitled “Free mixers”

on page 107.

Select “00” if no mixer is to be set.

SLAVE CH (“to”)

A proportion of the signal of the MASTER CH (primary

channel) is mixed into the SLAVE CH (secondary chan-

nel); the mixer ratio is determined by the percentage

ﬁ gures entered in the “TRAVEL-” and “TRAVEL+” lines.

Select “00” if no mixer is to be set.

TRAVEL–/+ (mixer ratio in %)

The mixer ratio in relation to the MASTER signal is

124 Program description: Telemetry menu

determined separately for each direction by the values

entered in these two lines.

TAIL TYPE

The following model types are also available in the “Tail”

line of the “Basic settings” menu (see page 58), and

should normally be set up at that point. If you have done

this, you should always leave the TAIL TYPE at NOR-

MAL.

However, if you prefer to use the receiver’s integral

mixers, you can select the pre-set mixer function for the

corresponding model type:

NORMAL•

This setting corresponds to the classic aircraft type

with tail-mounted stabiliser panels and separate rud-

der and elevator. No mixer function is required for this

model type.

V-TAIL•

For this model type the control functions elevator and

rudder are linked together in such a way that each of

the two control surfaces - actuated by a separate ser-

vos - carries out superimposed elevator and rudder

functions.

The servos are usually connected to the receiver as

follows:

OUTPUT CH 3: left V-tail servo

OUTPUT CH 4: right V-tail servo

If you ﬁ nd that the servos rotate in the wrong direc-

tion, please see the notes on page 44.

ELEVON (delta / ﬂ ying wing models)•

The servos connected to outputs 2 and 3 assume su-

perimposed aileron and elevator functions. The ser-

vos are usually connected to the receiver as follows:

OUTPUT CH 2: left elevon

OUTPUT CH 3: right elevon

If you ﬁ nd that the servos rotate in the wrong direc-

tion, please see the notes on page 44.

RX CURVE (EXPO)

RX CURVE

TYPE : B

CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : B

CURVE2 CH : 03

TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

Value Explanation Possible settings

CURVE1, 2

or 3 CH

Channel assign-

ment of the selec-

ted curve setting

1 … according to

receiver

TYPE Curve type A, B, C

see illustration

Servo travel

Transmitter control travel

Expo = +100%

–100% +100%

Servo travel

Transmitter control travel

Expo = –100%

TYPE A

–100% +100%

Servo travel

Transmitter control travel

linear

–100% +100%

TYPE B

TYPE C

DR = 125% DR = 70%

In most cases a non-linear control function is used for

aileron (channel 2), elevator (channel 3) and rudder

(channel 4), and the default settings assume that this is

the case. BUT CAUTION: this assignment only applies if

you have not set either “2 ELE Sv” in the “Tail” line of the

“Basic settings” menu, or “2AIL” or “2AIL 2FL” in the “Ail

/ ﬂ ap” line, at the transmitter. Otherwise control function

3 (elevator) is already split over control channels 3 +

8, and control function 2 (aileron) is split over control

channels 2 + 5 for the left and right ailerons. In both

these cases the corresponding receiver control channels

(INPUT CH) would then be channels 03 + 08 or 02 + 05.

For example, if you have set “2AIL” at the transmitter,

and wish to use the RX CURVE option discussed here

instead of the “D/R Expo” menu (see page 82) of the

mx-16 HoTT transmitter - which offers more individual

adjustment options - then two curves must be set:

RX CURVE

TYPE : A

CURVE1 CH : 02

TYPE : A

CURVE2 CH : 05

TYPE : B

CURVE3 CH : 04

If you ignored this, the left and right ailerons would

exhibit different control characteristics.

The RX CURVE function can be used to manage the

control characteristics for up to three servos:

CURVE 1, 2 or 3 CH•

Select the desired control channel (INPUT CH) for

the ﬁ rst servo.

The following setting in TYPE only affects the chan-

nel you select at this point.

TYPE

Select the servo curve:

A: EXPO = -100% and DUAL RATE = 125%

The servo responds slowly to stick movements

around the neutral position, but the curve becomes

steeper with increasing control travel.

B: Linear setting

125

Program description: Telemetry menu

The servo follows the stick movement with a linear

response.

C: EXPO = +100% and DUAL RATE = 70%

The servo responds slowly to stick movements

around the neutral position, but the curve becomes

steeper with increasing control travel.

Note:

The control characteristics programmed at this point

also affect mapped receiver outputs.

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000sec

ALL–MAX : 2000sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

TEST : STOP

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

Value Explanation Possible settings

ALL-MAX Pre-set maximum

servo test travel

for all servo out-

puts

1500 … 2000 μs

ALL-MIN Pre-set minimum

servo test travel

for all servo out-

puts

1500 … 1000 μs

TEST Test procedure START / STOP

ALARM

VOLT

Alarm limit for the

receiver low-

voltage warning

3,0 … 6,0 V

Default setting:

3,8 V

ALARM

TEMP+

Alarm limit for

excessive receiver

temperature

50 … 80 °C

Default setting:

70 °C

ALARM

TEMP–

Alarm limit for

excessively

low receiver

temperature

-20 … +10 °C

Default setting:

-10 °C

CH OUTPUT

TYPE

Channel sequence ONCE, SAME,

SUMI, SUMO

ALL MAX (maximum servo travel)

In this line you can set the maximum servo travel for the

servo test on the plus side of control travel.

2000 μs corresponds to full travel, 1500 μs corresponds

to the neutral position.

ALL MIN (minimum servo travel)

In this line you can set the maximum servo travel for the

servo test on the minus side of control travel.

1000 μs corresponds to full travel, 1500 μs corresponds

to the neutral position.

TEST

In this line you can start and stop the receiver’s integral

servo test.

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to activate the input ﬁ eld:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000sec

ALL–MAX : 2000sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

TEST : STOP

Now select START with one of the arrow buttons of the

right-hand touch-key:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000sec

ALL–MAX : 2000sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

TEST : START

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to start the test-run. The input ﬁ eld now reverts from

highlighted to “normal”:

RX SERVO TEST

ALL–MIN : 1000sec

ALL–MAX : 2000sec

ALARM VOLT : 3.8V

ALARM TEMP–:–10°C

ALARM TEMP+: 70°C

CH OUTPUT TYPE:ONCE

TEST : START

To stop the servo test, re-activate the input ﬁ eld as de-

scribed previously, then select STOP and conﬁ rm your

choice with the SET button of the right-hand touch-key.

126 Program description: Telemetry menu

ALARM VOLT (low receiver voltage warning)

ALARM VOLT monitors the receiver voltage. The thresh-

old can be set to any value within the range 3.0 to 6.0

Volt. If the voltage falls below the set alarm limit, an

audible signal (interval beeping, long / short) is trig-

gered, and “VOLT.E” ﬂ ashes at top right in all “RX …”

screen displays:

RX SERVO

REVERSE : OFF

CENTER : 1500sec

TRIM : –000sec

TRAVEL– : 150%

OUTPUT CH: 01

TRAVEL+ : 150%

PERIOD : 20msec

VOLT.E

The parameter R-VOLT is also highlighted in the “RX

DATAVIEW” display:

RX DATAVIEW

S–STR100% R–TEM.+28°C

L PACK TIME 00010msec

L.R-VOLT:04.5V

S–QUA100%S–dBM–030dBM

SENSOR1 :00.0V 00°C

SENSOR2 :00.0V 00°C

R-VOLT :05.0V

ALARM TEMP +/- (receiver temperature monitor)

These two options monitor the temperature of the

receiver: a lower limit value “ALARM TEMP-” (-20 ...

+10°C) and an upper limit value “ALARM TEMP+” (50 ...

80°C) can be programmed. If the temperature exceeds

the upper limit or falls below the lower one, an audible

signal (continuous beeping) is triggered, and “TEMP.E”

appears at top right in all receiver displays. The param-

eter R-TEM is also highlighted in the “RX DATAVIEW”

display.

Ensure that the receiver remains within the permitted

temperature range under all ﬂ ight conditions (ideally

between -10 and +50°C).

CH OUTPUT TYPE

At this point you can select how the receiver outputs are

to be addressed.

ONCE•

The receiver servo sockets are addressed in se-

quence; this is recommended for use with analogue

servos. At this setting the servos are automatical-

ly operated at a frame rate of 20 ms (30 ms with the

twelve-channel receiver, Order No. 33512) - regard-

less of what is set or displayed in the “PERIOD” line

of the “RX SERVO” display.

SAME•

The receiver servo sockets are addressed in parallel

blocks of four, i. e. channels 1 to 4 and channels 5 to

8 each receive their control signals simultaneously.

This is recommended for use with digital servos, and

especially where multiple servos are employed for

a single function (e. g. ailerons), to ensure that the

groups of servos run absolutely synchronously.

If you are using digital servos, we recommend that

you set 10 ms in the “PERIOD” line of the “RX SER-

VO” display so that you can exploit the fast response

of these servos. If you are using analogue servos, it

is essential to select “20 ms”.

If you choose the faster setting, please take par-

ticular care when selecting the receiver power

supply: since up to four servos can start moving si-

multaneously, the load on the battery is fairly severe,

so it must be a high-performance type.

SUMI / SUMO (sum signal IN / OUT)•

The HoTT transmission system allows a single trans-

mitter to control more than one receiver: either in

“Master - Slave” arrangement, or in “Satellite mode”,

as described here.

In …

Satellite mode

… two HoTT receivers are inter-connected using a

three-core connecting lead (Order No. 33700.1 (300

mm) or 33700.2 (100 mm) by the highest-numbered

servo sockets. For more details on this please visit

www.graupner.de on the Internet.

The HoTT receiver which is conﬁ gured as SUMO

(see below) is designated the satellite receiver, and

all its channels are transmitted in the form of a sum

signal to the second HoTT receiver - the primary re-

ceiver - if reception should fail; the primary receiver

must be programmed as “SUMI”. Note that the signal

only ever moves towards SUMI.

The receiver outputs are addressed in sequence at a

frame rate of 20 ms (30 ms with the GR-24 receiver,

Order No. 33512), even if you have set 10 ms in the

“PERIOD” line of the “RX SERVO” screen page.

However, if the receiver programmed as the satellite

(SUMO) suffers signal reception failure, the servos

connected to that receiver take up the Fail-Safe posi-

tions programmed in the satellite receiver, regardless

of the primary receiver.

This receiver conﬁ guration is recommended in partic-

ular circumstances: for example, if one of the two re-

ceivers has to be installed in an unfavourable position

in the model, or if there is a danger that the received

signal will be weak in certain ﬂ ight attitudes, per-

haps due to a turbine, carbon ﬁ bre in the airframe, or

a similar problem, with the result that sporadic range

127

Program description: Telemetry menu

problems might be expected.

For this reason it is essential to connect the most im-

portant control functions to the primary receiver (the

one programmed as SUMI), so that interference to

the satellite receiver (SUMO) does not cause the

model to go out of control.

Telemetry data, such as the voltage of the airborne

power supply, are only sent to the transmitter by the

satellite receiver (conﬁ gured as SUMO), i. e. all te-

lemetry sensors must be connected to the satellite

receiver (SUMO).

Each receiver should be connected to the shared

power supply using its own power lead. If high cur-

rents can be expected, duplicated power connections

are recommended. However, if each of the two re-

ceivers is to be powered by its own battery, then it is

essential to withdraw

the central (red) wire

from one of the two sat-

ellite lead connectors,

as shown in the illus-

tration.

red

If you wish to carry out further programming, such

as the Fail-Safe settings, disconnect the three-core

satellite connection between the two receivers, and

switch on just the receiver you wish to address. Note

that you may also need to change the binding se-

quence.

SIMPLE DATA VIEW

Select the desired menu line using the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch-key …

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW

SIMPLE DATA VIEW

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

… and then brieﬂ y press the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key to bring up a list of further sub-

menus.

SIMPLE DATA VIEW

RECEIVER

RX+ELECTRIC AIRMODUL

RX+GENERAL MODUL

RX+GPS

RX+VARIO MODUL

RECEIVER

RX–S QUA: 100%

RX–S ST : 100%

TX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–dBm: 33dBm

RX–VOLT:4.8 TMP

V–PACK: 10ms

M–RX V :4.6 +22°C

This screen displays the data which can also be viewed

in the “RX DATAVIEW” screen of the telemetry menu

“SETTING & DATA VIEW”, but in graphic form.

The meanings are as follows:

Value Explanation

RX-S QUA Signal quality in %

RX-S ST Signal strength in %

RX-dBm Receive performance in dBm

TX-dBm Transmit power in dBm

V PACK shows the longest period in ms in

which data packets were lost in

transmission from transmitter to

receiver

RX-VOLT Current receiver operating voltage in

Volt

M-RX V Lowest receiver operating voltage in

Volt since the last time it was switched

TMP The thermometer indicates the

receiver’s current operating

temperature

SIMPLE DATA VIEW

128 Program description: Telemetry menu

RX + GENERAL MODUL

0.0V

BAT1

BAT2

0.0V T2 +20°C

T1 +20°C

E FUEL F

CELL V

1:0.00

2:0.00

3:0.00

4:0.00

5:0.00

6:0.00

0.0V

BAT1

BAT2

0.0V T2 +20°C

T1 +20°C

E FUEL F

ALT

+500m

0m1

0m3

CURRE.

0.0A

POWER

0.0V

If a General Engine module, Order No. 33610, or a

General Air module, Order No. 33611, is connected to

the receiver, then this screen provides a graphic display

of the data supplied by it. For more information on these

modules please see the Appendix, or refer to the prod-

uct on the Internet at www.graupner.de.

Depending on the types of sensor ﬁ tted to the modules,

the display constantly shows the following data:

The actual voltage of up to two rechargeable batteries

(BAT1 and BAT2); the measured values from up to two

temperature sensors (T1 and T2) and a fueltank level

indicator.

At the right-hand edge the screen shows either an al-

ternating list of the actual cell voltages of a LiPo battery

with up to six cells, or the current altitude relative to the

location, climb / descent in m/1sec and m/3sec, current

in Ampere plus the actual voltage of the battery con-

nected to the sensor.

The meanings are as follows:

Value Explanation

BAT1 / BAT2 Battery 1 / Battery 2

FUEL Fuel level / Fueltank indicator

E / F Empty / full

T1 / T2 Temperature of sensor 1 / sensor 2

CELL V Cell voltage of cell 1 … max. 6

ALT Current altitude

0m1 m/1 sec climb / descent

0m3 m/3 sec climb / descent

CURRE. Actual current in Ampere

POWER Actual voltage of drive battery

RX + ELECTRIC AIRMODUL

0.0V 0m/3s

BAT1 0m/1s

BAT2

0.0V T2 +20°C

T1 +20°C

CELL V

1L0.00

2L0.00

3L0.00

4L0.00

5L0.00

6L0.00

0.0V 0A

ALT +500m

7L0.00

0.0V 0m/3s

BAT1 0m/1s

BAT2

0.0V T2 +20°C

T1 +20°C

CELL V

1H0.00

2H0.00

3H0.00

4H0.00

5H0.00

6H0.00

0.0V 0A

ALT +500m

7H0.00

If an Electric-Air module, Order No. 33620, is connected

to the receiver, then this screen provides a graphic

display of the data supplied by it. For more information

on this module please see the Appendix, or refer to the

product on the Internet at www.graupner.de.

Depending on the types of sensor ﬁ tted to the module,

the display constantly shows the following data:

The actual voltage of up to two rechargeable batteries

(BAT1 and BAT2); the measured values from up to two

temperature sensors (T1 and T2); the current altitude

relative to the location, and the climb / descent of the

model in m/1sec and m/3sec; the centre of the screen

also displays the current actually being drawn from a

power source.

At the right-hand edge the screen shows an alternating

display of the actual cell voltages of the battery packs

(max. seven cells each) connected to balancer sockets

1 (L) or 2 (H).

The meanings are as follows:

Value Explanation

V Actual voltage

A Actual current

BAT1 / BAT2 Battery 1 / Battery 2

ALT Current altitude

m/1s m/1 sec climb / descent

m/3s m/3 sec climb / descent

T1 / T2 Temperature from sensor 1 / 2

CELL.V Cell voltage of cell 1 … max. 14

L Balancer socket 1

H Balancer socket 2

129

Program description: Telemetry menu

RX + VARIO

RXSQ

MAX

+500m

MIN

+500m

ALT

+500

m/1s

m/3s

m/10s

If a Vario module, Order No. 33601, is connected to the

receiver, then this screen provides a graphic display

of the data supplied by it. For more information on this

module please see the Appendix or refer to the product

on the Internet at www.graupner.de.

The meanings are as follows:

Value Explanation

ALT Current altitude

RXSQ Signal strength of the signal picked up

by the receiver in %

MAX The pre-set altitude limit relative to

the launch point; above this altitude

the transmitter emits audible warning

signals

MIN The pre-set altitude limit below the

launch point; below this altitude the

transmitter emits audible warning

signals

m/1s m/1 sec climb / descent

m/3s m/3 sec climb / descent

m/10s m/10 sec climb / descent

RX + GPS

NRXSQ 0

DIS 0m

ALT +500m

0m/1s

0m/3s

0m/10s

N 0°00.0000

E 0°00.0000

Kmh

If a GPS module with integral vario, Order No. 33600,

is connected to the receiver, then this screen provides

a graphic display of the data supplied by it. For more

information on this module please see the Appendix, or

refer to the product on the Internet at www.graupner.de.

The centre of the screen shows the current positional

data and the model’s speed; the display also shows the

model’s current altitude in relation to the launch point, its

climb / descent rate at m/1 sec, m/3 sec and m/10 sec,

the current reception quality and the model’s range from

the launch point.

The meanings are as follows:

Value Explanation

W / N / E / S West / North / East / South

Kmh Speed

RXSQ Signal strength of downlink channel

DIS Distance

ALT Current altitude relative to launch point

m/1s m/1 sec climb / descent

m/3s m/3 sec climb / descent

m/10s m/10 sec climb / descent

RF STATUS VIEW

Select the desired menu line with the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch-key …

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW

SIMPLE DATA VIEW

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

… and then press the central SET button of the right-

hand touch-key to open the selected sub-menu:

R100%

TD 22

E 10

RD 41

4.8VC

S 95%

4.8VM 0123456789ABCDE

Top row: receive performance in dBm of channels

1 ... 75 on the 2.4 GHz band.

Bottom row: receive performance in dBm of the sig-

nal of channels 1 ... 75 on the 2.4 GHz

band, as picked up by the receiver.

This screen provides a graphic display of data showing

the occupation of the 2.4 GHz band.

As well as the graphic depiction of band occupation,

additional numeric information is generated to the left of

the graphs. The meanings are as follows:

Value Explanation

R Signal quality in % for the signal

arriving from the receiver

RF STATUS VIEW

130 Program description: Telemetry menu

Value Explanation

S Signal quality in % for the signal

arriving at the receiver

TD Reception performance in dBm

E Number of lost receiver data packets

RD Reception performance in dBm of the

signal picked up by the receiver

VC Actual receiver operating voltage in

Volt

VM Lowest receiver operating voltage in

Volt since the last time it was switched

VOICE TRIGGER

First select the desired menu line using the arrow but-

tons cd of the left or right-hand touch-key …

TELEMETRY

SETTING & DATA VIEW

SIMPLE DATA VIEW

RF STATUS VIEW

VOICE TRIGGER

… then press the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key to open the selected sub-menu:

REPEAT

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 1SEC

TRIG

TRANSFER

RECEIVER

–––

Speech output is available via the headphone socket,

but not until you have at least assigned a switch in the

“REPEAT” line. This is accomplished as described in

the section entitled “Assigning switches and control

switches” on page 39:

VOICE TRIGGER

TRANSFER

RECEIVER

push desired switch

into position ON

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 1SEC

TRIG

TRANSFER

RECEIVER

–––

All the time the assigned switch is closed, the last

speech output is repeated for the period set to the left of

the switch.

TRIG

If you assign a switch in the “TRIG” line - preferably one

of the two momentary buttons SW 1 or SW 9 - you can

use it to cycle through the speech output selected in the

menus described in the following section.

VOICE TRIGGER

TRIG

TRANSFER

RECEIVER

3REPEAT 1SEC

TRANSFER

Select the desired menu line using the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch-key …

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 1SEC

TRIG

TRANSFER

RECEIVER

… then brieﬂ y press the central SET button of the right-

VOICE TRIGGER

131

Program description: Telemetry menu

hand touch-key to open the selected sub-menu:

VOLT:

MODELTIME:

BATTERYTIME:

RUNTIME:

STOPWATCH:

TIME:

In this menu you can select and de-select the chosen

speech output after using the arrow buttons cd of the

left or right-hand touch-key to select the desired line,

followed by a brief press of the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key:

VOLT:

MODELTIME:

BATTERYTIME:

RUNTIME:

STOPWATCH:

TIME:

RECEIVER

Select the desired menu line with the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch-key …

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 1SEC

TRIG

TRANSFER

RECEIVER

… then touch the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key to call up the selected sub-menu:

TEMP:

STRENGTH:

VOLT:

LOWVOLT:

In this menu you can select and de-select the chosen

speech output after using the arrow buttons cd of the

left or right-hand touch-key to select the desired line,

followed by a brief press of the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key:

TEMP:

STRENGTH:

VOLT:

LOWVOLT:

SENSOR

This line only appears if you have already activated one

of the “RX …” sub-menus of the “SIMPLE DATA VIEW”

menu, and then returned directly to the “VOICE TRIG-

GER” menu:

VOICE TRIGGER

REPEAT 1SEC

TRIG

TRANSFER

RECEIVER

SENSOR

For example, if you selected the “RX + VARIO” option,

then selected the “SENSOR” line and touched the cen-

tral SET button of the right-hand touch-key, you will see

the display shown below:

ALT :

MAXALT :

MINALT :

As described in the left-hand column, you can also

select or de-select any available speech output by brieﬂ y

pressing the central SET button of the right-hand touch-

key after you have selected the desired line.

132 Program description: Trainer system

Trainer Mode

Connecting two transmitters for trainer mode operations using a Trainer lead

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key

to leaf through to the “Trainer” menu point of the multi-

function menu:

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

info dispteach/pupi

servo set.

D/R expo

free mixer

contr set.

heli mixer

swashp.mix

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

teach/pupi info disp

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to open the menu:

TRAINER/Pupil

–P

2345678

BIND:SW: –––

N/A

The illustration above shows the initial state of this

menu: transmitter controls have not been released ( ) to

the pupil, and a switch has not been assigned (SW: ---

at bottom right and -P on the left of the display).

Teacher transmitter settings

Up to eight transmitter control functions of the Teacher

transmitter “T” can be transferred individually or in any

combination to the pupil transmitter “P”.

The lower line of the display marked “T” therefore

indicates those transmitter controls which are perma-

nently connected to the inputs 1 … 4 (dual-axis stick

functions, ﬁ xed-wing model and model helicopter), plus

the transmitter controls CTRL 6 to 8, which can be

assigned to inputs 5 … 8 in the “Transmitter control

settings” menu.

Notes:

This means that the three-position switches SW 4/5 •

and 6/7, designated CTRL 9 and 10, explicitly CAN-

NOT be transferred.

Transmitter controls can only be assigned in the •

“Transmitter control settings” menu when the Train-

er connection is switched off.

Use the arrow buttons ef of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the transmitter controls 1 to 8 (z)to

be transferred to the pupil, and brieﬂ y press the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key in each case, so

that they switch from “T (Teacher)” ( ) to “P (Pupil)” ( ):

–P

1234678

BIND:SW: ––– N/A

TRAINER/Pupil

You still have to assign a Trainer transfer switch on the

right of the screen so that you can actually transfer con-

trol to the Pupil. This is accomplished by using the arrow

buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key to place the

marker next to “SW” at bottom right, and assign a switch

as described on page 39.

We recommend that you use one of the two momentary

switches SW 1 or SW 9 as the transfer switch, to ensure

that the Teacher transmitter can regain control instantly

at any time.

12345678

BIND:SW: N/A

TRAINER/Teach

Note:

The switch assignment procedure described above

determines which transmitter provides the Teacher

function, and which provides the Pupil function. For this

reason a switch must NEVER be assigned to the Pupil

transmitter in this menu. To underline this, the menu

headline switches from “TRAINER / pupil” to “TRAI-

NER / teacher” as soon as a switch is assigned.

The model to be controlled by the pupil must be pro-

grammed completely in a model memory of the mx-

16 HoTT Teacher transmitter, i. e. with all its functions

including trims and any mixer functions. The HoTT re-

ceiver in the model must also be “bound” to the Teacher

transmitter, since it is this transmitter which actually

controls the model in Pupil mode, even in Trainer opera-

tions.

The mx-16 HoTT Teacher transmitter MUST ALWAYS

BE SWITCHED ON FIRST. ONLY THEN MAY THE

CONNECTING LEAD BE PLUGGED INTO IT. If you

133

Program description: Trainer system

neglect this, the RF module will not be activated.

The mx-16 HoTT Teacher transmitter can be linked to

any suitable Pupil transmitter - even those operating on

the “classic” 35 / 40 MHz band. For example, an mx-

16 HoTT Teacher transmitter can certainly be used in

conjunction with an mx-16(s) Pupil transmitter.

However, if the connection at the pupil end is NOT

made using a two-pole DSC socket, but instead - for

example - using a three-pin Trainer socket from the

Graupner range, the basic requirement for a correct

connection with a Pupil transmitter is that PPM (18

or 24) modulation must ALWAYS be set on the Pupil

transmitter, regardless of the modulation used by

the Teacher transmitter.

Pupil transmitter settings

The model to be controlled by the pupil must be pro-

grammed completely in a model memory of the Teacher

transmitter, i. e. with all its functions including trims and

any mixer functions, and the HoTT receiver in the model

must be “bound” to the Teacher transmitter. In principle,

however, an mx-16 HoTT Pupil transmitter can also be

linked to a Teacher transmitter operating on the “classic”

35 / 40 MHz band, since the PPM signal required from

the Teacher transmitter is present at the transmitter’s

DSC socket.

The Pupil transmitter can be virtually any transmitter

from the former and current Graupner range with at

least four control functions. More information on this is

available in the main FS catalogue, and on the Internet

under www.graupner.de.

Some transmitters will need to be retro-ﬁ tted with the

appropriate module in order to act as the Pupil transmit-

ter.

This should be connected to the transmitter circuit board

as described in the installation instructions supplied in

the set. Information on the Pupil module required can

be found in the main Graupner FS catalogue and on the

Internet at www.graupner.de.

The Pupil transmitter must be connected to the Teacher

transmitter using the appropriate lead - see next double

page. The control functions of the Pupil transmitter

MUST act directly on the control channels, i. e. the

receiver outputs, without the intervention of any

mixers.

If you are using an “mc” or “mx” series transmitter,

it is best to set up a free model memory in the Pupil

transmitter with the required model type (“Fixed-wing”

or “Helicopter”). Assign the model name “Pupil” to the

memory, and set up the stick mode (Mode 1 … 4) and

“Throttle min. forward / back” to suit the pupil’s prefer-

ence. All the other settings should be left at the appropri-

ate default values. If you select the “Helicopter” model

type, the throttle / collective pitch direction and idle trim

must also be set accordingly on the Pupil transmitter. All

other functions, including mixer and coupling functions,

are carried out by the Teacher transmitter, which trans-

mits them to the receiver in the model.

If you are using a “D” or “FM” type transmitter, you

should check the servo directions and stick mode, and

alter them by re-connecting the appropriate leads if re-

quired. All mixers should be switched off or set to “zero”.

When assigning the control functions the usual conven-

tions should be observed:

Channel Function

1 Throttle / Collective pitch

2 Aileron / Roll

3 Elevator / Pitch-axis

4 Rudder / Tail rotor

If you wish to transfer other control functions to the

Pupil transmitter, in addition to the functions of the two

dual-axis sticks (1 … 4), then you will need to assign

additional transmitter controls in the Pupil transmitter’s

“Transmitter control settings” menu to those inputs

which correspond to transmitter control numbers 5 … 8,

as released in the Teacher transmitter’s “Trainer” menu.

Important:

If you forget to assign a transmitter control, then •

the servo or servos concerned will remain in the

centre position when control is transferred to the

Pupil transmitter.

The Pupil transmitter must always be operated in •

PPM mode, regardless of the type of RF link be-

tween the Teacher transmitter and the model.

If the Pupil transmitter is connected using a DSC •

socket, then you should ALWAYS leave the Pu-

pil transmitter’s On / Off switch at the “OFF” posi-

tion, as this is the only way to ensure that the Pu-

pil transmitter module does not generate an RF

signal even when the DSC lead is plugged in.

Trainer mode operations

Connect the two transmitters using the appropriate

lead; see the overview on the next page: connect the

plug marked “M” (Master) to the socket on the Teacher

transmitter, and the plug marked “S” (Student) (not

present on all leads) to the appropriate socket on the

Pupil transmitter.

134 Program description: Trainer system

Important note regarding three-pole barrel connec-

tors:

If you are using a Trainer lead with three-pole barrel

connectors, on no account connect one of the ends

marked “S” or “M” to a DSC system socket, as it is

not suitable for this purpose. The DSC socket is only

suitable for leads ﬁ tted with two-pole barrel connec-

tors.

Checking the system

Operate the assigned Trainer transfer switch:

If the screen display changes from „• ¾T“ to „¾P“, the

Trainer system is working properly.

However, if both the “• Trainer” menu and the transmit-

ter’s basic display show the following warning mes-

sage …

student

signal

… and the display “-P” appears on the left of the

screen in the “Trainer” menu, and at the same time

the transmitter emits audible signals, then there is

a problem with the connection between Pupil and

Teacher transmitter. If this should happen, note that

all the functions remain under the control of the

Teacher transmitter, regardless of the position of the

Trainer transfer switch; this ensures that the model is

not out of control at any time.

Possible errors:

Pupil transmitter not ready•

The interface in the Pupil transmitter, which replaces •

the RF module, is not connected correctly

Incorrect cable connection: see next section for cable •

selection

Pupil transmitter not set to PPM (10, 18, 24) mode.•

Further possible errors:

Teacher transmitter and HoTT receiver in trainer •

model not correctly “bound”.

Trainer leads

4179.1 For Trainer mode operations between any

two Graupner transmitters equipped with a

DSC socket - identiﬁ able by two-pole barrel

connectors at both ends.

3290.7 Trainer lead for connecting a Teacher trans-

mitter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-16 HoTT),

or a transmitter retro-ﬁ tted with the option-

al DSC module, Order No. 3290.24, to a

Graupner Pupil transmitter with opto-elec-

tronic Pupil socket - identiﬁ able by the letter

“S” at the end with the three-pole barrel con-

nector.

3290.8 Trainer lead for connecting a Pupil transmit-

ter with DSC socket (e. g. mx-16 HoTT)

or a transmitter retro-ﬁ tted with the option-

al DSC module, Order No. 3290.24, to a

Graupner Teacher transmitter with opto-elec-

tronic Teacher socket - identiﬁ able by the let-

ter “M” at the end with the three-pole barrel

connector.

For more detailed information about the leads and mod-

ules for the Teacher and Pupil transmitters listed on this

page, please refer to the operating instructions supplied

with your transmitter, the main Graupner FS catalogue,

or the Internet at www.graupner.de.

135

Program description: Trainer system

Trainer mode operations with the mx-16 HoTT transmitter

Due to the constant expansion of our range of products please visit the Internet at www.graupner.de for the latest information.

Teacher transmitter

with DSC socket

Teacher transmitter with Teacher

module Order No. 3290.2,

3290.19,3290.22

Trainer lead,

Order No. 4179.1

Trainer lead,

Order No. 3290.8

mx-16 HoTT Pupil transmitter

mx-12(s)HoTT, mx-16s/iFS/

HoTT, mx-22(iFS), mx-24s and,

if ﬁ tted with DSC socket, Order No.

3290.24,mc-19(s + iFS), mc-22(s

+ iFS) and mc-24

mc-19 to mc-24, mx-22(iFS),

mx-24s

mitter

Pupil transmitter

with DSC socket

Pupil transmitter with Pupil

module Order No. 3290.3,

3290.10,3290.33

Trainer lead,

Order No. 4179.1

Trainer lead,

Order No. 3290.7

D 14, FM 414, FM 4014, FM 6014,

mc-10 … mc-24, mx-22(iFS),

mx-24s

mx-16 HoTT Teacher transmitter

mx-12(s)HoTT, mx-16s/iFS/

HoTT, mx-22(iFS), mx-24s and,

if ﬁ tted with DSC socket, Order

No. 3290.24,mc-19(s + iFS),

mc-22(s + iFS) and mc-24

Note:

These lists represent the transmitters and transmitter combi-

nations which are possible at time of going to press.

136 Program description: Trainer system

Wireless HoTT system

Two HoTT transmitters can also be combined by wire-

less means to form a Trainer system as an alternative to

the “classic” system using a Trainer lead, as described

on the preceding pages.

Preparations

The trainer model must be programmed completely,

i. e. with all its functions including trims and any mixer

functions, both in a model memory of the mx-16 HoTT

Pupil transmitter and also in the mx-16 HoTT Teacher

transmitter. This means that it must be possible to

control the trainer model fully, without restriction, by

both transmitters, i. e. by the Teacher and the Pupil

transmitters. It is very important to avoid any major

set-up differences, otherwise there is a risk that the

servos will jump abruptly from one position to another

when control is transferred between the Teacher and

Pupil transmitters, which can place a severe strain on

the servos. Nevertheless, it may be sensible to program

smaller control surface travels on the Pupil model at

least, as this makes it easier to learn the basic skills of

model ﬂ ying.

Once both transmitters are prepared for training opera-

tions as described above, the trainer model should be

bound to the Pupil transmitter. A detailed description

of the binding procedure can be found on pages 61 and

70.

Binding the Teacher and Pupil transmitters

Switch both transmitters on, and use the arrow buttons

of the left or right-hand touch-key to leaf through on both

transmitters to the “Trainer” menu point of the multi-

function menu. (The trainer model’s receiving system,

previously bound to the Pupil transmitter, does not need

to be switched on during the following procedure.)

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

info dispteach/pupi

servo set.

D/R expo

free mixer

contr set.

heli mixer

swashp.mix

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

teach/pupi info disp

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to open the following menu point:

TRAINER/Pupil

–P

2345678

BIND:SW: –––

N/A

The illustration above shows the initial state of this

menu: no transmitter controls have been released to the

Pupil ( ), and no switches have been assigned (SW: ---

bottom right and -S on left of illustration).

Pupil transmitter

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key

to move the marker / cursor to the input ﬁ eld marked

“Bind”. If a switch is displayed adjacent to “SW” on the

right, then it is essential to erase this: see the following

illustration:

–P

2345678

BIND: N/A

SW: –––

TRAINER/Pupil

Teacher transmitter

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-

key to release the control channels to be transferred to

the Pupil. When you do this, the corresponding symbol

changes from to . For example:

–P

1234678

BIND:SW: ––– N/A

TRAINER/Pupil

Important Note:

In contrast to the wired Trainer system described in the

previous section, in which TRANSMITTER CONTROL

SIGNALS are released to the Pupil exclusively, it is

CONTROL CHANNELS which are transferred when

using the wireless HoTT system which is described in

this section.

For example, if the aileron function (2) is to be trans-

ferred, and if the model is equipped with two aileron

servos which are usually connected to receiver sockets

2 and 5, then in the wireless system control channels

2 and 5 must also be transferred, and not just - as with

the wired system - number 2; see illustration above. The

same applies to ﬂ ap servos connected to 6 and 7 (“2AIL

137

Program description: Trainer system

2FL” setting in the “Basic settings” menu), or two eleva-

tor servos connected to 3 and 8 (“2Sv EL” setting in the

“Basic settings” menu).

You still have to assign a Trainer transfer switch on the

right of the screen so that you can actually transfer con-

trol to the Pupil. This is accomplished by using the arrow

buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key to place the

marker next to “SW” at bottom right, and assign a switch

as described on page 39.

We recommend that you use one of the two momentary

switches SW 1 or SW 9 as the transfer switch, to ensure

that the Teacher transmitter can regain control instantly

at any time.

12345678

BIND:SW: N/A

TRAINER/Teach

Note:

The switch assignment procedure described above

determines which transmitter provides the Teacher

function, and which provides the Pupil function. For this

reason a switch must NEVER be assigned to the Pupil

transmitter in this menu. To underline this, the menu

headline switches from “TRAINER / pupil” to “TRAI-

NER / teacher” as soon as a switch is assigned.

Now use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move the marker to “BIND: N/A” on the

right:

¿T

12345678

BIND:SW: N/A

TRAINER/Teach

Binding the Pupil transmitter to the Teacher trans-

mitter

Note:

During the binding procedure the distance between the

two transmitters should not be too great. You may need

to change the relative position of the two transmitters

and initiate the binding process a second time.

If necessary, close the Trainer transfer switch which you

have just assigned …

12345678

BIND:SW: N/A

TRAINER/Teach

… and start the “BINDING” process ﬁ rst at the Pupil

transmitter by brieﬂ y pressing the central SET button of

the right-hand touch-key …

–P

2345678

BIND:SW: –––

BINDING

TRAINER/Pupil

… and immediately afterwards that of the Teacher

transmitter:

12345678

BIND:

SW: 9

BINDING

TRAINER/Teach

As soon as this process is concluded, both screens dis-

play “ON” instead of the ﬂ ashing message “BINDING”:

12345678

BIND: ON

SW: 9

TRAINER/Teach

–P

2345678

BIND: ON

SW: –––

TRAINER/Pupil

This concludes the binding process, and you can return

to the basic display of both transmitters, and start trainer

mode operations - once you have checked the operation

of all the functions.

However, if neither transmitter, or only one of the trans-

mitters, displays “ON”, indicating that the binding proce-

dure has failed, try changing the relative position of the

two transmitters, and repeat the whole procedure.

During …

138 Program description: Trainer system

Trainer mode operations

… it is no problem for the Teacher and Pupil to stand

a little way apart. However, you should never exceed a

distance of 50 m (this is known as the call range), and

no other persons should stand between the Teacher and

Pupil, as this could reduce the effective range. Please

note also that the wireless Trainer function exploits the

downlink connection, and for this reason no telemetry

data are transmitted from the model in this mode.

In this mode of operation the basic display of the Teach-

er transmitter looks like this …

GRAUBELE

#01

2:22h

stop

flt

«normal »

0:00

5.5V

51%

5.2V HoTT

RFC–Teach

… and that of the Pupil transmitter typically like this:

GRAUBELE

#09

1:11h

stop

flt

0:00

33%

4.9V HoTT

RFC-Pupil

If it should occur that the link between the Teacher and

Pupil transmitters is lost during Trainer mode operations,

note that the Teacher transmitter automatically assumes

control of the model.

In this situation, if the Trainer change-over switch is in

the “Pupil” position, then the central LED on the Teacher

transmitter starts to ﬂ ash blue / red for the duration of

the signal loss, and the transmitter emits audible warn-

ing signals. At the same time “RFC-” ﬂ ashes in the basic

display, and the following warning is displayed:

student

signal

However, if only “RFC-” ﬂ ashes in the basic transmitter

display, and - relatively quiet - audible signals are heard

…

GRAUBELE

#01

2:22h

stop

flt

«normal »

0:00

5.5V

51%

5.2V HoTT

RFC–Teach

… then this indicates that the Pupil signal has also been

lost, but the Trainer transfer switch is in the “Teacher”

position.

In either situation your ﬁ rst recourse should be to reduce

the distance between the two transmitters. If this does

not help, land the model immediately, and seek the

cause.

However, if both transmitters are operating with the re-

ceiving system switched off, then the “familiar” symbol

appears in the basic display of the Teacher transmitter

instead of the two symbols.

Resuming Trainer mode operations

If - for whatever reason - one or both transmitters are

switched off during a Trainer mode session, then the

screen displays the following query when the transmitter

or transmitters are switched on again:

TRAINER

Wireless Link

INHACT

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to conﬁrm “ACT(ivate)”, or alternatively wait for about

two seconds until the message disappears; the last link

you created with a Teacher or Pupil transmitter is now

restored.

However, if you select “INH(ibit)” using one of the arrow

buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key …

TRAINER

Wireless Link

INHACT

… and conﬁ rm your choice by brieﬂ y pressing the cen-

tral SET button of the right-hand touch-key, this resets

that transmitter to “normal” operation. In this case you

will have to repeat the binding process with a Teacher or

Pupil transmitter as and when required.

139

For your notes

140 Program description: Info display

Info Display

Date, time, transmitter ID and memory card

Use the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key

to leaf through to the “Info” menu point of the multi-

function menu:

servo set.

D/R expo

wing mixer

contr set.

phase trim

free mixer

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

teach/pupi info disp

servo set.

D/R expo

free mixer

contr set.

heli mixer

swashp.mix

servo disp basic sett

fail-safe telemetry

teach/pupi info disp

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to open the menu point:

RFID

firmware ver.

date

time

SD-CARD

available

(FRI)

1.11

0KB

ABCDEF12

2011/03/11

11:22:33s

0KB

This menu displays transmitter-speciﬁ c information,

some of which can be altered where necessary and

sensible.

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the appropriate line, then touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key. In the

highlighted value ﬁ eld you can now alter the default

value using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-

key, and conclude your input with a further touch of the

central SET key.

RFID

firmware ver.

date

time

SD-CARD

(FRI)

1.11

0KB

ABCDEF12

2011/03/11

11:22:33s

This line displays the transmitter’s identiﬁ cation number.

This number is speciﬁ c to the transmitter, and is only

issued once for each transmitter. During the binding

process this ID is transmitted to the receiver (amongst

other data), so that it is able at any time to identify the

radio signals of “its” transmitter.

Version

RFID

firmware ver.

date

time

SD-CARD

(FRI)

1.11

0KB

ABCDEF12

2011/03/11

11:22:33s

This line displays the version number of the transmitter

software currently installed.

By comparing the number shown here with the update

version available for the same product on the Internet

at www.graupner.de you can judge whether an update

to the transmitter’s operating system is necessary and

useful.

In some circumstances our Service department may

also ask you for the version number.

Date

RFID

firmware ver.

date

time

SD-CARD

(FRI)

1.11

0KB

ABCDEF12

2011/03/11

11:22:33s

If necessary, select this line using the arrow buttons ** of

the left or right-hand touch-key, then select the month or

day ﬁ eld. A brief press of the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key activates the corresponding value

ﬁ eld, and you can then set the year, month or day using

the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key. A further

brief press of the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key concludes the input process. The available

range of years runs from 2000 to 2135.

The weekday, shown in brackets at far right in abbrevi-

ated form, is automatically generated from the date.

Notes:

The date and time of day can also be set using the •

PC program available for the corresponding product

on the Internet at www.graupner.de; this requires that

the transmitter should be connected to a PC in the

appropriate manner.

The date and time are protected from data loss due •

to power failure - for example, when the battery is

swapped - by a user-replaceable buffer battery.

141

Program description: Info display

Time

RFID

firmware ver.

date

time

SD-CARD

(FRI)

1.11

0KB

ABCDEF12

2011/03/11

11:22:33s

If necessary, you can select this line, and the minutes

ﬁ eld, using the arrow buttons of the left or right-hand

touch-key. A brief press on the central SET button of the

right-hand touch-key activates the corresponding value

ﬁ eld, and you can then adjust the hours or minutes

using the arrow buttons of the right-hand touch-key. A

further brief press on the central SET button of the right-

hand touch-key concludes the entry process.

Note that the seconds display cannot be set directly;

instead it can be reset to “00” with a touch of the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key.

Notes:

The date and time of day can also be set using the •

PC program available for the corresponding product

on the Internet at www.graupner.de; this requires that

the transmitter should be connected to a PC in the

appropriate manner.

The date and time are protected from data loss due •

to power failure - for example, when the battery is

swapped - by a user-replaceable buffer battery.

SD card

RFID

firmware ver.

date

time

SD-CARD

(FRI)

1.11

2048KB

ABCDEF12

2011/03/11

11:22:33s

This line displays the storage capacity in KB of a memo-

ry card installed in the transmitter.

Depending on the memory capacity of the micro-SD

or micro-SDHC memory card ﬁ tted in the transmitter,

it may take several minutes for the display to show the

correct value after you switch the transmitter on.

available

firmware ver.

date

time

SD-CARD

(FRI)

1.11

2048KB

2011/03/11

11:22:33s

available 1234KB

Display of the available memory in KB.

As already mentioned, it may take a certain amount of

time for the available memory to be displayed after you

switch the transmitter on, depending on the total capac-

ity of the installed memory card.

The next line down displays the available memory in

relation to the total memory capacity:

date

time

SD-CARD

(FRI)

2048KB

2011/03/11

11:22:33s

available 1234KB

60%

As already mentioned, it may take a certain amount of

time for the available memory to be displayed after you

switch the transmitter on, depending on the total capac-

ity of the installed memory card.

142 Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

mx-16 HoTT programming techniques

Preparation, using a ﬁ xed-wing model aircraft as an example

Programming model data into an mx-16 HoTT …

… is easier than it might appear at ﬁ rst sight.

There is one basic rule which applies equally to all pro-

grammable radio control transmitters, and not just to the

mx-16 HoTT: if the programming is to go “smoothly”

and the systems work as expected, the receiving sys-

tem components must ﬁ rst be installed correctly in the

model, i. e. the mechanical systems must be ﬁ rst-rate.

This means: ensure that each servo is at its correct

neutral position when you ﬁ t the output lever or disc

and connect the linkage to it. If you ﬁ nd this is not the

case, correct it! Remove the output arm, rotate it by one

or more splines and secure it again. If you use a servo

tester, e. g. the RC-Tester, Order No. 2894.12, to centre

the servos, you will ﬁ nd it very easy to ﬁ nd the “correct”

position.

Virtually all modern transmitters offer facilities for offset-

ting the neutral position of servos, but this is no substi-

tute for a correct mechanical installation; this function is

only intended for ﬁ ne tuning. Any substantial deviation

from the “0” position may result in additional asymmetry

when the signal undergoes further processing in the

transmitter. Think of it this way: if the chassis of a car

is distorted, you may be able to force the vehicle to run

straight by holding the steering wheel away from centre,

but it does not make the chassis any less bent, and the

basic problem remains.

Another important point is to set up the correct control

travels wherever possible by using the appropriate link-

age points in the mechanical system; this is much more

efﬁ cient than making major changes to the travel set-

tings at the transmitter. The same rule applies: electronic

travel adjustment facilities are designed primarily to

compensate for minor manufacturing tolerances in the

servos and for ﬁ ne adjustment, and not to compensate

for poor-quality construction and defective installation

methods.

If two separate aileron servos are installed in a ﬁ xed-

wing model aircraft, the ailerons can also be employed

as ﬂ aps by deﬂ ecting both of them down, and as air-

brakes by deﬂ ecting both of them up - simply by setting

up a suitable mixer (see the section starting on the next

double page). Such systems are generally more often

used in gliders and electric gliders than in power models.

In such cases the servo output arms should be offset

forward by one spline relative to the neutral point, i. e.

towards the leading edge of the wing, and ﬁ tted on the

servo output shaft in that position.

The mechanical differential achieved by this asym-

metrical installation takes into account the fact that the

braking effect of the up-going ailerons increases with

their angle of deﬂ ection, and this means that much less

travel is usually required in the down-direction than the

up-direction.

Similar reasoning applies to the installation of the ﬂ ap

linkage when separately actuated ﬂ ap servos are in-

stalled, designed to be used in a butterﬂ y (crow) system.

Here again an asymmetrical linkage point is useful. The

braking effect of the crow system is provided primarily

by the down-movement of the ﬂ aps rather than the

up-movement of the ailerons, so in this case the servo

output arms should be angled aft, i. e. offset towards the

trailing edge of the wing, as this makes greater travel

available for the down-movement. When this combina-

tion of lowered ﬂ aps and raised ailerons is used, the

ailerons should only be raised by a moderate extent, as

their primary purpose in this conﬁ guration is to stabilise

and control the model rather than act as brakes.

You can “see” the difference in terms of braking effect by

deploying the crow system, then looking over and under

the wing from the front: the larger the projected area of

the deﬂ ected control surfaces, the greater the braking

effect.

Outboard ailerons

Inboard camber-changing flaps

(This type of asymmetrical installation of the servo

output arms can also make sense when you are setting

up split ﬂ aps or landing ﬂ aps on a power model.)

Once you have completed your model and set up the

mechanical systems accurately in this way, you are

ready to start programming the transmitter. The instruc-

tions in this section are intended to reﬂ ect standard

practice by describing the basic general settings ﬁ rst,

and then reﬁ ning and specialising them to complete the

set-up. After the initial test-ﬂ ight, and in the course of

continued test-ﬂ ying, you may need to adjust one or oth-

143

Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

er of the model’s settings. As your piloting skills improve

and you gain experience, it is very likely that you will

feel the need to try out reﬁ nements such as expanded

control systems, and to cater for these requirements you

may ﬁ nd that the text deviates from the obvious order of

options, or that one or other of the options is mentioned

more than once.

On the other hand, it can certainly occur that not every

step described in these instructions is relevant to a

particular model, just as some users might miss the

description of a particular step which is relevant to his

model only …

Regardless of all this, it is worthwhile thinking carefully

about a sensible layout of the transmitter controls at this

point, just before you start programming the model data.

If the model in question is one with the emphasis on

“power” - whether the power of an electric motor or

internal-combustion engine (glow motor) - you will prob-

ably encounter few problems in this matter, because

the two stick units are primarily employed to control the

four basic functions “power control (= throttle)”, “rudder”,

“elevator” and “aileron”. Nevertheless, you still have to

call up the …

“Basic settings” menu (pages 56 … 62)

mod name

stick mode

CH8 delay

motor on C1

yes

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

… and deﬁ ne your preferred throttle direction, i. e.

throttle minimum forward (“Idle forward”) or back (“Idle

back”), because the program’s default setting is “none”

(i. e. no motor) when you ﬁ rst set up a model memory.

The basic difference between “none” or “none/inv” and

“throttle min. forward / back” is the effect of the Ch 1 trim.

The trim is effective over the full stick travel if “none (/

inv)” is entered, but it only affects the idle range if you

enter “throttle min. forward or back”. However, it also

affects the “direction of effect” of the Ch 1 stick, i. e. if

you switch from “forward” to “back” or vice versa, you

do not also have to reverse the direction of the throttle

(or brake) servo. For safety reasons you will also see a

warning message, and hear an audible warning, if you

switch the transmitter on with the throttle stick positioned

towards “full-throttle” - but only if you have already set

“throttle min. forward or back”.

#01

0:33h

stop 0:00

0:00

0.0V

5.2V HoTT

throttle

too

high !

Your choice of “none” (no motor) or “throttle min. forward

or back” also affects the range of mixers available in the

“Fixed-wing mixers” menu. The mixers “Brake ¼ NN *”

are only present if you choose “none” (no motor) or

“none/inv”; otherwise they are suppressed.

In addition to these basic matters you will certainly need

to consider carefully how best to control any “auxiliary

functions” present on your model.

In contrast, if your model is a glider or electric glider the

whole situation may be rather different. The immediate

question is: what is the best way of operating the motor

and braking system? Now, some solutions have proved

to be practical, and others less so.

For example, it is not a good idea to be forced to let

go of one of the primary sticks in order to extend the

airbrakes or deploy the crow braking system when your

glider is on the landing approach. It surely makes more

sense to set up switchable functions for the Ch 1 stick

(see example 4 on page 150), or to assign the braking

system to the throttle stick, and shift the motor control

to a slider - or even a switch. With this type of model the

electric motor is often little more than a “self-launching

system”, and is used either to haul the model into the

sky at full power, or to pull it from one area of lift to the

next at, say half-power, and for such models a three-

position switch is usually quite adequate. If the switch is

positioned where you can easily reach it, then you can

turn the motor on and off without having to let go of the

sticks - even on the landing approach.

Incidentally, similar thinking can be applied to ﬂ ap

control systems, regardless of whether they are “just”

the ailerons, or full-span (combination) control surfaces

which are raised and lowered in parallel.

Once you are satisﬁ ed that all these preparations have

been completed successfully, programming can com-

mence.

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

144 Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

First steps in programming a new model

Example: non-powered ﬁ xed-wing model aircraft

When programming a new model you should start by

activating the …

“select model” sub-menu (page 52)

… in the “Model memory” menu. Use the arrow buttons

cd of the left or right-hand touch-key to select a free

model memory …

¿¿free¿¿

R08

¿¿free¿¿

… then touch the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key. You are now immediately requested to select

the type of model you wish to program.

Sel model type

( empty mod mem )

Since in this example we are setting up a ﬁ xed-wing

model, we simply conﬁ rm the ﬁ xed-wing model symbol

with a brief press on the central SET button of the right-

hand touch-key; the screen now reverts to the basic

display.

Notes:

Naturally you can also use the pre-deﬁ ned model •

memory 01 for programming your ﬁ rst model; this is

the “ﬁ xed-wing model” type by default.

Once you have called up the “Model select” option it •

is not possible to interrupt the process, i. e. you must

choose one or other model type. Even if you switch

off the transmitter at this point, you cannot avoid this

select procedure. However, if you make a mistake

you can always correct it simply by erasing the mod-

el memory.

If the battery voltage is too low, you will not be able •

to change model memories for safety reasons. The

screen then displays an appropriate message:

not possible now

voltage too low

Now that you have overcome this ﬁ rst hurdle, you can

start programming the actual transmitter settings to suit

the model in the …

“Basic settings” menu (pages 56 … 62)

mod name

stick mode

CH8 delay

motor on C1

yes

tail type normal

At this point you can enter the “Model name” by touch-

ing the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key in

order to move to the character table:

0123456789

PQRSTUVWXYZ

model name

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

GRAUB

You should also check the settings for “Stick mode” and

“Motor at Ch 1” and change them if necessary:

“none”:•

The brake system is “retracted” at the forward posi-

tion of the throttle / brake stick; the “Ch8 delayed” op-

tion and the “Brake ¼ NN *” mixers in the “Wing mi-

xers” menu are activated.

The warning message “Throttle too high” - see page

28 - and the “Motor stop” option are disabled.

“none/inv”:•

The brake system is “retracted” at the back position

of the throttle / brake stick; the “Ch8 delayed” option

and the “Brake ¼ NN *” mixers in the “Wing mixers”

menu are activated.

The warning message “Throttle too high” - see page

28 - and the “Motor stop” option are disabled.

“Throttle min. forward or rear”:•

Ch 1 trim works forward or back. If the throttle stick

is too far in the direction of “full-throttle” when you

switch the transmitter on, you will be warned of this

with the message “Throttle too high”.

The “Motor stop” option is activated, and the “Brake

¼ NN *” mixers in the “Wing mixers” menu are dis-

abled.

Note:

As mentioned previously, selecting “motor” or “no motor”

also affects the range of mixers available in the “Fixed-

wing mixers” menu. For this reason we shall initially

consider “none” (no motor) in the following programming

example.

In the next two lines you select the basic arrangement

of the servos in the model, and inform the transmitter of

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

145

Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

your choice:

stick mode

motor on C1

tail type normal

CH8 delay

aile/flap 2aile

yes

tail type: “normal”, “V-tail”, “delt/FlW” or

“2elev sv”

aile/ﬂ ap: 1 or 2 aileron servos and 0 or 2 ﬂ ap

servos

Note:

If your model is ﬁ tted with only one camber-changing

ﬂ ap servo, you should still select “… 2FL”. Later, in the

“Fixed-wing mixers” menu (see page 88), you should

select the “AIL ¼ FL” mixer and set it to 0%. You can still

exploit all the other mixers available at that point in the

usual way.

At this juncture - if not before - you should check that

the servos are connected to the receiver in the standard

Graupner sequence:

Airbrakes or throttle / speed controller

or speed controller (electric)

Right flap servo

Flap servo or left flap servo

Rudder servo or V-tail

Aileron servo or left aileron servo

Elevator servo or V-tail

Right aileron servo

Auxiliary function

Receiver power supply

Notes:

If you set up a V-tail, but the “up / down” and / or “left •

/ right” functions work the wrong way round, please

refer to the table in the right-hand column on page

44 for the remedy. The same procedure can be used

if you set up ﬂ aperons (superimposed ailerons and

ﬂ aps), and they work the wrong way round.

The following settings apply to a model with a “nor-•

mal” tail and no motor (“none”); if your model has a V-

tail, the settings can be adopted virtually unchanged.

However, if the model is a delta or ﬂ ying wing, the sit-

uation is not quite so straightforward. A special pro-

gramming example covering this model type will be

found in the section starting on page 156.

In the …

“Servo settings” menu (page 72)

rev cent +

trav

100% 100%

… ... you can set various parameters relating to the ser-

vos, i. e. “direction of rotation”, “neutral setting” and

“servo travel”, to suit the requirements of the model.

By “requirements” we mean adjustments to servo centre

and servo travel which are needed to compensate for

minor tolerances in servos and slight inaccuracies on

the model itself.

Note:

The facilities provided in this menu for setting asym-

metrical servo travels are NOT intended as a means of

setting up differential travel on ailerons and / or camber-

changing ﬂ aps. There are more suitable options for

this in the form of speciﬁ c functions in the “Fixed-wing

mixers” menu; see the ﬁ rst two options in the picture on

the right.

Once you have completed the settings described thus

far, a ﬁ xed-wing or powered model aircraft (the latter

if you enter the idle direction of the throttle stick in the

“Motor at Ch 1” line of the “Basic settings” menu) will,

in principle, ﬂ y.

However, there are no “reﬁ nements” in this set-up, and

it is the reﬁ nements which will give you more long-term

pleasure in your ﬂ ying. Assuming that you are already

capable of controlling your model safely, it’s time to get

a taste of these extra facilities; to this end we now move

on to the …

“Fixed-wing mixers” menu (pages 88 … 93)

–––

ail

diff aile.

rudd

flaps

brak

elev

flap

aile

elev

flap

aile

elev

flap

diff–red

aile

diff flaps

Note:

This menu will show a varying range of options depend-

ing on the information you have entered in the “Basic

settings” menu. In the illustration above, the full range

is shown, as generated by the entries “2AIL 2FL” in the

146 Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

“Ail/Flap” line, and “none (/inv) in the “Motor at Ch 1” line.

Of particular interest at the moment are “AIL-Diff.”

(aileron differential) and the “AIL ¼RUD” (aileron ¼

rudder) mixer, sometimes known as a combi-switch,

and perhaps the mixers “Brake ¼AIL” and “Brake ¼

FLAP”.

As already described in detail on pages 89 and 90, the

purpose of “AIL-Diff.” (aileron differential) is to eliminate

adverse yaw.

When a model aircraft turns, the down-going aileron

produces more drag than the up-going one if both move

through the same angle, and this causes the model to

yaw in the opposite direction to the turn. This can be

eliminated by setting differential aileron travel. A value

between 20% and 40% is usually a good starting point,

but the “perfect” setting nearly always has to be estab-

lished by practical testing.

The same applies to the “FL-Diff.” (ﬂ ap differential)

option if your model also features two camber-changing

ﬂ ap servos, assuming that the ﬂ aps are also to be used

as ailerons, e. g. using the “AIL ¼FL” mixer.

The “AIL ¼RUD” (aileron ¼ rudder) mixer serves a

similar purpose, but also makes many models generally

easier to handle when turning. A value of around 50%

is usually a practical starting point. However, it is advis-

able to be able to switch this function off, particularly if

you have ambitions as an aerobatic pilot; this is done by

assigning a physical switch to the mixer (for example,

the writer switches this mixer off “automatically” when he

switches into the “Speed” ﬂ ight phase, simply by assign-

ing the same switch to both options).

It is usually only necessary to set up a “Brake ¼ELE”

(brake ¼ elevator) mixer if your model suffers an

excessive change of speed when you deploy the brak-

ing system. The danger is that you might need to retract

the brakes again on the landing approach when you

realise the model will “land short”; if its airspeed is too

low when you retract the brakes, the model will just fall

to the ground at that point. If you set up such a mixer it is

important to test the setting at a safe height, and adjust

the trim compensation if necessary.

If you have selected “2AIL” or “2AIL 2FL” in the “Aileron /

Flap” line of the “Basic settings” menu …

stick mode

motor on C1

tail type normal

CH8 delay

aile/flap 2aile

yes

… and if you wish to be able to deﬂ ect both ailerons up

using the throttle / brake stick (Ch 1), then a suitable

value should be entered in the “Brake ¼AIL” line.

–––

–––0%

ail

diff aile.

rudd

brak

elev

aile

elev aile

In principle the same applies to the “Brake ¼FL” line,

which also becomes available if you have selected “2AIL

2FL”, although the set value should cause the ﬂ aps to

deﬂ ect as far as possible in the downward direction

when the brake stick is operated. It is important to en-

sure that the servos do not strike their mechanical end-

stops. To achieve this, you may need to limit the servo

travel(s) for the servos concerned using the “TRAVEL-”

or “TRAVEL+” line on the “RX SERVO” display page of

the “Telemetry” menu.

If the ailerons are set up to act as simple brakes, as de-

scribed previously, or as part of the braking arrangement

in a butterﬂ y (crow) system, then you should always

enter a value for “Diff.-Red.” (“differential reduction” -

see page 93) - selecting 100% is the safe option here!

Differential reduction means that aileron differential is

suppressed proportionally only when you operate the

airbrake stick. The purpose of this is to increase the

down-going aileron travel on the landing approach, with

the aim of improving aileron response.

If the wing is equipped with two camber-changing ﬂ ap

servos in addition to two separately actuated ailerons,

then the “AIL ¼FL” (aileron ¼ ﬂ ap) mixer transfers

the aileron movements to the ﬂ aps; we suggest that the

ﬂ aps should not follow the movement of the ailerons to a

greater extent than about 50%.

Note:

If you have only installed one ﬂ ap servo, you should

leave this mixer at 0%.

The “FL ¼AIL” (ﬂ ap ¼ aileron) mixer works in the

opposite direction; depending on the layout of the model

we suggest values between about 50% and 100% for

this option. The ﬂ aps are controlled using the transmitter

control or switch assigned to the input “E6”. Preferably,

however, one of the rotary proportional controls (CTRL 6

… 8) should be used for this.

Note:

We strongly recommend that you reduce the travel of

the ﬂ aps to about 25% in the “Transmitter control

settings” menu, as this gives ﬁ ner control of the ﬂ ap

positions using the selected transmitter control.

147

Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

The remaining options in the “Fixed-wing mixers” menu

are designed to provide further ﬁ ne-tuning of multi-ﬂ ap

wing systems, and are largely self-explanatory.

When you have completed the model-speciﬁ c settings

up to this point, you are probably ready to consider the

model’s ﬁ rst ﬂ ight. At this juncture you should certainly

take the time to carry out a series of “dry runs”, i. e.

check all the settings thoroughly while the model is still

on the ground. Remember that a serious programming

error may damage more than just the model. If you are

not sure of any point, please ask an experienced model

pilot for advice.

If during the test phase you realise that one or other of

the settings needs to be changed in order to tailor the

model’s control response to your preferences - perhaps

the servo travels are too great or too small overall - then

we suggest that you turn to the …

“D/R / Expo” menu (page 82)

122%

100%

111%

+11%

aile

elev

rudd

DUAL EXPO

–––

+22%

… in order to adjust the overall set-up to suit your

requirements and ﬂ ying style.

The Dual Rate function is used to adjust the relationship

between stick travel and control surface travel (see page

82). However, if it is only the model’s control response

around neutral which is too powerful for comfortable

ﬂ ying, i. e. the maximum travels are acceptable, then

“Exponential” can be employed, either instead of Dual

Rates or in addition to them. If a physical switch is as-

signed to this function, you can switch between two Dual

Rate / Expo settings while the model is ﬂ ying.

148 Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

Including an electric power system when programming a model

An electric power system can be controlled in various

ways:

The simplest method of including such a power plant

in a model program is to use the throttle / brake stick

(Ch 1). However, in the preceding programming instruc-

tions we have already reserved the Ch 1 transmitter

control for the airbrakes, which means that we have

to explore other possibilities for controlling the motor:

one is to use the switchable solution described in the

section starting on page 150, and another is to use an

alternative transmitter control. A suitable option is one

of the two three-position switches SW 4/5 or 6/7, and

another is one of the rotary proportional controls CTRL

6 … 8. However, another alternative would be one of the

two-position switches. The main reason for your choice

ought to be that the switch is within easy reach of your

ﬁ ngers.

Before we turn to the individual examples, it is very

important to note that the “transition delay” which occurs

when you change ﬂ ight phases also affects other switch-

ing processes which are triggered simultaneously, for

example motor ON / OFF.

However, you may wish - especially in an emergency -

to be able to switch the motor off instantly, i. e. without

the transition delay. In this case it is advisable to make

use of the “Ch8 delayed yes / no” option in the “Basic

settings” menu. This is accomplished by connecting

your speed controller to receiver output 8, moving to the

…

“Basic settings” menu, (pages 56 … 62)

… and setting the “Ch8 delayed” option to “no”:

mod name

stick mode

CH8 delay

motor on C1

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

Example 1

Using one of the rotary proportional controls

CTRL 6 … 8

If one of these transmitter controls is used, the set-up is

extremely easy. All you have to do is connect the speed

controller to any of the receiver servo sockets 5 … 8

which is vacant.

However, please bear in mind that outputs 2 + 5 and 6

+ 7 may already be linked together, depending on the

model type you have selected and the number of aileron

and ﬂ ap servos in your model.

Connect your speed controller to the next vacant input,

and assign one of the rotary proportional controls CTRL

6 … 8 - in our example CTRL 7 - to the selected input -

for example, “E8”. This is accomplished in the …

“Transmitter control settings” menu (page 74)

Use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the desired line. Touching the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key activates “Switch

/ transmitter control assignment”. Now turn the knob of

the rotary proportional control: after a brief delay the en-

try “Transmitter control 7” will appear in the highlighted

ﬁ eld:

trv

I8 ctrl 7

free

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

free

In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the

speed controller you are using; alternatively you could

use the “-Travel+” column in the …

“Servo settings” menu (page 72).

rev cent +

trav

100% 100%

The last stage is to check the settings, so move from the

basic display to “Servo display”, typically by simultane-

ously touching the ef buttons of the left-hand touch-

key: In the “OFF” position of the rotary control CTRL 7

the control channel you have selected - in this example

channel “8” - should be at -100%, and at the “full-throttle”

setting at +100%.

149

Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

trv

free

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

free

In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the

speed controller you are using; alternatively you could

use the “Servo travel” column in the …

“Servo settings” menu (page 72).

rev cent +

trav

100% 100%

The last stage is to check the settings, so move from

the basic display to “Servo display” by simultaneously

touching the ef buttons of the left-hand touch-key: in

the switch’s “OFF” position, the control channel you have

selected - in our example this is channel “8” - should be

at -100%, and at the “full-throttle” setting at +100%.

Example 3

Using one of the three-position switches SW 4/5 or

6/7

This variant implements a three-stage solution for

switching an electric motor on and off, and also results

in an “abrupt “ motor start-up … unless the speed con-

troller you are using features what is known as a “soft

start” function.

At the receiving end you need a suitable speed controller.

Example 2

Using a two-position switch, SW 2, 3 or 8

This variant implements a pure ON / OFF function, and

results in the motor starting “abruptly” … unless the

speed controller you are using features what is known

as a “soft start” function.

At the receiving end you need either a simple electronic

switch or - if you want a smoother motor start - a suit-

able speed controller.

The settings for this arrangement are entered in the …

“Transmitter control settings” menu (page 74)

First check which receiver socket (5 or higher) is avail-

able for connection to your speed controller. If you have

assigned two aileron servos in the “Basic settings”

menu, and if you have not connected any other auxiliary

function, then this would be channel 6; if your model

features two aileron servos and two ﬂ ap servos, then

channel 8 would be available for connecting the speed

controller; the latter option is the one we wish to use in

this example.

First set the selected switch to the “OFF” position, then

use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-hand

touch-key to select the desired line in the menu. Touch

the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to

activate “Switch / transmitter control assignment”, then

move the selected switch from the “OFF” position to

the “ON” position. The highlighted ﬁ eld now shows the

switch number together with a symbol which indicates

the direction of switching:

First check which receiver socket (5 or higher) is avail-

able to connect your speed controller. If you have as-

signed two aileron servos in the “Basic settings” menu,

and if you have not connected any other auxiliary func-

tion, then this would be channel 6; if your model features

two aileron servos and two ﬂ ap servos, then channel 8

would be available for connecting the speed controller;

the latter option is the one we will use in this example.

Move to the …

“Transmitter control settings” menu (page 74)

… and use the arrow buttons cd of the left or right-

hand touch-key to select the desired line. Brieﬂ y press

the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key to

activate “Switch / transmitter control assignment”. Move

the selected three-position switch; the highlighted ﬁ eld

now shows the number of this transmitter control, for

example “Transmitter control 9”.

trv

I8 ctrl 9

free

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

free

In the third column you can adjust servo travel to suit the

speed controller you are using; alternatively you could

use the “Servo travel” column in the …

150 Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

Controlling the electric motor and butterﬂ y (crow)

system using the Ch 1 stick

Example 4

Butterﬂ y / crow system as landing aid: ailerons up,

ﬂ aps down

Before we start the programming of this fourth example,

and turn our attention to expanding the basic program-

ming we have already discussed, we need to consider

brieﬂ y the position of the throttle / brake stick at “motor

OFF” or “brake OFF”. Usually the Ch 1 stick is moved

forward to open the throttle, and back to extend the

brakes. However, if you adopt this “classic” conﬁ gura-

tion, and switch, say, from “motor OFF” (stick “back”)

to the braking system, “full brake” would immediately

be applied, and vice versa: if you switch from “brakes

retracted” to power, this would instantly switch to “full

power”.

It is certainly possible to make a “virtue” out of this

“vice”: a “glider pilot” - usually ﬂ ying with “brakes re-

tracted = forward” will only switch to motor “ON” when

necessary, and then reduce power to suit the situation

(and - we hope - does not forget to move the Ch 1 stick

back to the “forward” position when switching back). In

contrast, a typical “power pilot” would probably operate

with the reverse priority, i. e. he would only switch to

“brake” when necessary, etc. In any case, it is possible

to avoid these inter-connected effects by positioning the

“zero point” of both systems so that they coincide. The

above considerations mean that a “glider pilot” will prob-

ably prefer the “zero point forward” arrangement, while a

“power pilot” might well decide on “zero point back”.

The mx-16 HoTT transmitter can cope with whichever

arrangement you prefer. However, the following section

assumes that both “OFF” positions will be set to “for-

ward”. If you prefer the alternative arrangement, there is

no problem: the only difference compared with the ver-

sion described here is that you would select “none/inv”

in the “Motor at Ch 1” line of the “Basic settings” menu

instead of “none”. All the other settings can be adopted

as described.

In the …

“Transmitter control settings” menu (page 74)

mod name

stick mode

CH8 delay

motor on C1

yes

tail type normal

GRAUBELE

… leave the “motor at Ch 1” line at “none” if you have

set “Motor ON = forward”, or switch to “none/inv” if

preferred. This is essential, otherwise the “Brake 1 ¼

NN *” mixers which we need will be suppressed in the

“Fixed-wing mixers” menu.

Important Note:

As it is essential to set the motor to “none”, this also

automatically disables the “Throttle too high” power-

on warning! For this reason please take great care

to set the Ch 1 stick to the correct position before

you switch the receiving system on.

The next step is to ensure that the speed controller con-

nected to receiver output 1 is switched off “at the right

end”. To accomplish this you may have to move to the …

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

“Servo settings” menu (page 72).

rev cent +

trav

100% 100%

The last stage is to check the settings, so move from

the basic display to “Servo display” by simultaneously

touching the ef buttons of the left-hand touch-key: in

the (upper) “OFF” position of the three-position switch

the control channel you have selected - in our example

this is channel “8” - should be at -100%. If you now move

the switch toggle to the centre position, the bar should

be in the middle, and at the (lower) “full-throttle” setting it

should be at +100%.

151

Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

MIX1 c1 c1

trv

0%offs

ASYSYM

–100%–100%

Now move to the “Offs” line: when you do this, the SYM

and ASY ﬁ elds are replaced by STO and SET. With

the STO button highlighted, move the Ch 1 stick to the

“OFF” position you have selected, and then touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key: the value

to the right of “Offs” now changes from 0% to approx.

+100%, and the graphic display of the mixer curve

displayed on the right also changes accordingly:

MIX1 c1 c1

trv

+100%offs

SETSTO

–100%–100%

If you now touch the ef buttons of the left-hand touch-

key simultaneously to move to the …

“Servo display” menu (page 113),

… you can immediately check the effect of the settings

you have entered so far: with the mixer switched off,

the bar display for Channel 1 follows the movement of

the Ch 1 stick. With the mixer switched on it stops - as

shown - at around -100%.

Once you are conﬁ dent that the direction of the Ch 1

stick is “correct” as far as the motor is concerned, the

next step is to ensure that you can switch its effect on

the motor on and off, so that you can also control the

braking system. This is carried out in the …

“Free mixers” menu (pages 107 … 111)

typ fro to

?? ??

… where you need to program a free mixer “c1 ¼ c1”.

When you have done this, use the arrow button f of the

left or right-hand touch-key to move to the column above

the symbol, and assign your selected “change-over

switch” to this mixer; for example SW 2. This is done by

activating the switch assignment by touching the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and moving the

switch from “forward” to “back”, i. e. towards you.

With the mixer switched on, move to the column above

the f symbol using the arrow button of the left or

right-hand touch-key, and then on to the second screen

page by touching the central SET button of the right-

hand touch-key.

At this point you should set an initial SYMmetrical mixer

value of -100%.

“Servo settings” menu (page 72)

rev cent +

trav

100% 100%

… and reverse the direction of servo 1.

For safety’s sake you should check this setting now,

before you continue with the programming procedure.

Take the transmitter and model to a location where it

is safe to run the motor. Switch the transmitter on, and

move the Ch 1 stick to the motor “OFF” position, i. e. ei-

ther fully forward or back. Hold your model ﬁ rmly, or ask

a friend to hold it for you. Check that the propeller is free

to rotate without causing havoc, then connect the ﬂ ight

battery and switch your model’s receiving system on.

If the motor does NOT run when the stick is in the “for-

ward” or “back” position (as appropriate), then everything

is in order. However, please check the system anyway by

gradually advancing the stick until the motor begins to

run. When you are satisﬁ ed, stop the motor, then switch

off the receiving system in the model and ﬁ nally switch

off the transmitter.

Note:

If the motor does not start, or spins in the wrong direc-

tion, this indicates that there are other problems which

you must correct before you continue with programming.

For example, check the wiring of your motor, and refer

to the operating instructions supplied with your speed

controller.

152 Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

+33%

–5%

+55%

–––

–––0%

+44%

ail

diff aile.

rudd

brak

elev

aile

elev aile

Note:

The settings shown here are just examples, and must

not be adopted under any circumstances without careful

checking.

If your model also features camber-changing ﬂ aps, and

you have therefore selected “2AIL 2FL” in the “Aile

/ ﬂ ap” line of the “Basic settings” menu, locate the

“change-over switch” you have just operated (in this

case switch 2), move it “forward” again and switch to

the “Brake ¼FL” line using the arrow buttons cd

of the left or right-hand touch-key. You can now set the

desired down-deﬂ ection of the ﬂ aps when the Ch 1 stick

is moved (this ﬂ ap position is termed “crow” or “butter-

ﬂ y”; see also page 92), and assign the external switch

which also acts as the change-over switch by moving

it from the “forward” to the “back” position, as already

described.

If you now return to the “Servo display” menu and move

the Ch 1 stick alone, you will see that the bar display for

Channel 1 either remains at around -100% while the dis-

plays for channels 2 + 5 (and also the ﬂ aps 6 + 7, if set

up) follow the stick movement, or the other way round:

when the switch is operated, the latter stay at around the

mid-point, and only the Channel 1 display moves.

–100%

–88%

+88%

–100%

Note:

If you carry out this test with the receiving system

and power system switched on, please take great

care that you operate the change-over switch only

in the “motor OFF” position! If you ignore this, there

is a danger that the power system will be severely

overloaded by being switched on abruptly, and it

could even suffer damage. For the same reason

you should be careful only to use the change-over

switch at the “motor OFF” setting when you are ﬂ y-

ing the model.

To conclude the programming procedure, return the

selected “change-over switch” to the “motor ON” posi-

tion, i. e. “forward”; move back to the multi-function menu

and from there to the …

“Fixed-wing mixers” menu (pages 88 … 93)

where - assuming that you have not already done this

in your general model programming - you can select

the “Brake ¼AIL” line and set the desired aileron

travel when the Ch 1 stick is operated in the up direction

(“Brake”). In the column above the symbol touch the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key before

assigning your selected “change-over switch” by moving

your preferred switch from “forward” to “back”.

153

Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

you move the stick past the switching point in the direc-

tion of full-throttle, and that the stopwatch alone halts

again when you move the stick back to the idle position.

When the stopwatch is halted, you can stop the ﬂ ight

timer by touching the central ESC button of the left-hand

touch-key, and then reset both timers to their starting

value by simultaneously touching the two arrow buttons

cd of the right-hand touch-key (CLEAR) … or re-start

them by moving the stick beyond the switching point

again.

GRAUBELE

#01

3:33h

stop

flt

2:22

11:11

5.5V

50%

5.2V HoTT

Tip:

When using an electric motor the motor run is usually

limited by the capacity of the battery, and in this case

you would normally set the stopwatch to “count down”.

Simply enter the maximum permitted motor run, e. g.

“5 min.”. As described on pages 59 and 67 … 68, the

transmitter’s sounder starts to emit warning tones “30

sec” before “zero”.

tail type

C8 delay

normal

aile/flap 2aile

timer C2

motor on C1 no

5:00

With the stopwatch halted, touch the central ESC button

of the left-hand touch-key (CLEAR) button in the basic

display, so that the stopwatch switches to the “Timer”

function. The timer can now be started and stopped us-

ing the throttle control.

Alternatively, if you control your motor using one of the

switches SW 1 … 4 or 6/7, as described in Examples 2

or 3, you do not need any of the previously described

control switches. All you need to do is locate the switch

which you use to turn your motor on and off, and assign

the same switch to the “Timers”, with the same switching

direction, so that they start running at the same moment

you turn the motor on.

In contrast, if you have decided on the solution de-

scribed in Example 1, then unfortunately there is no al-

ternative but to operate the motor and timers separately.

If, following on from the model programming described

on the preceding pages, you have decided on Examp-

le 4 from the previous page, or you are using the Ch 1

stick (throttle / brake stick) to control motor power - inde-

pendently of this programming example - then you can

use the associated control switch to turn the stopwatch

on and off automatically.

To assign this control switch, move the Ch 1 stick to the

Idle position, then move to the “Timers” line in the …

“Basic settings” menu (pages 56 … 62)

Brieﬂ y touch the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key to activate the switch assignment, then select

the input ﬁ eld above the switch symbol and move the

throttle / brake stick from its idle position in the direction

of “full throttle”. Depending on the direction of move-

ment, the switch “G1l” or “G2l” will appear on the screen

at a particular position of the Ch 1 stick:

tail type

C8 delay

normal

aile/flap 2aile

timer C2

0:00

motor on C1 no

If you now move the stick back towards idle, you will see

that the switch symbol changes again at around 80% of

stick travel: between the “idle position” and the switch-

ing point the switch symbol is “open”, beyond this it is

“closed” (see “Control switches” on page 39).

If you now repeatedly press the central ESC button of

the left-hand touch-key to return to the transmitter’s

basic display, in order to check the system, you will see

that the stopwatch and ﬂ ight timer start running when

Operating the timers using the Ch 1 stick or a switch SW 1 … 9

154 Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

Using ﬂ ight phases

Within any of the twenty model memories you can

program up to four different ﬂ ight phases (states of

ﬂ ight), each incorporating settings which can be entirely

different from the others.

Each ﬂ ight phase can be called up by means of a switch.

Flight phases represent the simplest and most conven-

ient method of switching between different model set-

tings in ﬂ ight, and are programmed for different stages

of a typical ﬂ ight, such as “normal”, “thermal”, “speed”,

“distance” etc.

We assume that you have already programmed the

model in the transmitter’s model memory, set it up care-

fully, test-ﬂ own it and trimmed it out properly. First move

to the …

“Basic settings” menu (pages 56 … 62)

aile/flap 2ail2fl

timer 5:00 2

phase 2

phase 3

phase 4

takeoff

landing

speed

–––

… and then to the line “Phase 2”, “Phase 3” and / or

“Phase 4”, where you can either accept the default

name or assign a speciﬁ c, more appropriate, name to

each ﬂ ight phase. The purpose of this name is just to

help you differentiate between the ﬂ ight phases; it has

no signiﬁ cance in terms of programming. It will later ap-

pear in the transmitter’s basic screen display, and also in

the “Phase trim” and “D/R Expo” menu.

A physical switch must be assigned so that you can

select the different ﬂ ight phases. The ideal one for

switching a maximum of three ﬂ ight phases is one of the

three-position switches SW 4/5 or 6/7, located at front

left and right on the transmitter.

Each of the two end-points of this switch should be

assigned to one ﬂ ight phase, starting from the centre

position. We recommend that the switch direction should

match the phase numbering: as shown in the left-hand

illustration, for example, “Phase 2” is “forward” from the

centre position, while “Phase 3” is “back” (towards you).

Select the appropriate line, name, and switch assign-

ment in the “usual” way, i. e. using the various touch-

keys.

5:00 2

–––

aile/flap 2ail2fl

timer

phase 2

phase 3

phase 4

takeoff

landing

speed

Note:

In principle it makes no difference which names you as-

sign to the various phases - with the exception of Phase

1, which is assigned the name “normal”, and is always

active when ﬂ ight phases 2, 3 and 4 are disabled.

For general model ﬂ ying three ﬂ ight phases are usually

quite sufﬁ cient:

“Launch” or “Thermal” for launch and “staying up”,•

“Normal” for normal conditions, and•

“Speed” for ﬂ ying in “top gear”.•

At this point all three phases have been set up and

assigned names, and you can switch between them;

however … if you operate the phase switch you will soon

notice that nothing has changed, i. e. all the settings for

the control surfaces, and especially the wing ﬂ aps, are

the same.

To change these settings, call up the …

“Phase trim” menu (page 86)

… move the phase switch (or switches) to the appropri-

ate position, and enter the desired values in the stand-

ard way by touching the input buttons, in a similar way to

the method of adjusting transmitter control centres and

offsets with other radio control systems.

normal 0%

+2%

+8%

–3%

–5%

–7%

+2%

+5%

+10%

P H A S E T R I M

takeoff

speed

thermal

AIL ELEFLA

If you now switch the receiving system on and select the

different phases in turn, you will see a difference in con-

trol surface response. The differences are also reﬂ ected

in the bar display for the servos in the “Servo display”

menu, which you can call up from virtually any menu

position by simultaneously touching the ef buttons of

the left-hand touch-key.

Note:

Depending on the information you have entered in the

“aile/ﬂ ap” line of the “Basic settings” menu, the “ELE”

column alone, the “AIL” and “ELE” columns, or - as

shown above - “FLAP”, “AIL” and “ELE” may appear on

the screen for “Phase trimming”.

155

Programming example - ﬁ xed-wing model

Programming example: servos running in parallel

In some cases a second servo is required to run in

parallel with an existing servo; for example, if a second

elevator or rudder is to be actuated by a separate servo,

or where a second servo is needed to cope with very

high control forces, or where two servos are required for

a large control surface due to the high forces involved.

This task could be solved simply by connecting both ser-

vos together in the model using a conventional Y-lead.

However, this has the drawback that the linked servos

cannot be adjusted individually from the transmitter, i. e.

you forfeit the basic advantage of the computer radio

control system: separate adjustment of individual servos

from the transmitter.

Another option would be to call up the Telemetry menu

and use its “Channel mapping” option instead of a

simple Y-lead; see page 121. However, the simplest

method is to use the transmitter’s software facilities. For

example, it is easy to set up …

Two elevator servos

… to operate in parallel. First move to the …

“Basic settings” menu (page 56 … 62)

mod name

stick mode

motor on C1

idle re.

tail type

cut off +150%–100% –––

2elev sv

… and set “2elev sv” in the “tail type” line.

The two elevator servos are then connected to receiver

output sockets 3 and 8.

Two rudder servos

In this example we will connect two rudders “in parallel”

using the “Free mixers” menu. The second rudder could

be connected to receiver output 8, which is not already

in use.

The ﬁ rst step is to move to the …

“Free mixers” menu (pages 107 … 111)

typ fro to

?? ??

… and set up a mixer “Tr RUD ¼ 8”.

In the “Type” column select the “Tr” setting, so that the

rudder trim affects both rudder servos.

Finally switch to the graphics page and set a SYMmetri-

cal mixer input of +100%:

MIX1 rd 8

trv

0%Offs

ASYSYM

+100%+100%

Once again, for safety reasons it is really essential that

you set input 8 to “free” in the “Transmitter control

settings” menu.

As an added reﬁ nement, you may want both rudders

to deﬂ ect outwards only, as part of a braking system

controlled by the Ch 1 stick. This can be accomplished

by setting up two additional mixers “c1 ¼ 4” and “c1 ¼

second rudder control channel”, with suitable servo

travel settings. An offset of +100% is then selected for

both mixers, as the Ch 1 stick is (usually) at its top end-

point when the airbrakes are retracted, and the winglet

rudders are only required to deﬂ ect outwards proportion-

ally when the brakes are extended.

156 Programming example: delta and ﬂ ying wing

On page 142, where the section on ﬁ xed-wing model

programming starts, you will ﬁ nd general notes regard-

ing the installation and set-up of the RC system in a

model, and - of course - this applies equally to deltas

and ﬂ ying wings. The information on test-ﬂ ying and reﬁ n-

ing the settings is also relevant, including the section on

programming ﬂ ight phases.

left

right

In their characteristic shape and geometry, deltas and

ﬂ ying wings differ very signiﬁ cantly from “normal” models

even at ﬁ rst sight, but the differences in the requisite

servo arrangement are rather more subtle. The “clas-

sic” model delta or ﬂ ying wing generally has only two

control surfaces, which act both as ailerons (in opposite

directions) and as elevators (in the same direction), in a

similar way to the superimposed rudder / elevator func-

tions of a V-tail. More modern designs tend to be more

complex; one (or two) inboard control surfaces may be

used purely as elevators, while the outboard ailerons

also act as elevators, but to a reduced extent. If a ﬂ ying

wing has four or even six wing control surfaces, it is

certainly feasible nowadays to set them up with camber-

changing ﬂ ap functions and / or even a butterﬂ y (crow)

system.

However, most of these models still rank as “classic” del-

tas and ﬂ ying wings, and for them the servos should be

connected to the receiver as follows (see also page 44):

Airbrakes or throttle or speed

controller (electric motor)

Right flap

Left flap

Rudder (if present)

Left elevon (ail. / elev.) servo

Right elevon (ail. / elev.) servo

Auxiliary function

Receiver power supply

If your delta or ﬂ ying wing is of more “modern” conﬁ gura-

tion, the “normal” servo sequence has proved useful;

this arrangement can also be used for canards:

Airbrakes or throttle or speed

controller (electric motor)

Right flap (/ elevator)

Left flap (/ elevator)

Rudder (if present)

Left elevon (aileron / elevator)

Elevator (if present)

Right elevon (aileron / elevator)

Auxiliary function

Receiver power supply

Depending on the receiver servo sequence you select,

you should ﬁ rst move to the …

“Basic settings” menu (pages 56 … 62)

… and select the following options in each line:

“motor at C1”: x “none”:

The brake system is “retracted” at

the “forward” position of the throttle

/ brake stick; the “Ch8 delayed” op-

tion and the “Brake ¼ NN *” mixers

in the “Wing mixers” menu are

activated.

The warning message “Throttle too

Programming example: Delta / ﬂ ying wing

high” (see page 28) and the “Motor

stop” option are disabled.

x“none/inv”:

The brake system is “retracted” at

the “back” position of the throttle /

brake stick; the “Ch8 delayed” op-

tion and the “Brake ¼ NN *” mixers

in the “Wing mixers” menu are

activated.

The warning message “Throttle too

high” (see page 28) and the “Motor

stop” option are disabled.

x “Idle forward” or “Idle rear”

The Ch 1 trim operates either

forward or back. If you switch the

transmitter on with the throttle stick

too far in the direction of full-throttle,

you will see the warning message

“Throttle too high” on the screen.

The “Motor stop” option is activated,

and the “Brake ¼ NN *” mixers

in the “Wing mixers” menu are

disabled.

“tail type”: “Delta / ﬂ ying wing” or “Normal”

“aile/ﬂ ap”: Two ailerons “2ail” and - if present -

two ﬂ aps “2ﬂ ”.

The primary function of these settings is to deﬁ ne the

range of wing mixers which the software makes avail-

able. If you select the “Delta / ﬂ ying wing” tail type, the

software automatically superimposes the elevator and

aileron functions. In this case the mixer ratios can be

adjusted by varying the Dual Rate settings in the “D/R /

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

157

Programming example: delta and ﬂ ying wing

Programming a model delta using the “normal” tail

setting

Alternatively, if you select the “normal” tail type in the

“Basic settings” menu, and connect the servos to the

receiver as shown in the lower of the two receiver socket

sequence diagrams on the left-hand page, then the

aileron function of the two elevon servos will work cor-

rectly, but not the elevator function.

In the “normal” tail type you have to force the two ailer-

on servos and the two ﬂ ap servos to move in the same

direction and provide an elevator effect when an eleva-

tor command is given. This requires the “elev ¼NN *”

wing mixers, whose effect can be adjusted separately.

The procedure starts by selecting the …

“Fixed-wing mixers” menu (pages 88 … 93)

(The following settings are model-speciﬁ c, and you

must check carefully that they work correctly on

your model before accepting them.)

+55%

+66%

+77%

–––

ail

diff aile.

rudd

flaps

brak

elev

flap

aile

elev

flap

aile

elev

flap

diff–red

aile

diff flaps

… where you set values other than zero for these mixers.

With this set-up the tailless model is considered to be a

Expo” menu (see page 82).

If you select “Delta / ﬂ ying wing”, all settings of the

“NN * ¼elev” wing mixers in the …

“Fixed-wing mixers” menu (pages 88 … 93)

–––

diff aile.

ail rudd

brak elev

diff–red

… affect the elevator (up / down) function of the two

elevon (combined aileron / elevator) servos, as well as

the ﬂ ap / elevator servos.

Notes:

The flap mixers and flap differential only appear in •

the list if you have also entered “2fl” in the “aile/flap”

line at the “Delta / Flying wing” model type; see illus-

tration on the right.

In principle the same applies to the “Brake • ¼ NN *”

mixers. These are also suppressed if you have decid-

ed on “Throttle min forward / back” in the “motor on

C1” line of the “Basic settings” menu.

Even if you have selected “2aile2fl”, the (digital) ele-•

vator and aileron trims only affect aileron / elevator. If

you wish to circumvent this, it is simpler to program

your model as described in the following section.

“normal” four-ﬂ ap wing (two ailerons and two ﬂ aps), and

therefore has all the options associated with this wing

type. The method involves the “elev ¼NN *” mixers,

which were originally intended only for pitch trim com-

pensation and non-standard applications. In this case

they are “abused” by setting higher values than normal,

in order to transfer the elevator signal to the control

surfaces of the tailless model.

However, none of the ﬁ xed-wing mixers includes the

digital trim of the elevator stick - so an alternative has to

be found.

Start by switching to the …

“Transmitter control settings” menu (page 74)

trv

+15% +15%

+100% +100%

ctrl 6

I8 +100% +100%

free

ctrl 6 +15% +15%

… and assign the same transmitter control to the inputs

5 and (if required) 6, e. g. the rotary proportional control

CTRL 6. Now move to the “Travel” column and reduce

the travel of the transmitter control for these two inputs

symmetrically to around 50%, or even less, because: the

lower this value, the ﬁ ner the trim control.

However, if you prefer to use the normal elevator trim

lever, set - or leave - the “elev ¼NN *” mixers to 0%,

and instead set up free linear mixers to do the job.

This is done by calling up the …

* NN = Nomen Nominandum (name to be stated)

158 Programming example: delta and ﬂ ying wing

“Free mixers” menu (pages 107 … 111)

typ fro to

el 6

… and setting up one linear mixer “Tr elev ¼ 5”, and - if

necessary - “Tr elev ¼ 6”.

Move to the graphic page of this menu to set the re-

quired mixer ratios. Check the settings, and above all

the direction of effect, in the “Servo display”, or on the

model itself, and change the preﬁ xes if necessary.

If you carry out the programming as described above,

the ailerons will also move in the same direction, like

ﬂ aps, when you move the elevator stick. The effect of the

“tr” option is that the elevator trim lever also affects the

associated mixer when you operate the elevator stick.

Since an additional transmitter control is no longer

required for this arrangement, you should disable input 5

and (if used) input 6 in the second column of the “Trans-

mitter control settings” menu; simply set these inputs

to “free”.

Many years ago, the author ﬂ ew a model delta pro-

grammed exactly in this way using the mc-20, with

the following additional reﬁ nements: “ﬂ ap settings” used

as trim, and butterﬂ y (crow) as landing aid - the latter

exploiting the “Brake ¼ AIL” and “Brake ¼ FL” wing

mixers to provide complete compensation for pitch trim

changes in both directions. In this case the term “ailer-

ons” means the outboard wing control surfaces, and

“ﬂ aps” the inboard pair of control surfaces.

A modern sweptback ﬂ ying wing can be controlled in

a similar fashion. These models also feature inboard

and outboard control surfaces: the former forward of

the Centre of Gravity, the latter aft of it. Deﬂ ecting the

inboard control surface(s) down increases lift and pro-

duces an up-elevator effect; deﬂ ecting them up creates

the opposite effect. In contrast, the outboard ailerons act

in the reverse direction: a down-deﬂ ection produces a

down-elevator effect, and vice versa. There are really no

limits to what can be achieved with appropriate settings

of the system’s sophisticated mixers.

However, please note that you should be extremely

careful when setting differential travel with such a con-

ﬁ guration, regardless of your model’s set-up, its tail type

and the number of servos you are using. This is because

differential travels on a tailless model tend to produce

an asymmetrical elevator effect, rather than the desired

adverse yaw reduction. For this reason it is advisable

to start with a differential setting of 0% - at least for the

ﬁ rst few ﬂ ights. When you are familiar with the model

and feel the need to experiment, it may then be feasible

under certain circumstances to try differential settings

deviating from zero.

For larger models it could be advisable to install winglets

ﬁ tted with rudders, i. e. small vertical surfaces at the

wingtips. If these are actuated by two separate servos,

they can be controlled as described in the example on

page 155 dealing with “Servos running in parallel”, or

using “Channel mapping” in the “Telemetry” menu; see

page 121.

You may also want both rudders to deﬂ ect outwards

when a braking system is operated using the Ch 1 stick,

and this can be accomplished as follows: if you have

selected the “normal” tail type, set up two further mixers

“c1 ¼4” and “c1 ¼second rudder control channel”

with suitable travel settings. The offset for both mixers

should be +100%, as the Ch 1 stick is usually at the

forward end-point when the airbrakes are retracted, and

the winglet rudders are only required to deﬂ ect outwards

proportionally when the brakes are extended.

159

For your notes

160 Programming example: F3A model

Programming example: F3A model aircraft

F3A models belong to the category of powered ﬁ xed-

wing model aircraft designed for competition ﬂ ying. They

may be powered by an internal combustion engine or

an electric motor. Electric-powered models are eligible

and totally competitive in the international F3A “pattern”

class, and also in the F5A electric aerobatic class.

In this programming example we assume that you have

already read through the description of the individual

menus, and are therefore familiar with the general

method of handling the transmitter.

On page 142, where the section on ﬁ xed-wing model

programming starts, you will ﬁ nd general notes on

installing and setting up the RC system in a model,

and - of course - this applies equally to F3A models, and

therefore does not need to be repeated at this point.

If an F3A model is accurately built, it usually exhibits ﬂ y-

ing characteristics which are almost completely neutral.

The perfect aerobatic model has a very smooth but pre-

cise control response, and any movement around any

one of its ﬂ ight axes should not affect the other axes.

F3A models are ﬂ own using aileron, elevator and rudder

controls. The use of separate servos for each aileron is

almost universal. The ﬂ ying controls are supplemented

by control of motor power (throttle function) and in many

cases a retractable undercarriage. As a result the servo

assignment for channels 1 to 5 is no different from the

ﬁ xed-wing models we have already described.

The auxiliary function “Retracts” is usually assigned to

one of the auxiliary channels 6 to 8. Ideally the retracts

are operated using one of the two switches without a

centre detent (SW 3 or SW 8). An optional “extra” - used

only if necessary - is mixture adjustment control for the

carburettor. This is generally operated by one of the

rotary proportional controls CTRL 6 … 8, connected to

one of the auxiliary channels not already in use.

Throttle or speed

controller (electric motor)

Mixture adjustment

Retracts

Rudder

Aileron or left aileron

Elevator

Right aileron

Auxiliary function

Receiver power supply

When assigning functions to the auxiliary channels at

the transmitter, it is advisable to ensure that the controls

required are within easy reach, since the advanced

aerobatic pilot has very little time to think about letting

go of the sticks - especially when ﬂ ying under competi-

tion conditions.

Programming

The basic programming of the transmitter has already

been described in detail in the section starting on page

144, so this section concentrates on tips speciﬁ c to F3A

models.

In the …

“Servo settings” menu (page 72)

rev cent +

trav

100% 100%

… you can adjust the servo settings to suit your model.

It has proved advisable to use at least 100% servo

travel, as precision of control can be perceptibly better if

relatively large servo travels are employed. This should

be borne in mind when building the model and design-

ing the control surface linkages. Any minor corrections

required can be made in the third column during the

initial test ﬂ ights.

The next step is to select the …

“Basic model settings” menu (page 56 … 62)

… and activate the idle trim for Channel 1 (normally

“Idle back”; i. e. full-throttle forward). The digital trim

now works at the idle end of stick travel. The “cut-off

trim” enables you to switch immediately from the “motor

stopped” position to the idle position you have previously

established just by applying a single “click” on the trim

lever (see page 40).

161

Programming example: F3A model

stick mode

motor on C1

tail type normal

cut off +150%–100% 9

aile/flap 2aile

idle re.

The remaining settings should be adjusted as required

to suit your personal preferences.

You may ﬁ nd it necessary to assign transmitter controls

to particular inputs to operate the retractable undercar-

riage and carburettor mixture adjustment. This is carried

out in the …

“Transmitter control settings” menu (page 74).

For example, you may like to assign a particular trans-

mitter control - perhaps one of the ON / OFF switches

SW 2 or 8 - to the input “E8” for the retracts, and a rotary

proportional control - e. g. CTRL 6 - to the input “E7”, for

mixture adjustment.

trv

ctrl 6

free

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

The retracts are extended and retracted when you oper-

ate the switch “SW 8”. You may need to adjust the travel

of the transmitter control, and perhaps reverse that

channel by setting a negative preﬁ x for servo travel.

F3A models ﬂ y fairly fast, and respond very “solidly” to

corrective movements of the servos. However, in com-

petition ﬂ ying it is vital that all abrupt control movements

model suddenly ballooning up.

A little down-elevator must usually be mixed in to ensure

that the aeroplane does not climb when the ailerons /

ﬂ aps are deployed.

To meet these requirements you need the two mixers

shown in the illustration below.

typ fro to

c1 el

The mixers are activated using one and the same ex-

ternal switch, e. g. “SW 3”, which therefore has to be as-

signed to both mixers, with the same direction of effect.

Touch the central SET button of the right-hand touch-key

to move to the mixer inputs on the second screen page,

and set the appropriate mixer ratios. In both cases the

mixer neutral point should be left at the centre position

of the Ch 1 stick travel.

For this reason you should now move the Ch 1 stick to

the Idle range, select the ASY ﬁ eld, and enter the follow-

ing values:

MIX 1: -60% … -80% and

MIX 2: -5% … -10%.

and corrections should be kept to a minimum, as the

judges will invariably notice any lack of smoothness and

dock a few points, so it is advisable to set exponential

control characteristics on the stick functions.

Move to the …

“D/R Expo” menu (page 82).

Exponential values of around +30% on aileron, elevator

and rudder have proved to be a good starting point, and

you can set them in the right-hand column of this menu.

These values provide smooth, well-deﬁ ned control of

the typical F3A model. Many experts use higher values;

even up to +60% exponential.

100%

+33%

aile

elev

rudd

DUAL EXPO

–––

+33%

Since F3A models generally have two aileron servos, it

has proved useful to deﬂ ect both ailerons “up” slightly for

the landing. In most cases this causes the model to ﬂ y a

little more slowly and with a more stable attitude on the

landing approach.

To achieve this you will need to program mixers in the …

“Free mixers” menu (section starting on page 106).

Both ailerons are usually required to deﬂ ect “up” as a

landing aid, in parallel with the movement of the throttle

stick, but only from the half-throttle setting in the direc-

tion of idle. From that point on, the further the stick is

moved towards the idle position, the more the ailerons

deﬂ ect up. The reverse occurs when you open the

throttle: the ailerons are returned to neutral to avoid the

162 Programming example: F3A model

Example of MIX 1:

MIX1 c1 5

trv 0%

0%offs

SYM ASY

–66%

This completes the basic set-up for a typical F3A model.

Correcting model-speciﬁ c errors

It is an unfortunate fact of life that even very carefully

built models exhibit minute faults and inaccuracies which

produce unwanted deviations when the model is ﬂ ying;

the mixers of a computer radio control system are then

needed to compensate for these deﬁ ciencies. In this

section we will describe how to carry out the adjust-

ments required, but please note the following points

before we get started: it is vital to ensure that the model

is built as accurately as humanly possible, is balanced

perfectly around the lateral and longitudinal axes, and

that motor downthrust and sidethrust are set correctly.

Rudder causes unwanted movement around the 1.

longitudinal and lateral axes

It is often the case that a rudder command caus-

es the model to rotate slightly around the longitudi-

nal and / or lateral axis. This is particularly trouble-

some in what is known as knife-edge ﬂ ight, where the

model’s total lift is generated by the fuselage, aided

by the rudder deﬂ ection. The result is that the mod-

el rotates and changes heading slightly, as if the pi-

lot were applying aileron or elevator at the same time.

These tendencies have to be corrected with compen-

sation around the lateral axis (elevator) and around

the longitudinal axis (aileron).

These corrections can be achieved easily with the

mx-16 HoTT, exploiting the “free mixers” once

again. For example, if the model rotates to the right

around the longitudinal (roll) axis when the rudder

is deﬂ ected to the right for a knife-edge pass, then

a mixer is set up which deﬂ ects the ailerons slight-

ly to the left. Heading changes around the lateral (el-

evator) axis can be corrected in a similar way using a

mixer acting upon the elevator:

a) Correction around the lateral axis (elevator)

MIX “rd ¼ el”

ASYmmetrical setting. The exact values required

must be found by ﬂ ight testing.

b) Correction around the longitudinal axis (aileron)

MIX “rd ¼ al”

ASYmmetrical setting. The exact values required

must be found by ﬂ ight testing.

In most cases relatively small mixer values are called

for - typically below 10% - but this does vary from

model to model.

Vertical climb and descent2.

Many models exhibit a tendency to deviate from the

ideal line in vertical climbs and descents. To correct

this we need an elevator neutral position which varies

according to the throttle setting. For example, if the

model tends to pull out of a vertical descent by itself

when the motor is throttled back, slight down-elevator

must be mixed in at this throttle setting.

MIX “c1 ¼ el”

As a rule you will need to set mixer values below 5%,

but once again there is no substitute for test-ﬂ ying.

Rolling (movement around the longitudinal axis) 3.

at idle

When you reduce the throttle setting, the model may

tend to roll slightly in one direction. Clearly an ai-

leron correction must be made. However, it is much

more elegant to let a mixer correct this effect for you

than to move the stick manually. Once again, a mixer

needs to be set up:

MIX “c1 ¼ al”

As a rule you will need to set mixer values below 5%,

but once again test-ﬂ ying is called for.

The adjustment process should only be carried out

in calm weather. Often all you need to do is apply the

mixer in the control segment between half-throttle

and idle. To achieve this, leave the Offset point at the

centre position, and set up the mixer ASYmetrically.

Rolling when ailerons and ﬂ aps are extended4.

If you ﬂ y the landing approach with both ailerons de-

ﬂ ected up, the model may show a tendency to roll

slightly due to minor variations in aileron servo trav-

el (or constructional inaccuracies); i. e. the model may

turn to either side by itself. Once again, this tenden-

cy can easily be corrected using a mixer to vary the

compensation according to the position of the ailer-

ons / landing ﬂ aps.

MIX ”c1 ¼ al”

It is essential to provide a means of switching the

mixer on and off using the switch which controls the

aileron / landing ﬂ ap function (see previous page), to

ensure that this mixer only has any effect when the

aileron / landing ﬂ ap function is activated. The opti-

mum value has to be found by test-ﬂ ying.

And ﬁ nally a few words on the …

163

Programming example: F3A model

“FAIL-SAFE settings”

We strongly recommend that you make use of the safety

potential of this option by at least setting the throttle

position (glow-powered models) to idle, or the electric

motor to stop, if a fail-safe event should be triggered.

This simple precaution ensures that the model is much

less likely to create havoc and cause property dam-

age or personal injury. If you also program the fail-safe

positions of the control surfaces in such a way that the

model ﬂ ies steadily descending circles in case of inter-

ference, then you have a good chance that it will land

relatively gently even if the radio link fails for a protracted

period. This also gives you plenty of time to restore the

connection, should the whole 2.4 GHz frequency band

suffer interference for a while.

In the receiver’s default state, however, the servos

remain in their last valid position (“hold mode”) when in-

terference occurs. You can program any individual servo

output of your receiver to a “fail-safe position” (fail-safe

mode), as described on page 116.

Summary

The settings described on this page are intended

primarily for the expert ﬂ yer. Please bear in mind that

reﬁ ning the ﬂ ying characteristics of a model aeroplane

to this extent involves tremendous effort, time, sensitivity

and expertise. Some experts continue the program-

ming procedure even when they are ﬂ ying, although it

is not advisable to try this if you are just a moderately

advanced pilot making your ﬁ rst attempt with an F3A

aerobatic model. You would be well advised to request

help from an experienced pilot, and carry out the ﬁ ne-

tuning adjustments mentioned here one by one, with the

expert at your side, until your model exhibits the neutral

ﬂ ying characteristics you desire.

164 Programming example: model helicopter

Programming example: model helicopter

In this programming example we assume that you

have already read and understood the descriptions of

the individual menus, and are by now familiar with the

general handling of the transmitter. We also assume that

you have assembled and adjusted the helicopter exactly

according to the kit instructions. The electronic facilities

provided by the transmitter should never be used to

compensate for major mechanical inaccuracies.

As so often in life, there are various ways and means of

reaching a particular destination when programming the

mx-16 HoTT. In this example our intention is to provide

a sensibly structured course of action, so that you have

a clear idea of logical programming techniques. Where

there are several possible methods, we ﬁ rst describe the

simplest and most easily understood solution. It is likely

that the helicopter will work perfectly when set up in this

way, but naturally you are still free to try out other solu-

tions at a later stage, in case they suit you better.

As our programming example we take the Graupner

STARLET 50 helicopter, with right-hand rotation, three

swashplate linkage points distributed evenly at 120°

(“3Sv (2 roll)” type), a beginner’s set-up without en-

hanced throttle curve, without heading-lock gyro system,

no method of inﬂ uencing the gyro’s “normal operating

mode” from the transmitter, and with no speed governor

(regulator).

We have deliberately chosen this simple programming

project in order to demonstrate that it is possible to set

up a helicopter which ﬂ ies extremely well with relatively

little programming effort.

Nevertheless, we do not want to forfeit all the possible

reﬁ nement facilities: after the basic description you will

also ﬁ nd set-up notes on gyro gain, speed governors

and ﬂ ight phase programming.

Note:

If, in contrast to the glow-powered machine described

here, your main interest lies in electric-powered model

helicopters, then please read on! Apart from the idle

adjustments, which naturally do not apply, you can adopt

most of the settings described in the following section

virtually unchanged.

To initiate this typical programming exercise move to the

“Model memory” menu, then to the …

“select model” sub-menu (page 52),

… where you select a free model memory using the

arrow buttons of the left or right-hand touch-key:

¿¿free¿¿

R08

¿¿free¿¿

After touching the central SET button of the right-hand

touch-key, you can use the f button of the left or right-

hand touch-key to select …

Sel model type

( empty mod mem )

… the “Helicopter” model type. Conﬁ rm your choice by

touching the central SET button of the right-hand touch-

key, and the screen immediately switches to the basic

display.

Notes:

Once you have called up the “Model select” option it •

is not possible to interrupt the process, i. e. you must

choose one or other model type. Even if you switch

the transmitter off, then on again, you still have to

make this choice. However, if you make a mistake

you can always correct it simply by erasing the mod-

el memory.

If the warning message “Throttle too high” appears, •

you can erase it by turning the rotary proportional

knob CTRL 6 anti-clockwise to its end-point.

If the battery voltage is too low, you will not be able •

to change model memories for safety reasons. In this

case the screen displays an appropriate message:

not possible now

voltage too low

The memory should now be assigned an appropriate

name, which is entered in the …

165

Programming example: model helicopter

“Basic settings” menu (pages 64 … 71)

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

1 servo

cut off –––

+150%–100%

… using the characters which are available in the “Model

name” line of the second menu page:

0123456789

model name

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

STAR

PQRSTUVWXYZ

Once you have entered the “Model name” you should

check that the “Stick mode” is correct:

mod name

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

1 servo

cut off –––

+150%–100%

STARLET

In the next four lines we come to the ﬁ rst settings which

are speciﬁ c to helicopters:

In the “Swashplate type” line select the number of

servos which are used to actuate the swashplate. See

page 67 for more details of this.

In the “Rotor direction” line we enter the direction of

rotation of the main rotor as viewed from above. In the

“Collective pitch min.” line set “forward” or “rear” to suit

your personal preference. This setting applies equally to

all subsequent mixers, and it is therefore vital that you

do not change it later in order to alter individual mixer

directions, such as the direction of collective pitch or

throttle.

stick mode

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off –100% +150% 1

pitch min rear

At this point, if you have not already done so, the servos

should be connected to the receiver in the following

sequence:

Roll 2 servo

Gyro gain

Throttle servo

Tail rotor servo (gyro system)

Roll 1 servo

Pitch-axis servo

Free or auxiliary function

Auxiliary function

(speed governor)

Receiver power supply

The mixer ratios and mixer directions for the swashplate

servos for collective pitch, roll and pitch-axis are set in

the …

“Swashplate mixer” menu (page 112),

SP – MIXER

ptch

roll

nick

+61%

… where you will ﬁ nd that they are pre-set to +61% in

each case. If the swashplate does not respond correctly

to the stick movements, the ﬁ rst step is to change the

mixer directions from “+” to “-” if necessary. The second

recourse is to reverse the servo directions in the “Servo

settings” menu.

Note:

Please note one important difference in later Graupner

mc and mx radio control systems compared with

earlier equipment: the ﬁ rst collective pitch servo and the

throttle servo have been interchanged.

Now move to the …

“Servo settings” menu (page 72),

rev cent +

trav

100% 100%

… where you can set up the travels and directions of

rotation of the individual servos. The basic aim here

should be to keep servo travels at 100% wherever

possible, as this maintains best possible resolution and

accuracy. Use “Rev.” if necessary to change the direc-

166 Programming example: model helicopter

throttle servo. This section does not describe the spe-

cial features of this trim (“cut-off trim”) again, as it

is covered on page 40. (Thanks to the digital trims,

trim values are automatically stored when you switch

models and when you switch between ﬂ ight phases.)

You will ﬁ nd a detailed description of the basic idle •

set-up procedure and the method of adjusting idle

and throttle limit in the section starting on page 79.

Now use the arrow button f of the left or right-hand

touch-key to move to the “Travel” column, and increase

the value in the highlighted ﬁ eld from 100% to 125%,

with the throttle limiter at its forward end-stop.

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

+100% +125%

trv

free

ctrl6

Gas

Gyr

Lim

free

This ensures that the throttle limiter cannot possibly

restrict the full throttle travel dictated by the collective

pitch stick when the model is in ﬂ ight.

Set-up note for electric helicopters:

Since electric motors by their nature require no idle

setting, the only important point when setting up an

electric-powered model helicopter is that the adjustment

range of the throttle limiter should be set signiﬁ cantly

higher and lower than the adjustment range of the

speed controller, which is usually from -100% to +100%.

It may therefore be necessary to adjust the “Travel” value

of the throttle limiter to an appropriate value, such as a

symmetrical 110% setting. However, further ﬁ ne-tuning

can be carried out exactly as described here for the

glow-powered machine.

tion of rotation of any servo; do check carefully that the

direction you set really is correct. The tail rotor servo,

in particular, must operate in such a way that the nose

(!) of the helicopter moves in the direction which corre-

sponds to the movement of the tail rotor stick.

A glance at the …

“Transmitter control settings” menu (page 76)

trv

free

ctrl6

Gas

Gyr

Lim

+100%

+100% +100%

+100%

+100% +100%

free

… will show you that transmitter control “6”, i. e. the

rotary proportional control CTRL 6, is assigned to the

“Lim” input, whereas all other inputs are programmed

to “free” by default. The “Lim” input serves as throttle

limiter. It acts solely on output “6”, to which the throttle

servo is connected.

Just to remind you:

Using the “Throttle limiter” function eliminates the •

need to program an “Idle-up” ﬂ ight phase.

The throttle limiter does not control the throttle ser-•

vo; it simply limits the travel of this servo in the for-

ward direction, according to the setting of the throt-

tle limiter, when required. The throttle servo is usually

controlled by the collective pitch stick via the throttle

curve or curves you have set in the “Helimix” menu,

for which reason input 6 should always be left “free”.

For more details please refer to the sections on pag-

es 96 and 97 of the manual.

Moreover the Ch 1 trim only affects a helicopter’s •

An additional function needs to be activated in the …

“Basic model settings” menu (pages 64 … 71).

Even if you are a beginner to ﬂ ying and are not yet

ready for this, it is advisable at least to deﬁ ne the auto-

rotation switch, so that you have an “emergency cut”

switch for the motor. This is carried out by selecting the

“Auto-rotation” line using the arrow buttons cd of the

left or right-hand touch-key, brieﬂ y touching the central

SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and then moving

one of the two-position switches (SW 2 or 8) to the “ON”

setting. The switch number (in our example “2”) now

appears on the right of the screen.

rear

5:00 C3

–––

phase 2

phase 3

hover

speed

pitch min

timer

autorotat.

This switch should be located at a position on the trans-

mitter where you can easily reach it without letting go of

the stick, e. g. above the collective pitch stick.

Note:

For more information on setting up this “emergency OFF

switch” please refer to the section in the centre column

of the following page.

And another tip:

Please make it a habit to give all the switches a common

“on” direction; then a quick glance at the transmitter

before ﬂ ying will soon reassure you that all switches are

“off”.

If you wish, you could at this point move up two lines

167

Programming example: model helicopter

and assign a ﬂ ight phase switch for ﬂ ight phase 2, which

is already assigned the name “Hover”, but this simple

programming example deliberately excludes such reﬁ ne-

ments.

You have now completed the basic settings at the

transmitter, i. e. the procedure which you will need to use

time and again when setting up a new model. The actual

helicopter-speciﬁ c set-up is carried out primarily in the …

“Heli mixers” menu (pages 94 … 105).

ch1

ptch

thro

tail

normal

gyro 0%

inp8 0%

In the very ﬁ rst line you will see the “Collective pitch”

function, and a brief press on the central SET button of

the right-hand touch-key takes you to the appropriate

sub-menu. At this point you will see a graphic represen-

tation of the collective pitch curve. This is initially deﬁ ned

by only three reference points, and in most cases this is

quite adequate.

Tip:

Always try to manage with these three reference points

initially, as additional points just complicate matters,

and extra complexity is just what you don’t need at the

moment.

The reference point for hovering should generally be the

mechanical centre-point of the collective pitch stick, as

this position feels completely natural to most pilots. You

can, of course, set up the curve to locate the hover at a

different point, but you should not be tempted to do this

unless you know exactly what you are doing. Start by

setting the collective pitch stick to centre. Assuming that

you previously adjusted the servos in accordance with

the manufacturer’s instructions, the servo output arms

will now (usually) be at right-angles to the servo case.

If you have not already done so, adjust the mechani-

cal linkages to the rotor head so that all the blades are

set to a collective pitch angle of 4° to 5° positive for the

hover. All known helicopters will ﬂ y at this setting.

Now push the collective pitch stick fully forward to the

maximum collective pitch point (the full-length vertical

line indicates the current position of the stick). Adjust

Point 5 on the collective pitch curve using the arrow but-

tons of the right-hand touch-key, with the aim of obtain-

ing a maximum collective pitch setting of around 9° at

the main rotor blades. This point should be at a value of

around +50%.

Note:

A rotor blade set-up gauge, e. g. the Graupner item,

Order No. 61, is very useful when setting up blade pitch

angles, as you can read off the angles directly.

Now pull the collective pitch stick right back to the

collective pitch minimum position. Set the blade pitch

angle for Point 1 to 0 to -4°, depending on your piloting

ability. This produces a graph line with a slight angle at

the hover point, forming what is known as the collective

pitch curve. It might look approximately like this:

input

output

point 5

–100%

–80%

ptch

normal

If you now switch to the auto-rotation phase - you will

see the name of the ﬂ ight phase “Autorot” at bottom left

on the screen - the “old” collective pitch curve will re-ap-

pear. In this phase you should set the same values as in

the normal phase, with the following exception: increase

the pitch angle at Point 5 (collective pitch maximum) by

about 2°. This gives slightly more pitch for ﬂ aring the

model when practising “autos” at a later (!) date.

Once you have set up the collective pitch curve, oper-

ate the auto-rotation switch again, then brieﬂ y touch the

central ESC button of the left-hand touch-key to return

to the helicopter mixer menu select point. Now we move

on to the “Ch1 ¼thro” line, where you can set up the

throttle curve.

The ﬁ rst step here is to enter the idle trim range by

adjusting the throttle curve. Move the collective pitch

stick to the minimum position, and set Point 1 to a value

of around -65%.

input

output

point 5

–100%

–65%

normal

thro

With the throttle limiter closed and the idle trim fully

open, pull the collective pitch stick to the “fully back”

position and move it slightly to and fro: the throttle servo

should not respond to this movement. This arrangement

gives you a seamless transition from idle trim to the

throttle curve. You will probably need to make further ad-

justments to the throttle curve, but this process must be

carried out later as part of the ﬂ ight-testing procedure.

If you now switch temporarily from this graph to the

168 Programming example: model helicopter

auto-rotation ﬂ ight phase, you will see - instead of the

usual display - the following:

Autorot

thro

off

This means that the throttle servo has switched to a

ﬁxed value, which can be adjusted as follows:

Press ESC to return to the menu list. Assuming that you

are still in the auto-rotation phase, this will now include

new sub-menus.

The important line is “Throttle”, where you should set

a value of around +125% or -125%, depending on the

direction of servo rotation.

tail

ptch

thro

Autorot

gyro 0%

inp8 0%

–125%

This setting ensures that the motor stops reliably in

the auto-rotation phase (to allow you to cope with an

emergency). Later, when you have gained sufﬁ cient

experience to practise auto-rotation landings, the setting

should be changed to a value which provides a reliable

idle.

Set-up note for electric helicopters:

Since the motor must be stopped completely if an emer-

gency occurs with an electric-powered model helicopter,

this setting can be adopted unchanged.

At present the remaining sub-menus are of no interest.

Simply switch “Auto-rotation” off, and move back to the

ﬁ rst menu list.

Call up the set-up page of the “Ch1 ¼ tail rotor” menu:

this is where you set static torque compensation (DMA)

for the tail rotor. Once again, please restrict yourself

to the three default reference points; everything else

is the preserve of the experienced pilot. For the initial

set-up - intended for a heading-lock gyro system - the

uniform pre-set values of 0% should be changed to

-30% at Point 1 (collective pitch minimum) and +30%

at the opposite end, Point 5 (collective pitch maximum),

although you may ﬁ nd it necessary to adjust the settings

slightly later.

input

output

point 5

–100%

–30%

normal

tail

Now switch back to the auto-rotation phase for a mo-

ment. The set-up curve is disabled here, with the result

that the tail rotor servo no longer responds to collective

pitch commands (when the main rotor is not powered,

there is no rotor torque to be corrected).

The - static - pre-set of the gyro effect principle (“normal”

or “heading lock” mode), and also the gyro gain can now

be altered by setting a value other than “0” in the “Gyro”

line:

ch1

ptch

thro

tail

normal

gyro 0%

inp8 0%

Please be sure to read and observe the set-up

instructions supplied with your gyro at this point,

as there is a possibility that your helicopter will be

uncontrollable if you set it up incorrectly!

If your gyro features gain control from the transmitter -

unlike the type we are using in this example - you will

need another free proportional control for it, e. g. CTRL

7. This can be assigned to the “Gyro” input in the …

“Transmitter control settings” menu (page 76).

trv

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

thr

gyr

lim

+100% +100%

free

Turn the rotary control until its number (transmitter

control number) appears on the screen, then use the ar-

row button f of the left or right-hand touch-key to move

to the ASY ﬁ eld in the “Travel” column. Brieﬂ y press the

central SET button of the right-hand touch-key, and you

will be able to set a maximum gyro gain such as 50% in

the now highlighted ﬁ eld:

169

Programming example: model helicopter

+100% +100%

+50% +50%

trv

free

ctrl 6

ctrl 7

thr

gyr

lim

free

This represents a safe ﬁ xed value which is maintained

as long as the rotary control is at its right-hand end-stop.

You will probably need to adjust the value in the course

of ﬂ ight-testing. Additional notes on setting up gyros can

be found on pages 98 / 99.

Further adjustments

If you have followed this programming example, you will

have a helicopter which is set up properly, and in an

ideal state for hovering practice and simple circuits. Of

course, you may wish to activate further functions de-

pending on your skill and ﬂ ying experience. If you wish

to ﬂ y using different rotor speeds and trim set-ups, you

will need to activate a series of “ﬂ ight phases”, which

can be called up via switches which you assign. The ﬁ rst

step in this process is to call up the …

“Basic model settings” menu (pages 64 … 71),

pitch min rear

timer 10:01 C3

phase 2

phase 3

hover

acro

autorotat. 2

–––

… assign a switch to “Phase 2”, e. g. SW 8, and enter a

relevant name (if you wish).

It is important to be quite clear in your mind that auto-

rotation always has absolute precedence over any

other phases. This simply means: if you operate the

auto-rotation switch, you immediately move to the auto-

rotation phase from either of the other two ﬂ ight phases

(“normal” phase and “phase 2”).

Now move back to the “Helimix” menu, switch to “Phase

2” (which you have just set up), and modify the settings

accordingly. Since the mx-16 HoTT features digital

trims, in the Heli program all the trim positions for the

control functions “roll”, “pitch-axis” and “tail rotor” are

stored separately for each ﬂ ight phase, in addition to the

other menu settings which you entered separately for

each ﬂ ight phase (see page 94).

For example, if the motor run is limited by the fueltank

size or battery capacity, you should set the stopwatch

to count down. Enter the maximum possible motor

run time, e. g. “5 min.”. The transmitter’s sounder now

starts emitting warning sounds starting at “30 s” before

“zero”, as described on page 67 / 68. You could assign

the transmitter control switch “G3” to this timer, by ﬁ rst

activating switch assignment and then turning the throt-

tle limit control from its idle position in the direction of

full-throttle:

rotor direct

swashplate

right

3sv(2rol)

cut off –100% +150% 1

pitch min rear

timer 5:00 C3

With the stopwatch halted, touch the cd or ef but-

tons of the left-hand touch-key (CLEAR) simultaneously

at the basic display, so that the stopwatch switches to

the “Timer” function. The timer then starts automatically

when you move the throttle limit slider towards full-

throttle, and stops again when you move the limiter back

to the idle range.

Suggested reﬁ nement: speed governor

At some time you may wish to install a speed governor

(regulator) in your helicopter, e. g. the mc-Heli-Control,

to try ﬂ ying with a system rotational speed which is

automatically maintained at a constant value. It makes

sense to couple the individual rotor speeds with the

ﬂ ight phases, as this enables you to carry out further

ﬁ ne-tuning.

The initial requirement when programming the transmit-

ter is to install and program the speed governor exactly

in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Of

course, the mx-16 HoTT provides further facilities to

allow you to implement different rotational speeds in the

individual ﬂ ight phases. A practical suggestion, which

includes the throttle limiter function, can be found in the

section starting on page 97.

If you have set up your helicopter as described in this

programming example, you will ﬁ nd that it is capable

of carrying out extremely challenging ﬂ ight tasks even

though it is not suitable for competition work.

We suggest that you should not make use of additional

functions until your model is ﬂ ying perfectly, so that you

will be in a position to recognise and appreciate any

improvements. Whenever possible, it is always best to

implement additional reﬁ nements one at a time, other-

wise you won’t know which change has brought about

any improvement. Bear in mind that the good pilot is

not recognised by the number of complex functions with

which he can cope, but by the results he can obtain

when ﬂ ying a relatively simple set-up.

170 Appendix

PRX (Power for Receiver)

Order No. 4136

A highly developed stabilised receiver power supply with intelligent

power management.

The unit constitutes a stabilised user-selectable power supply for the

receiver, and provides a further enhancement in the reliability of the

airborne power supply. It is designed for use with different types of

receiver battery, to ensure that it is straightforward and versatile in use.

When the model is operating, even brief collapses in battery voltage

are stored and displayed, offering the user the means of detecting a

receiver battery which is not “up to the job”, or failing.

For use with one or two receiver batteries (simultaneous discharge if •

two batteries are employed)

Suitable for ﬁ ve-cell or six-cell NiMH batteries, or two-cell LiPo or •

LiFe packs. Graupner/JR, G3.5, G2 and BEC connector systems.

Three user-selectable receiver power voltage levels: 5.1 V / 5.5 V / •

5.9 V.

Two ultra-bright LEDs indicate the operational status of batteries 1 •

and 2 separately.

Integral high-quality On / Off switch.•

Constructed to cope with high-current applications.•

Low-proﬁ le switch and LEDs to avoid spoiling the appearance and •

efﬁ ciency of the model.

Straight-through design of mounting lugs, LEDs and switch for sim-•

ple installation using drilling template (supplied).

Appendix

Graupner HoTT Vario module

Order No. 33601

Vario with altitude signals and ﬁ ve different tones for climb and

descent; altitude display and storage of min. and max. altitude.

Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, two-•

stage climb and descent rate

Variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, constant•

Variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once•

The vario sensor can be connected directly to the receiver’s telem-•

etry input.

Speciﬁ cation

Altitude measurement: -500 m ... +3000 m•

Resolution: 0.1 m•

Sensitivity, vario: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/s, 3 m/s, program-•

mable per beep

Calculated average value: 4 - 20 measurements per measured •

value, programmable

Graupner HoTT GPS / Vario module

Order No. 33600

Vario with altitude signals and ﬁ ve different tones for climb and

descent, plus GPS with range measurement, distance measurement,

speed indicator, display of ﬂ ight direction and co-ordinates

Additional warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, two-•

stage climb and descent rate

Altitude display, storage of min. and max. altitude•

Variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, constant•

Variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once•

The GPS / Vario sensor can be connected directly to the receiver’s •

telemetry input.

Speciﬁ cation, vario

Altitude measurement: -500 m ... +3000 m•

Resolution: 0.1 m•

Sensitivity, vario: 0.5 m/3s, 1 m/3s, 0.5 m/s, 1 m/s, 3 m/s, program-•

mable per beep

Calculated average value: 4 - 20 measurements per measured val-•

ue, programmable

171

Appendix

Graupner HoTT General Engine Module

Order No. 33610

General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with internal-

combustion or electric power system:

2 x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds •

for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature

Individual cell measurement with min. voltage warning thresholds•

Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds •

for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current

Programmable current limiting•

Current measurement with 2 x 1 mOhm shunt resistors in parallel = •

0.5 mOhm

Rev-count measurement and warning thresholds for min. and max. •

rotational speed

Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25% increments (re-•

quires software update)

User-variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-•

stant

User-variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once•

2 x temperature measurement, optionally 0 to 120°C or 200°C, also •

voltage measurement up to 80 V DC

1 x rev-count measurement up to 100,000 rpm with two-blade pro-•

peller

1 x speed controller / servo input, 1 x speed governor input, 1 x •

speed controller / servo output for rotational speed governor

etc. see product at www.graupner.de•

Graupner HoTT General Air Module

Order No. 33611

General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and models with internal-

combustion or electric power system:

Vario with altitude signals, climb and descent signals, and addition-•

al warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, climb and two-

stage descent rate

Altitude indicator (-500 … +3000 m), storage of min. and max. alti-•

tude

2 x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds •

for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature

Individual cell measurement with min. voltage warning thresholds•

Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds •

for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current

Rev-count measurement and programmable speed governor, also •

warning thresholds for min. and max. rotational speed

Fuel measurement with warning thresholds in 25% increments (re-•

quires software update)

User-variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-•

stant

User-variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once•

2 x temperature measurement, optionally 0 to 120°C or 200°C, also •

voltage measurement up to 80 V DC

1 x rev-count measurement up to 100,000 rpm with two-blade pro-•

peller

etc. see product at www.graupner.de•

Graupner HoTT Electric Air-Module

Order No. 33620

General sensor for Graupner HoTT receivers and electric-powered

models:

Vario with altitude signals, climb and descent signals, and addition-•

al warning thresholds for min. altitude, max. altitude, two-stage climb

and descent rate

Altitude indicator (-500 … +3000 m), storage of min. and max. alti-•

tude.

2 x temperature and voltage measurements with warning thresholds •

for min. and max. voltage and min. and max. temperature

Individual cell measurement 2 ... 14S with min. voltage warning •

thresholds

Voltage, current and capacity measurement with warning thresholds •

for min. and max. voltage, max. capacity and max. current

User-variable warning time: OFF, 5, 10, 15, 20, 25, 30 seconds, con-•

stant

User-variable warning repeat time: constant, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 min, once•

2 x temperature measurement, optionally 0 to 120°C or 200°C, also •

voltage measurement up to 80 V DC

1 x speed controller input, 1 x speed controller output for power re-•

duction due to low voltage of individual cells

1 x current, voltage and capacity measurement, up to 150 A (peak 1 •

sec. 320 A) and up to 60 V

1 x individual cell monitoring for 2 - 14S Lithium batteries (LiPo, LiIo, •

LiFe)

etc. see product at www.graupner.de•

172 Appendix

Graupner HoTT Smart-Box

Order No. 33700

A vast range of different functions combined in a single device: that’s

what destines the SMART-BOX to be your intelligent companion in

future. Whether you want to display telemetry data in real time, or

enter changes to your HoTT system, the large-area screen with 8 x 21

characters makes the task simple. The ﬂ exible Smart-Box includes an

integral buzzer for generating audible signals and warnings for even

greater ﬂ exibility and practicality.

The installation set supplied makes it easy to mount the unit on the

support bars of hand-held transmitters, allowing you to position it in

such a way that you can read off telemetry data in real time while you

control your model.

The user-update facility ensures that the SMART-BOX is always up-to-

date, and provides a route for expanded functions in future.

Transmitter voltage display with •

user-variable warning threshold

Country setting•

Range check• Signal quality•

Receiver temperature• Receiver voltage•

Servo reverse• Servo neutral position•

Servo travel• Cycle time•

Channel swap• Fail-Safe settings•

Mixer settings• Servo test•

Dimensions: approx. 76 mm x 72 mm x 17 mm (L x W x H)

Weight: approx. 55g

Graupner HoTT RPM magnet sensor

Order No. 33616

Graupner HoTT RPM optical sensor

Order No. 33615

173

For your notes

175

Guarantee certiﬁ cate

Wir gewähren auf dieses Erzeugnis eine Garantie von

This product is warrantied for

Sur ce produit nous accordons une garantie de

Monaten

months

mois

Guarantee certiﬁ cate

Servicestellen / Service / Service après-vente

Graupner-Zentralservice

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG

Henriettenstrasse 94 - 96

D-73230 Kirchheim

Servicehotline

 (+49) 0 18 05 47 28 76*

Montag - Freitag

9:30-11:30 + 13:00-15:00 Uhr

United Kingdom

Graupner Service

Brunel Drive

GB, NEWARK, Nottingham-

shire

NG242EG

 (+44) 16 36 61 05 39

Sverige

Baltechno Electronics

Box 5307

S 40227 Göteborg

 (+46) 31 70 73 00 0

Schweiz

Graupner Service

Wehntalerstrasse 37

CH 8181 Höri

 (+41) 43 26 66 58 3

Luxembourg

Kit Flammang

129, route d’Arlon

L 8009 Strassen

 (+35) 23 12 23 2

France

Graupner France

Gérard Altmayer

86, rue St. Antoine

F 57601 Forbach-Oeting

 (+33) 3 87 85 62 12

Espana

Anguera Hobbies

C/Terrassa 14

E 43206 Reus (Tarragona).

 (+34) 97 77 55 32 0

info@anguera-hobbies.com

Ceská Republika

Slovenská Republika

RC Service Z. Hnizdil

Letecka 666/22

CZ 16100 Praha 6 - Ruzyne

 (+42) 2 33 31 30 95

Belgie/Belgique/Nederland

Jan van Mouwerik

Slot de Houvelaan 30

NL 3155 Maasland VT

 (+31) 10 59 13 59 4

Italia

GiMax

Via Manzoni, no. 8

I 25064 Gussago

 (+39) 030 25 22 73 2

* 0,14 Cent / Minute aus dem

Festnetz der deutschen

T-Com. Abweichende Preise

für Anrufe aus Mobilfunknet-

zen oder aus dem Festnetz

anderer Anbieter möglich.

Die Fa. Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94 - 96,

D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck gewährt ab dem Kaufdatum auf

dieses Produkt eine Garantie von 24 Monaten. Die Garantie

gilt nur für die bereits beim Kauf des Produktes vorhandenen

Material- oder Funktionsmängel. Schäden, die auf Abnützung,

Überlastung, falsches Zubehör oder unsachgemäße Behand-

lung zurückzuführen sind, sind von der Garantie ausgeschlos-

sen. Die gesetzlichen Rechte und Gewährleistunsansprüche

des Verbrauchers werden durch diese Garantie nicht berührt.

Bitte überprüfen Sie vor einer Reklamation oder Rücksendung

das Produkt genau auf Mängel, da wir Ihnen bei Mängelfreiheit

die entstandenen Unkosten in Rechnung stellen müssen.

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94 - 96. D-73230

Kirchheim/Teck, Germany guarantees this product for a period

of 24 months from date of purchase. The guarantee applies

only to such material or operational defects witch are present

at the time of purchase of the product. Damage due to wear,

overloading, incompetent handling or the use of incorrect

accessories is not covered by the guarantee. The user´s legal

rights and claims under guarantee are not affected by this

guarantee. Please check the product carefully for defects be-

fore you are make a claim or send the item to us, since we are

obliged to make a charge for our cost if the product is found to

be free of faults.

La société Graupner GmbH & Co. KG, Henriettenstraße 94-96,

D-73230 Kirchheim/Teck, accorde sur ce produit une garantie

de 24 mois à compter de la date d’achat. La garantie ne

s’applique qu’aux défauts de matériel et de fonctionnement

du produit acheté. Les dommages dus à une usure, à une

surcharge, à l’emploi d’accessoires non compatibles ou à une

manipulation non conforme sont exclus de la garantie. Cette

garantie ne remet pas en cause les droits légaux des consom-

mateurs. Avant toute réclamation ou retour de matériel, vériﬁ ez

précisément les défauts ou vices constatés, car si le matériel

est conforme et qu’aucun défaut n’a été constaté par nos

services, nous nous verrions contraints de facturer le coût de

cette intervention.

Garantie-Urkunde

Warranty certiﬁ cate / Certiﬁ cat de garantie

mx-16 HoTT Set

Order No. 33116

Übergabedatum:

Date of purchase/delivery:

Date d’achat :

Name des Käufers:

Owner´s name:

Nom de I`acheteur :

Straße, Wohnort:

Complete address:

Adresse complète :

Firmenstempel und Unterschrift des Einzelhändlers:

Stamp and signature of dealer:

Cachet et signature du détaillant :

178 FCC Information

FCC Information

Graupner mx-12 HoTT #33112

FCC ID: ZGZ-mx-12

FCC Label Compliance Statement

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference.1.

This device must accept any interference received, 2.

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

WARNING:

Changes or modiﬁ cations not expressly approved by

the party responsible for compliance could void the

user‘s authority to operate the equipment.

NOTE

This equipment has been tested and found to comply

with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to

Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to

provide reasonable protection against harmful interfer-

ence in a residential installation. This equipment gener-

ates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and,

if not installed and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to radio communi-

cations. However, there is no guarantee that interference

will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment

does cause harmful interference to radio or television

reception, which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to

correct the interference by one or more of the following

measures:

Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.•

Increase the separation between the equipment and •

receiver.

Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit dif-•

ferent from that to which the receiver is connected.

Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV tech-•

nician for help.

RF Exposure Statement

This device has been evaluated to meet the FCC RF

exposure requirement when used in combination with

the genuine Graupner HoTT accessoires and operated

with a minimum distance of 20 cm between the antenna

and your body.

33112_mx12_HoTT_2_GB.indd Abs55:178

06.06.2011 19:39:58

ZKZ-MX-16-20A

Graupner mx-16 HoTT

FCC radiation exposure statement:

1. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful interference.

(2) This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

2. Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for compliance

could void the user's authority to operate the

equipment.

FCC statement

This equipment complies with FCC radiation

exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled

environment. This equipment should be

installed and operated with minimum distance

20cm between the radiator & your body

HOPPING.TELEMETRY.TRANSMISSION

GRAUPNER GMBH & CO. KG

POSTFACH 1242

D-73220 KIRCHHEIM/TECK

GERMANY

http://www.graupner.de

Modiﬁ cations and availability reserved. Graupner products

are only available through model shops. We will gladly

inform you of your nearest stockist. We accept no liability

for printing errors.

Printed in Germany PN.PC-01

Although we have carefully checked the information contained in these instructions and

checked that it is correct, we can accept no liability of any kind for mistakes, incomplete

information and printing errors. Graupner reserves the right to alter the characteristics

and features of the software and hardware at any time and without prior notiﬁ cation.

Graupner and KG MX-16-20A Computer System Graupner HoTT User Manual ZKZ MX 16 20

Graupner GmbH & Co. KG Computer System Graupner HoTT ZKZ MX 16 20

Users Manual

Navigation menu

Namespaces

Views

Navigation